Revit Architecture 2009

Metric Tutorials

240A1-050000-PM04A

April 2008

©

2008 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, Freewheel, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Recognize, Render Queue, Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, SteeringWheels, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Wiretap, and WiretapCentral The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, and Wire All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved. Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the

copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Getting Chapter 1

Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Chapter 2 Express Workshop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating Details with Revit Architecture . . . . . Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data . Model-Based Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . Keynoting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture . Project Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . Project Detail Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . Project Title Sheet Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 28 . 31 . 38 . 41 . 42 . 47 . 51

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 . 60 . 64 . 72 . 77 . 82 . 85

v

Linking the Structural Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Adding a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . . . . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View . Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 . 155 . 159 . 166 . 172 . 175 . 176 . 179 . 182 . 184 . 187 . 192 . 192 . 196 . 201 . 202

Chapter 5

Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 . 207 . 213 . 217 . 220 . 221 . 226 . 228 . 230 . 232 . 238 . 246 . 249 . 249 . 251 . 254 . 258 . 258 . 260 . 260

Chapter 6

Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263 Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265

vi | Contents

Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . .

. 270 . 270 . 279 . 281 . 286 . 289 . 290

Chapter 7

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 . 298 . 304 . 308 . 310 . 312 . 314 . 319 . 320 . 321 . 321 . 323

Chapter 8

Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . . Creating a Component Legend . Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . Working with Revisions . . . . . Importing from Other Applications . . Importing Image Files . . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339 . 339 . 345 . 345 . 347 . 347 . 351 . 356 . 356 . 358 . 360 . 361 . 367 . 368 . 368 . 369

Chapter 9

Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Exterior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 . 392 . 399 . 403 . 407 . 411 . 412 . 415

Contents | vii

Creating the Interior Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 419 . 424 . 425 . 428 . 430

Chapter 11

Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-orienting the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mirroring the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431 . 432 . 433 . 435 . 437 . 438 . 439 . 440 . 440 . 443 . 444 . 444 . 447 . 447 . 448 . 454 . 454

Chapter 12

Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458 . 459 . 460 . 462 . 466 . 467 . 469 . 471 . 472 . 476 . 478 . 481 . 484 . 491 . 492 . 499 . 503

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505 Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523 Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525 Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536

viii | Contents

Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 539 . 539 . 541 . 544 . 548 . 548 . 550 . 552

Chapter 15

Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Low Slope Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557 . 557 . 562 . 565 . 567 . 571 . 572 . 574 . 576 . 578 . 586 . 587 . 588 . 590

Chapter 16

Area

Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593

Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593 Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600

Chapter 17

Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Swept Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Masses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mass Study Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 603 . 604 . 610 . 611 . 616 . 616 . 618 . 621 . 624 . 624 . 627 . 628 . 631 . 634 . 638 . 640 . 644 . 649

Chapter 18

Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653
Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 653 . 653 . 661 . 665 . 668 . 668

Contents | ix

Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674 Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 674

Chapter 19

Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 677 . 678 . 684 . 689 . 690 . 698 . 703 . 706 . 710 . 713

Chapter 20

Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 717 . 718 . 718 . 722 . 726 . 729 . 734

Chapter 21

Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739
Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 739 . 740 . 750 . 757

Chapter 22

Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 761 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768

Chapter 23

Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 772 . 772 . 781 . 784 . 786 . 789 . 789 . 791 . 795 . 796 . 797

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 801 Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803 Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805

x | Contents

Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 807 . 808 . 811 . 811 . 815 . 817 . 820 . 825 . 827 . 828 . 831 . 831 . 832 . 837 . 839 . 842 . 843 . 845

Contents | xi

xii

Getting Started

1

2

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2009 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to use the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to find the training files and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file.

3

The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2009\Training. Training files are grouped into 3 folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a training file?
A training file is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing training file. Open a training file 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of training file.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the training file name, and click Open. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required. For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt. For Files of type, verify that Project Files (*.rvt) is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template 7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing training file, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse.

Accessing Training Files | 5

As you work in drawing and schedule views. and phases when you need it. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. If the length of the elevation is changed. and schedules required for a building project. the hierarchy of elements. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. review the Revit Architecture templates. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. ■ ■ How does Revit Architecture 2009 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. 6 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. Understanding the Basics In this lesson. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. click Training Files. and click Open. Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the door retains this relationship to the partition. 12 Select DefaultMetric. In this case. construction. 11 In the Choose Template dialog. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. scope. the floor or roof remains connected. Templates are available for specific building types: commercial. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit Architecture is built. and residential. drawings. and plans. the operation of the software is parametric. You learn the terminology. the parameter is one of association or connection. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and customize the project as necessary. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. how to navigate the user interface. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. If you move the partition. every drawing sheet. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. you will use the default template. and open Metric\Templates.rte. What is Revit Architecture 2009? The Revit Architecture platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. In this case. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.10 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. sections. 13 Click OK. In the Revit Architecture model. schedules. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. drawing sheets. For most tutorial projects. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. 2D and 3D view. hence. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. quantities.

For example. tags. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. For example. grids. For example. For example. Revit Architecture uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. and 2D detail components. Examples include detail lines. doors. walls and roofs are hosts. tags. Revit Architecture uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. ■ This implementation provides flexibility for designers. and reference planes are datum elements. windows. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. Datum elements help to define project context. levels. and keynotes are annotation elements. If you can draw. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. doors. windows. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. They display in relevant views of the model. and cabinets are model components. programming is not required. They help to describe or document the model. walls. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. dimensions. For example. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. Understanding the Basics | 7 . For example. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.When you change something. dimensions. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. filled regions. and roofs are model elements.

By using a single project file. section views.In Revit Architecture. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. Often. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. and types. you must be in a section or elevation view. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. views of the project. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. from geometry to construction data. industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. and ceilings. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. This information includes components used to design the model. for example. and drawings of the design. However. Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. you do nothing to establish these relationships. Understanding Revit Architecture 2009 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common. schedules. first floor. you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan next to it Element: When creating a project. Revit Architecture classifies elements by categories. Project: In Revit Architecture. and so forth). you can explicitly control them. by locking a dimension or aligning 2 walls. for example. families. or bottom of foundation. top of wall. floors. such as roofs. To place levels. elevation views. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. 8 | Chapter 1 Introduction . In other cases. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The project file contains all information for the building design. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. some terms are unique to Revit Architecture. Most often.

For example. Families are either component families or system families: ■ Component families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example. 6-panel colonial doors could be considered one family. A type can be a specific size of a family. Navigating the User Interface One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use. ■ ■ ■ Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). ■ Type: Each family can have several types. specifically its clear user interface. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions. identical use. A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). However. you navigate and become familiar with the user interface. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. categories of model elements include walls and beams. A type can also be a style. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families can be transferred between projects.Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. Navigating the User Interface | 9 . making it easy to understand what each button represents. such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. ceilings. you can create different types of walls with different compositions. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. floors. In the following illustration. the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system. and levels. although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. For example. Categories of annotation elements include tags and text notes. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. the user interface is labeled. dimensions. roofs. such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. In the steps that follow. and similar graphical representation. System families include walls. learning Revit Architecture is much easier. Family: Families are classes of elements in a category.

click (New). The title bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . By default. the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view.Start a new project 1 On the Standard toolbar. This creates a new project based on the default template. new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based. The Title Bar 2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface. In addition.

The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 Click Window menu ➤ Toolbar. The bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. you type the required key combination to perform the command. While working in the drawing area. You can control the visibility of the toolbars and turn the text labels on or off using the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. There are several toolbars across the top of the window beneath the menu bar. Click View menu ➤ Zoom. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . Edit. which are listed on the menu. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Another time-saving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. For example. The toolbar buttons represent common commands.The Menu Bar 3 The menu bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. A shortcut menu displays a list of available commands. depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. Many of the commands have shortcut keys.

8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall.6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list. 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. when you add a door. 9 In the Type Selector. When you select the Door tool. You can use the Type Selector in 2 ways: ■ You can select an element type before you add the element to the building model. the door type that displays in the Type Selector is the door type that will be added to the building model. the Type Selector displays a list of doors available in the project. The design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. For example. a door type is specified. select the drop-down list to see the walls that are available. On the left side of the Options Bar. The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The list of elements in the Type Selector is identical to the elements listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category.

■ You can use the Type Selector to change an element type after it has been added to the building model. you can select any element and then change its type using the Type Selector. In the drawing area. containing buttons grouped by function. The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog. immediately below the Type Selector. The Show Design Bars dialog displays.

TIP You can control the visibility of each tab by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the shortcut menu.11 Click OK. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . ■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for adding annotation symbols and creating sheet details for construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered images Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for creating conceptual designs with masses Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to the project Construction tab: commands for creating construction industry information ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ To access the commands in a tab. The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. select Views (all). The respective commands display on the Design Bar. click the tab in the Design Bar. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu bar. In the Project Browser.

double-click its name. walls. sheets. and groups. schedules.You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. To open a view. ■ ■ ■ 13 In the Type Selector. family category (doors. The browser is dockable. windows). so you can reposition it by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. families. and rename views. elevations. and group name. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. families. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. Expand or collapse the browser list by clicking the + or – next to the name. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. reports. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. 3D). delete. The browser is organized by view type (floor plans.

the status bar provides information regarding what you should do next. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. Do not click. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. After creating a browser organization scheme. In this case. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for views and sheets. In the bottom left corner of the window. click Wall. The cursor displays as a pencil. 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. click Cancel.

Make sure you place the cursor over the elevation directional arrow. You can select a topic on the Contents tab.18 On the Design Bar. 19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. context-sensitive help is available for many parts of the user interface. If no Help button displays. you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. Tooltips: To see tooltips. When you place the cursor over an element. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture In this exercise. Click the Help button. The status bar also provides information. You can access context-sensitive help in the following ways: ■ Dialogs: Many dialogs include Help buttons. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you can use the status bar and TAB to switch between elements and select the desired element. In the status bar. regarding selected elements in a view. and notice that the highlighted element switches to the main elevation symbol. and then click a specific menu command or button for help. press F1 for help. 20 Press TAB. The elevation symbol consists of two parts: the main symbol and the elevation directional arrow (a triangle). Revit Architecture 2009 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2009 Help. in conjunction with tooltips. You can use this tri-pane. notice that the name of the highlighted element is Views : Elevation : West. When attempting to select a specific element in a complex or crowded view. You can also press SHIFT+F1. In addition. Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session. There are several tools that help you find information. and the topic specific to the dialog opens. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Windows: From any window. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 17 . You can control the status bar visibility from the Window menu. press F1 for context-sensitive help. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. find a keyword on the Index tab. After you are familiar with these tasks. TIP You can control the level of tooltip assistance using Settings menu ➤ Options. Elevations : Elevation : Elevation 5. it highlights and the status bar displays the element name. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the tooltip displays. click on the Standard toolbar. Toolbar: From the toolbar. click Modify to end the Wall command.

rvt.Use zoom commands to adjust the view In the tutorials. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom menu. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). 5 On the View toolbar. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window. In the drawing area. In the following steps. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. For example. click Training Files. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. the view zooms out from the building model. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and their shortcut keys. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . There are several ways to access zoom options. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

use a zoom menu command or the toolbar option to zoom out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. The view of the building model is sized to fit the available window.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the Zoom In Region command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 19 . click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. 7 Click in the drawing area. When you release the mouse button. If you do not have a wheel mouse. and type the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. 8 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. As you move the mouse. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 Click Zoom To Fit. 12 Click and hold the mouse button. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. . the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. click The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. 9 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 10 To display SteeringWheels. To modify or add snap increments. 11 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. on the View toolbar. the view zooms in on the selected area. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area.

it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. expand Views (all). and tops of selected walls in elevation views and 3D views. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. moving the wheel to the desired location. Similar controls. Small blue dots. and click the SteeringWheels tab. Resize elements using drag controls 16 In the Project Browser. and then using the Zoom tool again. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . display along the ends. referred to as shape handles. 15 To exit the wheel. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. as shown.13 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. 17 Type ZR. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. click Settings menu ➤ Options. and select the wall. For more information about SteeringWheels. press ESC. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. called drag controls. These are the drag controls. and click Help. expand Floor Plans. and double-click 2nd Flr. click the pull-down menu on the Full Navigation wheel. To define settings for SteeringWheels. Cnst. bottoms. When drawing or modifying a building model. 14 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in.

Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 21 . 19 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall. After selecting the element to move. Move an element 20 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. click to specify the starting position. 23 Click next to the lower wall. to lengthen the wall. 22 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. In this case. click (Move).18 Click and drag the left control. The table moves down. and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. Some commands. moving the cursor to the left horizontally. for example. and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command. you want to move the table closer to the wall. such as Move and Copy. and on the Tools toolbar. as shown. 21 Select the Craftsman02 table.

select the second item in the list. such as the Lines command. 24 Select the plant. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 28 Click in the drawing area to start the line. The table and plant are returned to their original locations. Undo commands 25 On the Standard toolbar. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands. End a command 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and drag it on top of the table. 22 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and click again to end it. or press CTRL+Z. click Lines. All changes you make to a project are tracked. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to draw lines. you decide that you prefer the table in its original position.Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. click the Undo command. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Some commands. 26 On the Undo menu. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. on the Standard toolbar. Move.

29 To end the command. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. Performing Common Tasks in Revit Architecture | 23 . click Modify. On the Design Bar. Press ESC twice. 30 Close the file without saving your changes.

24 .

Express Workshop 25 .

26 .

NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. but for training purposes. this tutorial uses imperial units only. Use keynotes to annotate a detail. and annotate building assemblies. you will have a basic understanding of the design and documentation tools. Each tutorial demonstrates tools you can use to complete tasks that are common to an overall workflow. you will create building assembly details by performing the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view detail by importing a DWG file. Use detail components to define an assembly. detail. or referenced as a drafting view. In this tutorial. 27 . Creating Details with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides intuitive native tools to create. details are either based upon the geometry of the building model as a detail view. Insert a Callout and create a model-based detail view.Express Workshop 2 The Express Workshop tutorials focus on specific areas of functionality. highlighting powerful features that are integral to the most common architectural workflows. In Revit Architecture. illustrating how building components work together. When you have finished these tutorials. with parametric tags that automatically track and display detail view and drawing sheet placement. as well as some of the best practices that help you efficiently design and develop an architectural building project. Create a detail callout and reference a drafting view.

you will create a drafting view. scroll until the folder is displayed.rvt. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing folder\c_express_workshop_details_start. If necessary. 2 In the Drafting View dialog. create a reference callout. enter Window Head Detail. click Training Files. import a DWG detail. and reference a drafting view. and click OK. for Name. 28 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data In this exercise. click Drafting View. Create a drafting view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Scale list. verify 1 1/2''= 1'-0'' is selected.

The drawing area is still blank. 7 Type ZE to zoom out to the extents of the model.dwg. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. the new drafting view is listed under Drafting Views(Detail-Sim.In the Project Browser.). Import a drawing detail 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. Create a Detail with Imported DWG Data | 29 . expand Sections (Wall Sections) view heading and double-click Wall Section 1. select Black and White. located directly to the left of the drawing area. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle around the Level 1 section area. 5 In the left pane of the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog. 6 In the Colors field list. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. as shown. displaying the extents of the detail. The model zooms out. NOTE The drafting view you have created is a container into which you have not yet added any graphical information. and click Open. 10 In the drawing area. Create a reference callout 8 In the Project Browser. and navigate to Express Workshop\Detailing\ew_window_head_detail. 9 Type ZR.

in the Type Selector. 13 Click Reference other view. 12 On the Options Bar.The view displays to the specified area. 14 In the drawing area. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. and in the Scale list. click Callout. to activate the view selection list. 30 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. select Detail View: Detail. Select Drafting View: Window Head Detail.

and in the Scale list. Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. linked to the Window Head Detail drafting view 15 In the drawing area. and then add detail components and detail groups to build a model-based detail assembly. 16 Close the Window Head Detail drafting view. Model-Based Detailing | 31 . Create a detail view 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Callout. select 1 1/2” = 1’-0”. select Detail View: Detail. c_express_workshop_details_start. in the Type Selector. 3 In the drawing area.The reference callout is created. Model-Based Detailing In this exercise. adjust the detail view display settings. click 2 points to specify opposite corners of the callout bubble as shown. Next you will create a detail view and add detail components. you will create a detail view defined by a callout. The model view displays the linked Window Head Detail drafting view in the drawing area. double-click the reference callout tag head.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar.

and click Rename. double-click Wall Base 1. 7 Drag the grip closest to the Callout Head as shown. Adjust display settings 9 In the Project Browser. under Detail Views (Detail). 5 In the Rename View dialog. 6 In the drawing area. and click OK. 4 Right-click Detail 0. for Name. 32 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select the Wall Base 1 Callout to expose grips. under Detail Views(Detail).The new detail view is listed as Detail 0 in the Project Browser. enter Wall Base 1. click Modify to clear the selection. 8 On the Design Bar.

The region you defined with the callout bubble displays in the drawing area. This is the view crop region. Model-Based Detailing | 33 . 10 Move the cursor over the boundary of the view crop region to display a dashed line indicating the boundary of the annotation crop region. bordered by a solid line. 11 Click the boundary of the view crop region to display grips for both regions.

select As Underlay. allowing you to see the difference between the model geometry and any added detail components. 34 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop .12 Drag the annotation crop region grips as shown. 16 Click OK. The model elements in the view display as half-tones. right-click. and click OK. 14 In the drawing area. and click View Properties. 13 On the View Control Bar. for Display Model. click (Hide Crop Region). 15 In the Element Properties dialog. The view and annotation crop regions are no longer visible. under Graphics.

Brick on Mtl. Directly above the drawing area. verify that the view detail level is set to Medium. Stud. By grouping detail components. By including the model geometry at a medium or fine level of detail. on the Options Bar. typical details can easily be placed. 21 Move the cursor up slightly. the endpoints of the detail components may become visible. 18 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you can accurately place detail components based on the model component assembly. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Components. type 1' 6''. NOTE The detail component is created passing outside of the crop region. select Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 5/8”. 20 In the drawing area. the Type Selector displays the detail components that are pre-loaded in the model. If the crop region is enlarged.Detail components and detail groups Model based details are created using the model geometry as a background. 19 In the Type Selector. Model-Based Detailing | 35 . click the lower-right endpoint of the Basic Wall:Exterior . and press ENTER.

22 Press ESC twice to end the command. 23 Using the same method. ■ ■ ■ ■ Plywood-Section1 : 3/4" Rigid Insulation-Section : 1'' Resilient Flooring-Section Resilient Topset Base-Section: 6'' 24 On the Design Bar. 26 Right-click Typical 8" Metal Stud NLB Wall. click Modify to end the command. 36 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . and click Create Instance. add the following detail components as shown. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Typical construction details have been saved as assemblies by grouping detail components. 27 Click the top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall to place the detail. as shown. 25 In the Project Browser.

■ ■ Typical 12" Foundation. 29 Repeat this process for the following: NOTE For each detail group. Typical Standard Brick Base Model-Based Detailing | 37 .28 Press ESC to end the command. select the same top-left corner of the 12'' concrete foundation wall used previously.4" Slab detail.

Keynoting In this exercise you will keynote detail components by element.30 Type ZE to zoom the view extents. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Full Path. For more information about customizing a keynote database. see Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and verify that Horizontal. Leader.rvt. click Browse. Keynoting detail components 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting.txt. and under Keynote Table. 38 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . consistent means of identifying building assembly components. special notes. click Training Files. Revit Architecture provides a link to a central text file that contains a master list of keynote definitions. in the type selector. In the next exercise. select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. click Keynote ➤ Element. The Keynoting feature in Revit Architecture provides a simple. map keynotes by material. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The text files can then be referenced into a Revit Architecture project. You can customize this list. or create a series of text files specific to a building or project type. or instructions within a construction documentation package. and format keynote styles. you will add and modify keynotes to further develop the detail. 4 On the Options Bar. and Free End are selected. c_express_workshop_details_start. Continue to work in the Wall Base 1 view of the training file you used in the previous exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Detailing\c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004.

6 Click the brick detail component to place the arrow end of the leader. or increase the size of the annotation crop region. 8 Click to place the tag. If no value has been specified.3/8" Joint to display the value specified for the keynote parameter in the element’s properties. Keynoting | 39 . use the same method to place the keynotes as shown. If you would like to complete keynoting the detail. place the cursor over Bricks-Section : Standard . Either move the text inside. TIP Annotation that intersects or is outside of the annotation crop region will not be visible in the drawing area.5 In the drawing area. a question mark displays. 7 Click to place the leader arm. 9 Press ESC to end the command.

A4_R-19 Batt Insulation. draw a selection box that encloses the entire detail. click Keynote ➤ Material. and click OK. 13 Click to place the tag. 16 In the drawing area. You will now change all keynotes to keys only.Map keynotes by material 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. navigate to Division 07_Thermal and Moisture Protection ➤ 07 21 00_Thermal Insulation. Format keynote styles The keynotes previously inserted were text only. 14 In the Keynotes dialog. 15 Select 07 21 00. 40 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . 11 Click the batt insulation component to place the arrow end of the leader. 12 Click to place the leader arm.

select Keynote Tag : Keynote Number . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture | 41 . Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture Revit Architecture provides the tools you need to develop drawing sheet documents. Click OK.All items within the selection display in red. You have completed the first Express Workshop lesson. 17 On the Options Bar. and schedules that communicate design requirements and project-specific information. legends.Boxed. Creating Details with Revit Architecture. click 18 In the Filter dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Filter Selection). Select Keynote Tags. 19 In the Type Selector. Only the keynotes remain selected. 20 Press ESC to clear the selection. You can specify title blocks and place multiple views. The keynotes show the CSI Masterformat division key values. Click Check None.

you will perform the following tasks: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drawing sheet. Project Sheet Layout The Project Browser displays all sheets added to a Revit project and all sheet views and schedules placed on specific sheets. but for training purposes. Update drawing sheet and project information. In this lesson. 42 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . update the project information element properties. Add labels to a title block. Place views on drawing sheets.NOTE Revit Architecture is available in both imperial and metric versions. Add and modify a keynote legend on a drawing sheet. you will create a sheet. In this exercise. Add and modify a drawing list on a drawing sheet. and modify and update the project sheet title block. this tutorial uses imperial units only.

and the title block is displayed in the drawing area. 3 Click OK. a title block is a container that includes placeholders for sheet-specific and project-specific information. If necessary. scroll until the folder is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. or in the element properties of the title block. Enter sheet specific information You can enter sheet-specific information either directly on the sheet. ■ Open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout\c_express_workshop_sheet layout_start. the new drawing sheet is listed under Sheets(all). accessed from the sheet in the Project Browser. In Revit Architecture. click Training Files.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a new sheet 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. In the Project Browser. select E1 30 x 42 Horizontal : Working Drawing. 2 In the Select A Title Block dialog. Project Sheet Layout | 43 . The sheet name and sheet number can also be entered in the Sheet Title dialog.

To zoom in and out. hold down the wheel and drag. Smith and press ENTER. when you want to change the area of the model you are working on. Click OK. NOTE The sheet number and sheet name are automatically updated in the Project Browser and the title block. which is the keyboard shortcut for the Zoom in Region command. 44 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Enter project information Project-specific information is data common to all project sheets. In this tutorial. To pan.4 Type ZR. 7 Enter K. 8 On the Design Bar. double-click Checker. enter ZR and specify a zoom region to zoom in. The cursor displays as a magnifying glass. enter Sections/Details. you can enter ZE to zoom out. right-click A602 . 10 In the Sheet Title dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Number. For Name. You can also zoom and pan using the mouse wheel. roll the wheel. and click Rename. 6 In the Title Block. enter A602. click Modify to clear the selection. drag the cursor to draw a rectangle. It can be entered or changed directly on a sheet. or in the project information Element Properties dialog. under Sheets(all). as shown: The display zooms to the specified area. 9 In the Project Browser. Then.Unnamed. 5 In the drawing area.

15 In the Options Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. The Family Editor opens. enter Design Development. Smith. Project Sheet Layout | 45 .11 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. 20 Click and type Project Status. enter 4/10/2008. For Project Status. enter J. in the Type Selector. (Left) is selected. Modify the title block family 14 In the drawing area. For Client Name. For Project Name. 13 Click OK. displaying the E1 30 x 42 Horizontal title block. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. 16 Type ZR. enter Freighthouse Flats. 18 On the Options Bar. select Text : 1/8''. select the title block. and zoom in on the top of the Revision Schedule. click Text. click Edit Family and click Yes to open E1 30 x 42 Horizontal for editing. and verify that 19 Position the cursor at the left side of the top row as shown.

add Project Issue Date parameter. as shown. 25 Position the cursor in the middle of the row as shown. 26 In the Edit Label dialog. (Left) and 24 On the Options Bar. 46 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . select Label : 3/16''. in the Type Selector. click (Load into Project). and click. as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. select Project Status and click the parameter under Label Parameters. to add 28 Using the same method. and click OK. 22 Using the same method. enter Project Issue Date below Project Status. and verify that (Top) are selected.21 On the Design Bar. click Label. click Modify to exit the command. under Category Parameters. 23 On the Design Bar. 27 Select Wrap between parameters only.

enter Keynote Legend . to a drawing sheet. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Full Path.30 In the Reload Family dialog. a viewport displays. Project Detail Sheet Layout As views and schedules are placed onto a sheet. Create a keynote legend 1 Click File menu ➤ Keynoting. click Browse. and click Yes. The title block is updated in the Freighthouse Flats project.Project. click Training Files. In this exercise. and open Common\Express Workshop\Sheet Layout \c_express_workshop_RevitKeynotes_Imperial_2004. Next you will create. select Override parameter values of existing types. 4 In the New Keynote Legend dialog. by adding a detail view that contains keynotes. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 47 . and under Keynote Table. place and modify a keynote legend. you will create.txt. The viewport can be accessed and edited directly from the sheet. 3 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Keynote Legend. and add a keynote legend and a detail view to a sheet. representing the view or schedule. for Name.

6 Expand the column widths to see all of the information.Sections/Details. expand Legends. and drag Keynote Legend . as shown. under Sheets (all). clear Show Headers. under Text. Add a keynote legend 7 In the Project Browser. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 8 In the Project Browser. double-click A601 . The drawing sheet is displayed in the drawing area. 48 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . on the Appearance tab.5 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog.Project to the lower-left detail area on the drawing sheet. and click OK.

Project as shown. 12 Select the left control of the schedule and drag it to the right to expand the left column width as shown.9 Press ESC to clear the selection. Modify the keynote legend display 10 Type ZR. Project Detail Sheet Layout | 49 . The keynote legend is visible. 13 Expand the right column width as shown and press ESC to clear the selection. displaying all keys and corresponding text for keynotes contained within the project. and zoom in on the Keynote Legend . 11 Select the keynote schedule on the sheet.

Because no views containing keynotes have been placed in the drawing sheet. 19 Click OK twice. at the bottom of the Filter tab. Add a detail view 20 In the Project Browser. select Filter by sheet. enter Keynote Legend . expand Detail Views (Detail). for View Name. for Filter. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 In the Keynote Legend Properties dialog. right-click Keynote Legend .14 Zoom out and pan to include the keynote legend and the detail box to the right as shown.Sheet. and drag Wall Base 1 to the detail area between the keynote legend and the Window Head detail on the drawing sheet. 50 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . not keynotes. NOTE The detail components of the Window Head detail contained on this sheet do not appear in the Keynote Legend because they are annotated with text. click Edit. 15 In the Project Browser. the keynote legend has no keynote text or key values to display.Project. as shown. The Keynote Legend is now blank. and click OK. and click Properties. under Legends.

Project Title Sheet Layout In this exercise. and drag Title Sheet view to the upper-left area of the drawing sheet. displaying all keynote text and key values present on the drawing sheet. and then add and update a Drawing list. under Sheets (all).Title Sheet 1. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Add a view without a view title 1 In the Project Browser. as shown.The keynote legend is automatically updated. double-click A0 . The view remains selected. 2 In the Project Browser. Project Title Sheet Layout | 51 . The view title with line displays below the viewport. The Title sheet is displayed in the drawing area. you will add a view without a view title to the Title sheet drawing.

The Title Sheet view title is no longer displayed. The drawing list remains selected. and zoom in on the drawing list. 3 In the Type Selector. by default. and drag Drawing List to the upper-right area on the drawing sheet. You can specify text attributes for view titles. 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. 4 Press ESC to clear the selection. As part of a construction document set. drawing lists are schedules that display all drawing sheets that have the Appears In Drawing List parameter selected within the sheet’s element properties. 6 Type ZR.When you place a view on a sheet. Revit Architecture displays a view title. Press ESC to clear the selection. define the information to include in a view title. sheets that are external to Revit Architecture can also be included in the drawing list. select Viewport : Viewport /no title mark. You can also define these attributes for individual view titles on sheets. expand Schedules/Quantities. or omit view titles from sheets. 52 | Chapter 2 Express Workshop . Add a drawing list In Revit Architecture.

select A602 . The drawing list display is updated. while pressing SHIFT. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. clear Appears In Drawing List. You have completed the Express Workshop lesson Creating Drawing Sheets with Revit Architecture. under Sheets (all). and click Properties. under Identity Data. Project Title Sheet Layout | 53 . including only sheets that contain views. right-click the selected sheets.Ceiling Plans. and click OK. 8 In the Project Browser. NOTE The selected sheets do not have any views placed on them.Sections/Details and select A801 .Update the drawing list 7 In the Project Browser.

54 .

Developing Your Designs 55 .

56 .

Creating a Building Information Model 3 In this tutorial. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. After the beginning exercises. and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. a central service core. This project will serve as the structural model and will then be linked into an architectural project for further development. the wall or column will move with it. a wall or a column can be constrained to the grid. If the grid moves. it is good practice to test the constraints. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2009. 57 . As you develop the building design. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. a curtain wall. Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. For example. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.

In views that display elevation markers. click Training Files. The project training files have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. levels. 2 In the New Project dialog. with an RVT extension. you will use the default template. under Create new.rte. South. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. and residential. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises. click New. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. West. To create the project file. such as a door or window. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. and click Browse. Create the project from the default template 1 In the drawing area. and settings. locate the Project Browser. 58 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . For this project. you use a template that is provided with the software. but contains no geometry. In practice. under Projects. East. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. from the product library. you design inside the elevation markers. and customize the project as necessary. notice four elevation markers. Creating the Project In this exercise. The project is stored as a single file. verify that the second option is selected. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. select Project. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North.subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project training file. 3 Under Template file. you load any required family type that is not in your project. In the drawing area in the right pane. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. 5 Click OK. construction. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. The new project opens. views.

sheets. schedules. created by the template. will be accessible from the Project Browser. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. and families in your project. Creating the Project | 59 . 13 In the file window.rvt) is selected. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. These views are customizable: you can rename them. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Groups. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. You can add. duplicate them. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation).The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. and on the General tab. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and delete them. Ceiling Plans. 16 Click Save. 8 Under Floor Plans. enter Revit Retail Building. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. notice the Legends. expand Views (all). Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. Schedules/Quantities. NOTE If you create a project without a template. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. such as schedules and legends. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate that the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. and duplicate levels. the view you see in the drawing area. change their properties. Sheets (all). content and building model reports. view the Save reminder interval. You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. Families. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. display in the south elevation. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). delete. as well as change their names. and click Training Files. Two level lines. then expand Floor Plans. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. you will want to save your work frequently. reflected ceiling plan views. double-click South. and elevation views created in the project by the template. heights. As you design and document your building model. 14 For File name. double-click Metric. 7 If necessary. verify that Project Files (*. 15 For Save as type. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 10 In the Project Browser. and other properties.

expand Views (all). Adding Project Levels on page 60. 60 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model. so that when one level moves. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You learn how the levels are locked. and double-click South. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). to each other. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. Adding Project Levels In this exercise. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. and press ENTER. When you begin designing. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. doors. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser.17 Proceed to the next exercise. After you modify the two default levels. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. or constrained. and windows within the building model. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. the other levels move and change with it. enter 00 Foundation.

6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. which should display by default. verify that (Draw) and Make Plan View are selected. 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. Next. If it does not. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. 14 Click Plan View Types. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. and click OK. (You do not have to click to specify the start point. and then move it up. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. right-click. 5 In the Project Browser. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. By default. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. and press ENTER.) 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed blue line displays alignment with the two existing levels. click Level. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 13 On the Options Bar. As you move the cursor. enter -1800. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. When you add the new level. Adding Project Levels | 61 . view the Design Bar. and click Basics. and press ENTER. not all the tabs are visible. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab.4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. This is the Options Bar. enter 0. enter 01 Entry Level. and press ENTER. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. 16 Enter 3750.

click (Pick Lines). 25 Click to place the level line. using a different option. right-click Level 3. enter 3750. click Level. under Floor Plans. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. and rename the corresponding views. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. If you create a level by copying it. 27 Rename the level 03 Level. 19 Click OK. you add another level. 62 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .18 In the Project Browser. and move it slightly upward. click Modify to end the command. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. A dashed blue line indicates where the new level will be drawn. click Rename. 23 On the Options Bar. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. 21 In the Project Browser. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. Next. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. or on the Design Bar. and for Offset. and enter 02 Level. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 26 Press ESC. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels.

as shown. all the levels move. Creating a Column Grid on page 64. and you can move them independently. Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Notice that by moving the top level. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. If you select a level and click its lock.Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line. the levels are no longer constrained. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Project Levels | 63 . 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained.

64 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. Create vertical column grid lines 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the grid line endpoint. select (Draw). the column height changes as well. under Floor Plans. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. On the Design Bar. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. By using the grid to control the placement of columns. click Modify. click Grid. Move the cursor up. double-click 00 Foundation. In a later exercise. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. so that if the roof elevation changes. In the following exercise. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line.Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. When the grid is complete. specify a start point for the grid line.

Click to place the grid line. and click to place the line. and for Offset. Next. and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line. enter 4500 mm. click (Pick Lines). for Offset. for Offset. On the Options Bar. and click to place the line. and click to place the line. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. click Grid. enter 7500 mm. ■ 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. Enter A. On the Options Bar. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. Creating a Column Grid | 65 . enter 7500 mm. and press ENTER.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble.

click (Draw) and specify an Offset of 0 mm. as shown. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. ■ The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid. 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. and specify the grid line endpoint. click Grid. 11 On the Design Bar. 66 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A.8 Press ESC.

14 On the Options Bar. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. click Dimension. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. click (Aligned). click Dimension. 15 Starting with grid line A. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown.Dimension the grid and lock the grid spacing 13 On the Design Bar. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. 18 On the Design Bar. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. select grid lines C and 3. Creating a Column Grid | 67 . click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 21 Press ESC twice. 22 While pressing CTRL.

enter 50mm. 68 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. Additional parameters in this dialog allow you to control the display of the grid line in both plan and section/elevation views. Two pins display on the grid lines. 31 For End Segments Length. until it is closer to grid line 5. 29 In the Name dialog. click . click Duplicate. 30 In the Type Properties dialog. The following steps illustrate how to create a grid family type with a gap in the middle of the display. you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will grow out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. and select None. and click OK. The Center Segment parameter can be set to not display or to display in a different loaded line pattern. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. enter 6. 33 On the Design Bar. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. click the value for Center Segment. 24 Press ESC. ■ Create a custom grid family type In some cases. (Element Properties). and press ESC. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 32 Click OK twice. until it is closer to grid line A. and select grid line A. and on the Options Bar. If necessary. By pinning these central grid lines. select grid line 5.5mm Bubble with Gap. click Modify. building geometry requires the need for grid lines to contain breaks or display differently. and press ESC. The pins are hidden.23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. click and drag the blue circular grip up. click Edit/New. 26 In the drawing area.

39 In the Type Selector.34 Draw a selection box to select all of the grid lines. click Modify. The original continuous grid lines are restored. click (Grid Intersection). Add columns to the grid 38 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 42 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). select UC-Universal Column : 305x305x97UC.5mm Bubble with Gap. 36 On the Design Bar. ■ 41 While pressing CTRL. and press ESC. select all of the grid lines. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. and in the Type Selector. select Grid : 6. and on the Options Bar. For Place By.5mm Bubble. click Finish. click Structural Column. Creating a Column Grid | 69 . Select and change all grids to use the newly created family type. 35 In the Type Selector. 37 Select the grid lines again. select Grid : 6.

select grid line A. double-click 01 Entry Level. Next.Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 43 Press ESC. 45 While pressing CTRL. and press ENTER. lock it. click Camera. If it is unlocked. and click to specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. 44 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. 52 On the Options Bar. 51 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 49 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 53 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 70 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select 01 Entry Level. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 50 In the Project Browser. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. for From. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. click (Undo) twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. and unlock it. click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. 46 On the Options Bar. 48 On the Standard toolbar. 47 Enter 9000.

■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 54 Zoom out and resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see all of the columns. and click to place the target point of the camera. The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays. Creating a Column Grid | 71 .

■ ■ 56 Save the drawing. Adding Beams In this exercise. under Views (all). In the Rename View dialog. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan. enter To Building. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. and click OK. When you finish adding beams. Adding Beams on page 72. 57 Proceed to the next exercise. The current view.55 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. Right-click 3D View 1. and then copy them to subsequent levels. 72 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Rename. displays in bold under 3D Views.

7 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Selector. The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. under 3D Views. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. click (Create Beam On Grid). the icon on the right side of the scale. under Floor Plans. 4 Click Medium. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. view the icons on the View Control Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. select each grid line. The view is currently set to Coarse. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. click Beam.Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. Adding Beams | 73 . double-click 01 Entry Level. The selected grid lines display as red. click Finish. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . 8 While pressing CTRL.

NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. right-click. 12 On the View toolbar. and click Select All Instances. press and hold SHIFT. select 06 Roof. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. click Modify. and click OK. click (Default 3D View). double-click 01 Entry Level. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. which only extend 74 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. 14 Select one of the beams. select 02 Level.

under 3D Views. right-click. and click Element Properties. and click OK. 21 With the column selected. double-click To Building. Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. When you created the columns. view the Top Level parameter. 20 Click Cancel. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. under Instance Parameters. and click Select All Instances. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. (Element Properties). You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. under Constraints. 25 In the Project Browser. All of the columns display as red. for Top Level. select 06 Roof. Adding Beams | 75 .to the 5th level. right-click. click 24 Press ESC. resize the view to see the entire structure. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. 06 Roof. The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. and if necessary. 22 On the Options Bar.

The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines.NOTE If you select the camera to resize the view. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing area. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. but you want to display them in less detail. View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. press ESC to exit the command before continuing. 76 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing. under Elevations. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. as lines only.

4 Click near the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. verify that Attach to Grid is selected. double-click 00 Foundation.29 Proceed to the next exercise. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. 3 On the Options Bar. Adding Braces | 77 . and press ESC to end the command. To better add the braces to the structure. Adding Braces In this exercise. Adding Braces on page 77. click Framing Elevation. you create 8 framing elevation views. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you add braces to the 4 corners of the building structure. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser.

6 Select the crop region (if necessary). but when placed the braces are placed. and when the endpoint snap displays. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. The associated framing elevation view displays. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. click to specify the start point of the brace. 10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace.Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 8 In the Type Selector. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. 78 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . verify that UB-Universal Beam : 305x165x40UB is selected. 7 On the Design Bar. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. and use the grips that display to adjust both sides of the view. 11 Using the same technique. After you add the final brace. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. click Brace. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. double-click the elevation marker arrow. press ESC twice.

The height of the roof lowers. delete it and redraw it.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams. enter 18000 mm. Adding Braces | 79 . IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. and press ENTER.

16 On the bottom right side of the grid. but this time add them from right to left. click Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. double-click 00 Foundation. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. and press ENTER. (Undo) twice to restore the original level heights. 80 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 14 On the Standard toolbar. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. under Floor Plans.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. enter 10000 mm.

click Activate Dimensions. NOTE As you add braces. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 23 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar.Add braces in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. enter 12000 mm. Adding Braces | 81 . and click the lock that displays to unlock it. periodically open the 3D view to see that the braces are positioned as expected. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. and press ENTER. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). as shown in the 3D view below.

click and roof height. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. 29 In the Project Browser. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. 28 On the Standard toolbar. beams. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. Creating a Foundation on page 82. Creating a Foundation In this exercise. grid size. Test connectivity of the columns. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. double-click South. under Floor Plans. 26 In the Project Browser. and if necessary.24 In the Project Browser. lock it. 31 Save the drawing. and drag it away from the structure. double-click 00 Foundation. under Elevations. 82 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . (Undo) 3 times to restore the locked dimension.

Click OK twice. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Close the warning dialog. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. Creating a Foundation | 83 . You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and how to load specific families into a project. and click View Properties. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. In the View Range dialog.rfa. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Level.Before you can add the pile caps. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. The foundation pile cap now displays. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. and press ESC twice. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. click Training Files. click Edit. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900mm. and expand Structural Foundations. Verify that the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. for View Range. under View Depth. In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Extents. select Unlimited. and drag it to the drawing area. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. where you must adjust the view range before you can see them. After you load the pile cap family. expand Families. double-click 00 Foundation. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. A warning displays. The pile cap has been added in the view.

under 3D Views. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation. and click Create Similar. 13 In the Project Browser. press ESC twice.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. When the final pile cap is placed. 84 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. 15 Proceed to the next exercise.14 Close the file with or without saving it. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. 2 Select one of the columns. beams. Changing Structural Member Types on page 85. right-click. and brace families into the project. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. beam. double-click {3D}. you change the types of the columns. You load new column. Changing Structural Member Types | 85 . NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. All columns in the building model display as red. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Select All Instances. and braces that you used to create the building structure. under 3D Views.

click (Element Properties). right-click. click Duplicate. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. you change the brace type. click Modify. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. This not the size that you want to use. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column : 508x12. 10 On the Options Bar. but it is the only size of its type currently available. 9 In the Type Selector. 19 On the Design Bar. select M_Round Bar : 25mm.3 In the Type Selector. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only. the braces as well as the beams change. select the braces in the elevation one by one. double-click Elevation 1-a. 18 In the Type Selector. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section : HSS203. click (Default 3D View). 7 On the Design Bar. enter 75mm. In the following steps. and click OK.6X15. 4 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. for Type. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75mm. under Dimensions.2X101. 15 In the Project Browser. and changing its size parameter. The brace type changes. 16 On the Design Bar. select M_Round Bar: 75mm. for d. 13 In the Name dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. The building model displays the round hollow columns.5CHS. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 6 In the Type Selector. click Brace. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. 86 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Modify. enter 75mm. click Modify. Change the brace type 8 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. and click Select All Instances.9. Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. 17 While pressing CTRL. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type.

Linking the Structural Model on page 87. Link the structural model 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit. 22 Proceed to the next exercise.Origin to Origin.rvt. Use the Origin to Origin option to ensure proper alignment with the site in the architectural file.rvt. select Auto . and click Open. 2 In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the structural model created in the previous exercises is linked to an architectural project containing site information. select m_RRB_structure_complete. 3 Under Positioning. and open Metric\m_RRB_architectural. Linking the Structural Model | 87 . Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. the architectural file will be used to further develop the building information model.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Linking the Structural Model In this exercise. After the files are linked.

under Elevations. click (Copy/Monitor). depending on the project. it is also possible to design the structural components as part of the architectural model. In this case. The Copy/Monitor tool allows you to establish and monitor relationships between elements in a host project and linked projects. After the link is established. 6 In the drawing area. the host project is the architectural file and the linked project is the structural model. select Multiple. double-click South. 9 In the drawing area. You use the Link option because it is likely that the structural model will change. The standard workflow when working with outside consultants is to link in the structural model. structural members. 7 On the Copy/Monitor tab of the Design Bar. Grids. and click Select Link. select the linked Revit model. 8 On the Options Bar. and walls could also be copy/monitored. 88 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . while pressing CTRL. select Levels 00 through 06. however. 5 On the Tools toolbar. click Copy. you use the copy/monitor function to place the correct levels into the host project.4 In the Project Browser.

you create a view template and assign it to the new floor plans. select 06 Roof (selecting all levels 00 through 06). click Finish. Turn off visibility of the site elements To get the plans to display without the site information. 18 Using the same method. The 06 Roof floor plan opens. for Floor Plan views. you turn off the visibility of the site elements from the Foundation view. Create views for each of the new levels 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Floor Plan. click Finish mode. delete the Level 2 floor plan. 16 Click OK. Delete existing views 17 In the Project Browser. click OK. First. 13 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. right-click Level 1.10 On the Options Bar. while pressing SHIFT. and click Delete. 12 Ignore and close any warnings that display. 15 In the New Plan dialog. Linking the Structural Model | 89 . 11 In the Duplicate Types dialog.

Create a template from the current view 23 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. 90 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . for Name. 22 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view. right-click. enter Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 25 In the View Templates dialog. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. and click OK. 21 In the drawing area. double-click 01 Entry Level. 26 In the Project Browser. 24 In the New View Template dialog. right-click. under Floor Plans. click OK. select Entourage: Stuart Hall 1 : Stuart Hall 1. double-click 00 Foundation.19 In the Project Browser. select the Topography : Surface. 20 In the drawing area.

under Names. 29 Zoom to fit the plan in the view. double-click Site. and click OK.Apply the view template to new views 27 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 31 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 32 Click in the road intersection at the bottom right corner of the building grid. Linking the Structural Model | 91 . 34 In the 3D view that displays. 33 Click at the upper left of the grid. click Camera. adjust the borders so that the entire building is visible. Recreate the To Building camera view 30 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plans. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Rename. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. and railings are also created from sketches. you must sketch them first in a Sketch Editor.rvt. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. Adding Floors In this exercise. Adding Floors on page 92. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Some other Revit Architecture elements. To create floors. 36 In the Rename View dialog. enter To Building. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. expand 3D Views. In this exercise.35 In the Project Browser. such as roofs. stairs. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. 92 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

Leave this dimension unlocked. On the Options Bar. and elements in the current view display as gray. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important because you resize it in the next steps. and then the first horizontal grid line. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. At the top left corner of the grid. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. click Dimension. On the Sketch tab. ■ ■ ■ Using a crossing window. click Lines. click Floor. Do not lock the dimension. past the first vertical grid line. click (Rectangle). You are now in the Sketch Editor. under Floor Plans. Move the cursor to the left. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. If the grid changes size. ■ 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. Adding Floors | 93 . sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. select the top floor line. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click above the first horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab.Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser.

and then press ESC. and click the temporary dimension value. Enter 300. 6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Do not lock the dimensions. Move the cursor to the left dimension. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. 94 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . select the top floor line. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Select and lock the dimensions. At the top left corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300. and change their values to 300 mm. press ENTER.5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid. They display on the floor sketch. ■ 7 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

On the Sketch tab. Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. and on the Options Bar. and for Offset. click Floor. enter 1500mm. This is how you could modify the floor if you needed to after creating it. on the Design Bar. Next. click Lines. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. and press ESC. and lock the dimensions. under Floor Plans. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. click Edit. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. Select the three remaining floor lines. click Quit Sketch. On the Options Bar. click (Pick Lines). using a different sketching technique. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.8 Select the floor. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. and move the cursor until the dashed blue line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. double-click 02 Level. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. Adding Floors | 95 . you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model.

click Lines. 16 On the Design Bar. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. 17 On the Sketch tab. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. double-click 03 Level. and a lock icon displays. Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor displays. dimension and lock the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. click (Rectangle). 96 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Floor. 14 On the Design Bar. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click (Align). 18 On the Options Bar.13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate that the Align tool is active. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Finish Sketch. 20 On the Tools toolbar.

and on the Options Bar. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. and lock the edges. 32 Select the floor. click Finish Sketch. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. select 05 Roof Garden. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floor. under Views ➤ 3D Views. View the floors in the 3D building model 36 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid.24 On the Design Bar. Adding Floors | 97 . click Edit. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. Alternatively. double-click {3D}. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. double-click 05 Roof Garden. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 35 On the Sketch tab. 31 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

click to place the roof line. Adding a Roof on page 98. double-click 06 Roof. enter 1800 mm. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Clear Defines slope. Adding a Roof In this exercise. ■ ■ For Offset. Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. You shape the flat roof of the roof garden to have a roof drain sloping to the center structural member under the roof. When a blue dashed line displays. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Click (Pick Lines). To create the roof. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and press ENTER.rvt. 3 On the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 98 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you add a low slope roof over the roof garden on the building. You sketch the footprint (perimeter) of the roof in a plan view. You edit the section of the roof slab so it stays flat across the bottom of the roof slab. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.

and when the blue dashed line displays. for Offset. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line (blue line to the left). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line (blue line above). Adding a Roof | 99 .6 Select grid line 5. 7 On the Options Bar. click to place the roof line. enter 300 mm.

■ 12 On the Design Bar.10 Press ESC. click Finish Roof. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. select the roof. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. Add the roof drain 13 In the drawing area. click (Trim/Extend). 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. 100 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep).

and click to specify the section. Adding a Roof | 101 . enter -100 mm. Create a section view 18 On the View tab of the Design Bar. move the cursor down below the roof. 17 On the Design Bar. click (Add new points to the slab shape). click Modify. on grid D. The result is a roof slab which slopes down to a single point. for Elevation.14 On the Options Bar. 19 Click above the top horizontal line of the roof. click Section. 15 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. 16 Select the intersection of grid lines D and 4.

click Edit. 30 Click OK 3 times. click Modify. select the roof.20 On the Design Bar. The variable check box allows the lower face of the roof to stay flat while the upper face follows the desired slope. 21 Double-click the section head to open the section. double-click 06 Roof. select Variable. (Element Properties). for Structure [1]. 25 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. In section. you see that the roof slab is sloped on both faces (upper and lower). 28 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 In the Edit Assembly dialog. 102 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click Edit/New. and on the Options Bar. 24 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Modify the roof structure 26 In the plan view. for Structure. 22 Zoom in to the upper left corner of the section. 23 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. The design intent is to have the underside of the roof flat rather than sloped. click 27 In the Element Properties dialog. This command tiles the windows so the roof can be seen in section and plan views. under Construction.

select each edge. 38 In the 3D view. click (Default 3D View). 34 Maximize the window for the 06 Roof floor plan. Only the family and the path of the sweep must be defined. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Add swept fascias 36 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 103 . 40 In the Type Selector. 41 Starting with the left front edge. 39 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. In this case. click OK. 33 In the warning dialog. You select the upper edge of the roof around the perimeter to define the host sweep path. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. and press DELETE. Host sweeps are profile driven shapes. 35 Zoom to fit the floor plan in the window. click Modify. the correct profile and fascia have been defined beforehand. select Fascia : Fascia . 37 If necessary. on the View Control Bar. moving counter-clockwise.Roof Edge. Delete the section view 32 In the floor plan. zoom in to the roof. select the section line.31 On the Design Bar.

the curtain wall resizes with it. Adding a Curtain Wall on page 104. you add a curtain wall. View the roof 43 In the Project Browser. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 44 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. 104 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. so if you resize the grid. under 3D Views. double-click To Building.42 On the Design Bar.

3 In the Type Selector. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. enter 1050 mm. Adding a Curtain Wall | 105 . for Type. enter 600 mm. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click OK twice. click Wall. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 9 Move the cursor over grid line 1 near its endpoint. enter Retail Storefront. Under Construction. under Floor Plans. for Join Condition. 7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. For Height. click 01 Entry Level. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. click to place the first curtain wall segment. When you duplicate a type. and click OK. For Level. for Spacing. select 05 Roof Garden. 10 When a blue dashed line displays. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. click Training Files. 6 In the Name dialog. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Spacing. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. click Edit/New. enter 2100 mm. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. For Offset. select 01 Entry Level. The type is saved in the project. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. click Duplicate.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. If you want to hide them. verify the view settings: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. but opt to keep the constraints when prompted. you can delete the dimensions. and lock the dimensions. click Dimension. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. double-click To Building. dimension both (opposite) corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 15 On the View Control Bar. and trim each curtain wall segment. These dimensions are not in a sketch. 106 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . the locks ensure that the curtain wall moves with it. under 3D Views. click (Trim/Extend). so they remain in the view. 13 On the Design Bar. If the grid moves.11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior. View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating an Entrance on page 107. Creating an Entrance | 107 . Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

7 Click OK. All the elements in the list are selected. 5 Under Visibility. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. as these usually represent internal pilasters. under the element list. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. 2 On the View Control Bar. 108 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. 4 On the Model Categories tab. click All. Do not select Columns.Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. and double-click South. in the center of the 01 Entry Level. and click None. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). To better work with the curtain wall panels. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns.

in the Type Selector. 16 On the View Control Bar. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. select Architectural Elevation. 17 In the Project Browser. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Modify. and click OK. 10 Select 1 panel. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. under 3D Views. 14 In the Apply View Template dialog. 15 Zoom so you can see the entire drawing. Creating an Entrance | 109 . press and hold CTRL. 18 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 12 With the panels selected. in this case an architectural elevation.9 On the Design Bar. you see that the visibility of many of the model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. select System Panel : Solid. 11 When all 9 panels are selected. double-click {3D}.

21 Zoom to the front of the building. double-click South. under 3D Views.19 In the Project Browser. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 110 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click To Building. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. 20 In the Project Browser.

25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. and click to select it. 24 On the Options Bar. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. 30 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. select another mullion to the right. click Add or Remove Segments.23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line. and unpin it. 31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 27 On the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 111 . and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. click Modify. 32 In the Type Selector. 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click Curtain Grid.

and view the new entrance. 34 On the View toolbar. select it. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. press TAB until it is selected. 112 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 36 Zoom in to the first panel. 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. and unpin it.33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. click (Default 3D View).

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 3rd. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 113 . open the North elevation. Creating a Drop Ceiling on page 113. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. and 4th panels. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance. 39 Using the same process. remove the mullions from the 2nd. 40 Optionally.38 Press DELETE. and add an entrance to the north side of the building.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 Click OK. 3 Right-click in the view. for Underlay. 114 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. under Floor Plans. and click View Properties. under Graphics. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Display 02 Level as an underlay 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. select 02 Level.

and click Rename. and click OK. 9 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. 10 In the Rename View dialog. 8 Select the callout. under Floor Plans.Create a callout 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to complete the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. The cursor changes to a pencil. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 115 . ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. click Callout. which indicates you must draw the callout. enter Display Area.

as shown. right-click. 12 Draw a section line.Create a section 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Section. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. 13 Select the section line. 14 Press ESC. 16 Select the section box. and click Flip Section. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. 116 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .

135mm Partition (2-hr). 27 On the Options Bar. 25 Press ESC twice. right-click Section 1. select Wall faces. 26 On the Design Bar. for Prefer. enter Section Display Area. under Floor Plans. Draw interior walls 19 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Rename View dialog. Click (Rectangle).17 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. click Wall. and click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Draw). 21 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Interior . click Dimension. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 117 . click (Align). 24 On the Tools toolbar. Lock both alignments. expand Sections (Building Section). 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm square wall inside the grid lines. For Loc Line. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. double-click 01 Entry Level. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay.

you modify them to be bulkhead walls. 34 Press ESC to exit ceiling mode. Notice that the walls extend to the floor. and lock the dimension. 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. 37 In the Project Browser. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600mm Grid. 118 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 01 Entry Level. 32 In the Type Selector. under Ceiling Plans. click Ceiling.28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. Next. Add a ceiling 30 In the Project Browser. 38 On the View Control Bar. 33 Click inside the newly placed walls to place a ceiling in that space. double-click Section Display Area. 31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. and lock the dimension.) 36 Press ESC twice. under Sections (Building Section). 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. (Press TAB to highlight the ceiling line or wall face before selecting.

43 On the Design Bar. press TAB until you select the wall chain. click Modify. click to select it. click (Element Properties). and press ESC. double-click 01 Entry Level. 41 On the Options Bar. 47 In the Project Browser. 48 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. under Constraints. double-click Section Display Area. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls.Make bulkhead walls 39 In the Project Browser. 46 Press ESC. On the Options Bar. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. and click (Element Properties). for Base Offset. and click OK. for Height Offset From Level. 42 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 119 . and click to select the walls. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the walls. under Constraints. enter 2700 mm. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected. under Ceiling Plans. 44 Press TAB to highlight the ceiling. for Top/Base. click Attach. enter 2700 mm. Select the 02 Level Floor. under Sections. and click OK.

59 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.49 In the Project Browser. 53 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Edit. click Cancel. View the ceiling structure 50 Select the ceiling. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. for Structure. 120 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 54 Click OK. under Ceiling Plans. click Cancel. under Construction. Rotate the ceiling grid 57 Select the center ceiling grid line. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. 55 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. click (Rotate). 58 On the Edit toolbar. view the ceiling structure. and click .

61 Press ESC. 62 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.60 Click. and press ENTER. enter 45. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 121 .

66 Optionally. click Shadows On. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating Multi-Level Stairs on page 123. 67 Proceed to the next exercise. 64 On the View Control Bar.View the building in 3D with shadows 63 In the Project Browser. click Shadows Off. double-click To Building. 65 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views. 122 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels.

3 On the Options Bar. You then cut an opening through the floors on each level. click Training Files. You create a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. click ■ ■ (Pick Lines). and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Ref Plane. and click to create a reference plane to the left. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: Move the cursor over grid line C. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 123 .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 1500 mm. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and for Offset. and click to create a reference plane to the right. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Move the cursor over grid line B. and copy it to the 05 Level.Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. under Floor Plans.

7 Using the same method. You will create the stair in the area between grid lines B. 2. 6 Select the left reference plane. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and 3. and drag the model ends so the reference plane only displays between grid lines 2 and 3. click Stairs. click Modify.5 On the Design Bar. and specify a point to create first stair flight. C. 9 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 124 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . shorten the right reference plane.

and specify a point. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. with a message that 20 risers have been created and 0 remain. and select the 2nd reference plane. Move the cursor down. Draw walls around the stair 11 On the Design Bar.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. click Wall. select Finish Face: Interior. ■ 14 Draw walls around the stair. 12 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Options Bar. The complete stair displays. Click (Rectangle). click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 125 .225mm Masonry. select Basic Wall : Generic . including its handrails. beyond the end of the stair.

for Prefer. click Dimension. select Wall faces. 17 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. Select the interior face of the wall. Click Modify.15 On the Tools toolbar. and specify a point away from the wall. select the dimension value. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. and lock the alignment. and press ENTER. Lock the dimension. 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click to select it. Select the wall. click Align. Select the bottom of the stair. 18 Using the same technique. 20 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 16 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 126 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 1200 mm.

clear Tag on Placement. and press DELETE. 27 In the Type Selector. The stair and walls move to the left. 23 Select the stair. Because the dimension is constrained. 29 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. select both reference planes. a warning displays. 25 While pressing CTRL. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. 24 On the Standard toolbar. click Add a door to the stairwell 26 On the Design Bar. and press DELETE. TIP To flip the door swing. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 127 . and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints.21 Select the dimension. 28 On the Options Bar. click Door. 22 Click OK to delete the dimension. (Undo). select M_Single-Flush : 0915 x 2134mm.

and move the cursor to spin the building model. For Top Constraint. 128 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . under Floor Plans. and click ■ ■ 34 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. (Default 3D View). verify that Up to level: 05 Roof Garden is selected. select all 4 walls. click 37 Press and hold the Orbit button. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. Span the height of the building 31 While pressing CTRL. click Align. for Base Constraint. (Element Properties). (SteeringWheels). 38 Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. ■ 43 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. and click 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ (Element Properties). you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. select 05 Roof Garden. (Rectangle).30 On the Design Bar. Click OK. Click OK. 41 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 40 Zoom in to the stairs. but if you view the top level of the building. 35 On the View toolbar. 44 On the Tools toolbar. for Multistory Top Level. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click (Draw). Under Constraints. 33 Select the stair. double-click 01 Entry Level. 45 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. select 00 Foundation. click 36 On the View toolbar. click Modify. Create a shaft opening 39 In the Project Browser.

Copy the door to multiple levels 49 Select the door. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. 47 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. click see the roof. on the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). and lock the alignment. 51 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. and click OK. 48 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 52 In the Select Levels dialog. 50 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. View the shaft and stair 53 On the View toolbar. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 129 . and lock the alignments. and spin the building so you can 54 If necessary.46 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. (SteeringWheels).

You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof level. For Top Constraint. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. double-click 01 Entry Level. Under Constraints. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height on page 130. and click OK. ■ 58 On the View toolbar. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. (Default 3D View). under Floor Plans. click 60 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. and click 57 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ (Element Properties). Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 62 Proceed to the next exercise. 130 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . click 59 On the View toolbar. enter 300 mm. for Base Offset.55 In the Project Browser. By offsetting the base. (SteeringWheels). you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 61 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. 56 Select the shaft.

and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile. Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View Properties.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 Right-click in the view.rvt. for Underlay. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select 06 Roof. double-click 05 Roof Garden. under Graphics. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 131 .

You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. 132 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . enter 9750. and click (Fillet arc). click Edit Profile. 9 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. 8 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and press ENTER. 16 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Go To View dialog. 12 Zoom in to the top right area between the C and E grid lines. click (Align). 6 Draw the wall above the edge of the roof shown in the underlay. select Elevation: South.225mm Masonry. 15 In the error dialog. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Lines. 7 On the Tools toolbar. click Remove Constraints. 13 Select the top sketch line for the wall. 17 On the Options Bar. and on the Options Bar. and then select the right face of the wall. 14 Select the 3750 mm vertical dimension value. The exact placement is not important. and click Open View. Modify the profile of the wall 10 Select the wall.5 In the Type Selector. click .

22 In the Project Browser. as shown: 19 On the Options Bar. as shown: 21 On the Design Bar.18 In the upper right corner of the profile. select a point on the profile to the left of the corner. double-click {3D}. under 3D Views. 23 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. and click (Circle). click Finish Sketch. 20 Draw a circle with a 1200 mm radius just below the fillet arc. click . Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 133 . and select a third point within the corner to create a rounded corner. select a point on the vertical sketch line below the corner.

and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. You learn how to place and adjust these components in project views. Adding Entourage and Site Components on page 134. 134 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 24 Proceed to the next exercise. you place planters on the 05 Roof Garden level to create a roof garden.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise.

click Component. click Component. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. click Training Files. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 135 . Create the roof garden 1 In the Project Browser. select Planter : 1220 x 1220.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry . as shown. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 6 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Type Selector. between grid lines C and D. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed blue line that helps you to place the next planter. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Basics tab.rvt. double-click 05 Roof Garden.5 Meters. and open Metric\m_RRB_host. TIP After you place the 1st planter.4. select M_RPC Tree . and press ESC twice. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

(Element Properties). Create a sidewalk outside of the building 19 In the Project Browser. enter Japanese Cherry 1.5 Meters. for Type. 9 Click and hold the left mouse button on the ViewCube. click Duplicate. double-click 01 Entry Level. 14 In the Name dialog. for Height. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. enter 2400 mm. double-click {3D}. View the roof. under 3D Views. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 21 On the Design Bar. select M_RPC Tree . 16 Click Apply. click Lines. and then click OK twice. 17 While pressing CTRL. and move the mouse to orient the view to the Southwest. 136 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. click Floor. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. click (Default 3D View). double-click 05 Roof Garden.5 Meters.8 On the View toolbar. The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. For Offset. enter 1500 mm. 18 In the Project Browser. and in the Type Selector.Deciduous : Japanese Cherry 1. 11 Select one of the trees. under Dimensions. 10 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. select the 2 remaining trees. under Floor Plans. under Floor Plans. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. as shown.

27 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. 24 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. for Offset. 25 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. and click to place the line. click (Draw).23 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. 26 On the Options Bar. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 137 . 28 Select the right vertical floor line. and click to sketch a line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. 29 On the Options Bar. enter 0 mm.

31 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. 35 Select the line that you just drew. click (Trim/Extend). and click to finish the line. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. 32 Press ESC. 138 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . move the cursor up 900 mm. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar.30 On the Options Bar. clear Chain. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.

for Type. for Height Offset from Level. When you render an image. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. create a new type for the sidewalk element because it is currently a floor element. enter -250 mm.38 On the Design Bar. and click so he is facing the column. select M_RPC Male : Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 139 . and on the Options Bar. click 41 In the Type Properties dialog. In plan view. 51 Move the cursor to rotate approximately 150 degrees. 49 On the Options Bar. 48 In the Type Selector. under Constraints. click Duplicate. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. 45 Click OK. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Placeholders for RPC content display in 2D and 3D views only. 39 Select the sidewalk. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. near Column E5. click Edit/New. Next. The pointed end of the shape indicates the person’s line of sight. as shown: (Element Properties). 43 Click OK twice. select Rotate after placement. RPC people are represented by a tear drop shape. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Name dialog. click Component. The completed sidewalk displays. enter Sidewalk. a photorealistic image displays. click Finish Sketch.

57 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click to place her on the sidewalk. 140 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and click (Element Properties). and place it along the sidewalk behind him. 56 Press ESC twice. click the car. select M_RPC Female : Cathy. 52 In the Type Selector. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. you can use the Rotate tool to further adjust the component placement. about 30 degrees.NOTE If necessary. 53 Move the cursor clockwise. 58 In the camera view (3D View 1). click Camera. select M_RPC Beetle. 54 In the Type Selector. 55 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex. and click to place Cathy so she is facing Alex.

If the sidewalk changes height. When you select a host for a component. double-click West. double-click To Building. and on the Options Bar. View the front of the building 67 In the Project Browser. Select a host for the RPC components 62 Select Cathy. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 141 . click Pick Host. under Constraints. click Pick Host. under 3D Views. under Elevations. 66 Using the same method.59 In the Element Properties dialog. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 64 Select Alex. and click OK. 63 Click the sidewalk. 61 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. Next. 60 In the Project Browser. and on the Options Bar. for Offset. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. enter -300 mm. 65 Click the sidewalk.

142 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . Adding a Service Core to the Building Project on page 142. and replace them with a service core. the elements will be ungrouped in the project. 68 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. The service core is contained in an external file that you bring into the current project as a group. After the service core is positioned.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building.

5 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the Orbit tool to spin the building. you delete the entire stairwell. (SteeringWheels). 4 Press DELETE. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Training Files. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. walls. By deleting the stairwell from the 05 Roof Garden. including the stairs.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click 6 On the View toolbar. and shaft opening. 3 Select the entire stairwell. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell.rvt. under Floor Plans. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 143 . and open Metric\m_RRB_add_service_core.

click (Align). Create an instance of the group 12 In the Project Browser. click OK. click to place an instance of the service core between grid lines B and D and 1 and 2. expand Model. and click Create Instance. click Modify. double-click 00 Foundation. under Floor Plans. and notice that the linked file is listed. Position and align the group 15 On the Tools toolbar. 11 In the Project Browser. and zoom in to the linked instance. double-click 01 Entry Level. Ignore and close any warnings that are displayed as the file is imported as a group. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. 8 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. and on the Design Bar.Add the service core as a group 7 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. right-click m_RRB_core. click Training Files. 10 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 In the drawing area.rvt. expand Groups. 144 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . and open Metric\m_RRB_core.

or if the group layout is expected to change. and spin the building to see the inserted group Shaft openings were included as part of the group geometry and are created automatically as the group is placed. click Modify. and click to align the center.16 Align the core: ■ ■ Click the inner top horizontal floor line. click Modify. 20 On the View toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. (Default 3D View). 19 On the Design Bar. click (top down view). click Ungroup. Press TAB to select the wall centerline of the wall between the top 2 rooms. 18 Select the core. Click the exterior face of the top horizontal wall of the core. Adding a Service Core to the Building Project | 145 . (SteeringWheels). and on the Options Bar. click 21 On the View toolbar. NOTE This step is not required and may not be recommended if there is more than one instance of the group. ■ ■ Click grid line C.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. 146 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. After you modify it. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. where it is hosted within a railing family. You copy the railing type into your project from another project.rvt.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. 22 Proceed to the final exercise. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings on page 146. you add glass railings around the floor edges. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 147 . and on the Options Bar. expand Renderings.rvt. click (Split). click OK. expand Families. double-click 02 Level. Modify the 02 Level floor 12 Select the floor. and double-click Lounge Perspective. and expand Railings. and click to split the floor. 8 In the Project Browser. Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. 7 Click Window menu ➤ m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings.Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. and Parapet. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 11 Close the warning dialog that displays. press and hold CTRL. 3 In the Conference project. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 2 In the left pane of the dialog. click Edit. and open Metric\m_Conference. 10 In the Duplicate Types dialog. The rendering displays. in the Project Browser. This is the railing that you want to add to your model.rvt. and select Glass. under Floor Plans. The floor sketch displays. click Training Files. 5 Expand Railing. Handrail only. Notice the glass railing in the foreground.

148 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 25 Select grid line B. 18 On the Design Bar. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. verify that Chain is not selected. move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm. and click the lock to lock the alignment. click Lines. and click to draw another line. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. click (Align). click Modify. and click to place it. 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. and on the Options Bar. and click to draw another line. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Click to create a line starting from the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.15 On the Design Bar. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long.

click (Align).26 Select grid line D. 31 In the Revit dialog. click Finish Sketch. For Offset. for Type. 30 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. select Glass. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 149 . and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. and click OK. click Railing Properties. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. 27 On the Tools toolbar. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt project. click Railing. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. 33 On the Design Bar. and click the lock to lock the alignment. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. click Dimension. Lock the dimensions.

150 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model . 41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. 39 Click Finish Sketch. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension.37 On the Design Bar. click Camera. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension.

Click (Hide Crop Region) to hide the frame around the view. ■ Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 151 . You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.

152 | Chapter 3 Creating a Building Information Model .43 Close all project drawings.

the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. lofty ceilings. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. 153 . and a roof garden. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial training files in this section. exterior fire stairs. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2009. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. balconies.Documenting Your Projects In this section of the tutorials. NOTE For training purposes. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. slight modifications to the building design have been made. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units.

154 .

155 . section. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views. elevation. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. you learn how to create views from a building model. including plan.Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 4 In this tutorial. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. how to create section and elevation views. You learn how to create new views from existing views. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views Creating Views In this lesson. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans.

Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. 156 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Floor Plans. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files.

8 In the Rename View dialog. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. under Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. select Level 2. under Floor Plans. and click OK. 4 In the Project Browser.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename. Duplicating Plan Views | 157 . 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan.

Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 158 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click the current scale. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. double-click Vicinity Plan. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. 11 Under Floor Plans. 12 In the Rename View dialog. Next. 13 In the Project Browser. enter Vicinity Plan. 14 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. and click 1: 1000.

Creating Elevation and Section Views | 159 . Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 16 Right-click.rvt. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model.

double-click Level 1. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. select Elevation: Building Elevation.South East elevation view Section view Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. under Floor Plans.rvt. for Scale. 4 On the Options Bar. select 1:100. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. click Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. 160 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 3 In the Type Selector.

Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 7 Select and drag the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. click Modify. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 161 . and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. 8 On the Design Bar.

162 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Floor Plans. for Scale. under Elevations. Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. double-click South East. 10 In the Rename View dialog. select Section: Building Section. click Section. 14 In the Type Selector. 15 On the Options Bar. 13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:100. under Views (all). under Elevations (Building Elevation). right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. ■ Move the cursor down.Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and double-click Level 1. enter South East.

Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents. and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 163 .

19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. 20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 164 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Split Segment. drag it to the right (keeping it below the split) until it cuts through the stair. and click to place it. Click the midpoint of the section line.

using the blue circular drag grip. and double-click Section 1. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 165 . 23 On the View Control Bar. expand Sections (Building Section). click Modify.21 On the Design Bar. View the new section 22 In the Project Browser. 24 Select gridline F.

you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan 166 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .25 On the Design Bar. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of each new callout view. click Modify. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

for Scale. under Floor Plans. Creating Callout Views | 167 . click Callout.Resulting callout view . select 1:50. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Floor Plan. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser.Enlarged Stair Plan Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 Draw the callout around the large stairs in the center of the plan: ■ Click to specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 3 In the Type Selector. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. double-click Level 1. 4 On the Options Bar. and click to specify a point to complete the callout. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair.

Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 168 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . ■ Select the middle grip. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary.6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. and select the callout boundary. and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. click Modify.

Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Type Selector. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename. enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 14 On the Options Bar. for Scale. and click to specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Creating Callout Views | 169 . and click OK. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select 1:50.7 On the Design Bar. double-click Section 1. click Modify. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. click Callout. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. under Sections (Building Sections). Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. select Detail View: Detail.

170 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 16 Modify the callout leader as shown. and click to specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang.■ Move the cursor diagonally down.

under Detail Views (Details). and click OK. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. expand Detail Views (Details).17 In the Project Browser. and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Creating Callout Views | 171 . 18 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail.

double-click Level 1. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Open. under Floor Plans. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. the elevation markers.rvt. open Metric\Families\Annotations. click Training Files. Existing stair callout head and boundary Modified stair callout head and boundary Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises. select Custom-Section Head.Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. 172 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . You change the appearance of the section mark head. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser.rfa.

enter 12. 16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. 4 On the Design Bar.5mm Square.The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. 15 Under Category. and select 3. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. . 14 In the Object Styles dialog. 19 Click OK. and click OK. On the floor plan. select Section Head . 10 On the floor plan. and click OK. scroll to Section Line. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. 12 For Section Tag. 8 In the Name dialog. enter Section Head – Custom. click the Annotation Objects tab. and select 2. 17 Under Category. Section Tail .Custom. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Section Head. select the current project. and click OK twice. and can be applied to the section line. clear any others. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog.Filled. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Section Tail – Filled. and click OK. and click OK. click Load into Project. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Edit/New. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 173 . 21 In the Type Properties dialog. 22 In the Name dialog. select the section line. click Duplicate. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project. scroll to Section Marks.

Click OK. . 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. 174 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .23 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. For Dimensions ➤ Width. select Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. For Corner Radius. clear all others. click Load into Project. 30 On the Design Bar.rfa. click Edit/New. 27 Click OK twice. 33 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm Square. click Training Files. enter 6 mm. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. select the callout. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 In the drawing. enter 12. 40 Press ESC. click Duplicate. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. select 12. On the floor plan. Click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. for Elevation Tag. select 3. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Square. and on the Options Bar.5 mm. and on the Options Bar. notice the square elevation markers that display. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. click Edit/New. open Metric\Families\Annotations. . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. select Custom-Callout Head. For Line Weight. and click Open. enter Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. and click OK. for Callout Tag. 34 In the Name dialog. and click OK. select the current project. select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head.

Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. and select 7. 47 Select Callout Leader Line. click the Annotation Objects tab. filters. scroll down to Callout Boundary. 46 Under Category. You learn to create view templates. 43 Under Category.Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Dash. and visual overrides. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. and select 4. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views | 175 . you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. view regions. expand Callout Boundary. 49 Click OK. 45 For Line Pattern. 50 Click File menu ➤ Save. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. masking regions. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. 6 On the View Toolbar. 2 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. View templates provide an easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings. 4 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown.Creating a View Template In this exercise. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. and apply it to multiple elevation views. 3 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. click (Hide Crop Region). To accomplish this. The crop region displays as red. Presentation view Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and features blue triangular grips and break marks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. click (Show Crop Region). 176 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Training Files. click Zoom to Fit. and double-click East. under Elevations.

under Visibility. Creating a View Template | 177 . and section lines are now hidden in the view. Callouts. 13 On the View Control bar. 8 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. grids. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections 12 Click OK.Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 7 On the View Control bar. 10 Click the Annotation Categories tab. 11 Under Visibility. elevation markers. 9 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. levels. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. clear Entourage.

rvt. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. click OK. 178 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . select Black and White Presentation Elevation.14 In the Project Browser. right-click North. 19 In the Select View Template dialog. and click Create View Template From View. under Elevations. edit the crop region as before. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 In the New View Template dialog. double-click North. 21 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 22 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 18 In the Project Browser. right-click East. and click OK. and click Apply View Template. under Elevations. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. click Apply. 20 Using the same method. 16 In the View Templates dialog.

as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. under Floor Plans. for Level. select Level Below (Level 4). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. Click OK twice. for Bottom. under Extents. select Penthouse. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan.View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.rvt. and the exterior area on the south side of the building. for View Range. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Under View Depth. click Edit. View Range and Plan Regions | 179 . and click Properties. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Penthouse. right-click. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. select Level Below (Level 4).

select Level 4. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Under View Depth. click Edit.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. select Roof Plan. for Level. and click Properties. select Level 4. for Bottom. under Floor Plans. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. Click OK twice. for View Range. under Extents. right-click. double-click Roof Plan. 180 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. for Bottom. select Unlimited. click Finish Sketch. Move you cursor diagonally. View Range and Plan Regions | 181 . Under View Depth. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. In the left corner of the building. click Edit. Click OK twice. click Lines.Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. 16 On the Design Bar. under Extents. 11 On the Options Bar. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select Unlimited. 10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. click Plan Region. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle). click Region Properties. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. for View Range.

click Modify.17 On the Design Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. After you apply the filter. 182 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click the Filters tab. you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. in this case. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. the fire rating of the walls. and double-click Level 1. You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. under Views (all). Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise.

6 In the Filter Name dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog. 12 On the Filter tab. 10 On the Filter tab. and click OK. click Override under Patterns. Using Filters to Control Visibility | 183 . 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Categories. click Edit/New. 17 Using the same method. You click the current color value to open the Color dialog. under Projection/Surface. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. enter Rated Walls. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ ■ ■ For Filter by. select Fire Rating. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. for Rated Walls. select the red color. 16 Click OK. and apply a color. select Solid Fill. 11 Select Rated Walls. 14 In the Color dialog. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill. click <No Override>. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. click Add. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. click Remove. for Color. Enter Hr. under Basic colors. for Pattern. under Filters. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 7 In the Filters dialog. select Walls. click OK. 9 Click OK. and click OK. Select contains. and click OK. and click OK.4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click (New).

20 Click File menu ➤ Save. you obscure geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked 184 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Masking Portions of a View In this exercise.

4 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Invisible lines. click Show Crop Region. 8 Select the crop region. as shown. 6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. 5 On the View menu. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.rvt. right-click.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 7 On the View menu. 3 In the Rename View dialog. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 11 In the Type Selector. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click Rename. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Masking Portions of a View | 185 . 9 On the View Control Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. click Masking Region.

13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. 14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. 186 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click (Rectangle).12 On the Options Bar.

10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.Level 1. under Visibility. 4 On the View Control Bar. for Pattern. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. click in the Patterns field. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click Override. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise.rvt. 3 In the Rename View dialog. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. select Walls. for Color. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. Working with Visual Overrides | 187 . Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. click <No Override> to apply a color. right-click Unit 18 Plan . and click Rename. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. under Floor Plans. 7 Under Cut. 11 Click OK twice. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. and click OK. and click OK. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. click black. 1 In the Project Browser. click the current scale. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. and click 1: 50. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. select Solid fill. right-click.

Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Floors. under Visibility. clear Grids. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. 188 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Modify. and click OK.

18 Right-click. 19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. Working with Visual Overrides | 189 . and click Hide in View ➤ Category.

under Lines. click a purple color. click Override. right-click. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Dash. 190 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 25 Click OK twice. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. 23 In the Color dialog. for Pattern. 21 Under Projection/Surface. click Projection Lines. and click OK. click <No Override> to apply a color. select the sofa. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. for Color.20 Right-click. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. By using the previous method to make the selection.

Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. 32 Select one of the lamps. The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. click Modify. 29 In the Color dialog. 30 On the Design Bar.28 For Color. select a bright green color. Working with Visual Overrides | 191 . and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. right-click. click . and click OK twice. click By Category Override.

how to add views to the sheets. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. 192 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. click .33 On the View Control Bar. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson.

TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar. click Sheet.Creating Sheets. A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. right-click. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. Creating Drawing Sheets | 193 . and click View. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. and click OK. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. select A0 metric.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project.

and select the title block. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 3 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Number. For Sheet Name. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. 7 On the Design Bar. expand Sheets (all). click 6 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data: ■ ■ ■ (Properties).Unnamed. click Modify. enter A101. click Modify. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 . 5 When the title block highlights. 194 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Click OK. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. enter Site Plan. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser.NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved.

10 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 Click OK. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. Creating Drawing Sheets | 195 .Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. For Client Name. 2009. enter 15 May. enter 2009-1. enter For Approval. For Project Number. MA 12345 12 Click OK. for Project Address. NOTE Text size is determined within the sheet family. Smith. enter J. The new project information displays in the titleblock. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. under Other. For Project Name. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit. enter Freighthouse Flats.

you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise.rvt.Elevations A107 . right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet.Stairs In the following exercise.Elevations A106 . right-click. select A0 metric.Sections A108 . 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select the new sheet name. and click Save. 196 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .Layout Plan A104 . and click OK. 17 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps. you add views to these sheets.Elevations A105 . 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. enter Floor Plan. and click Rename. and click OK. 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. for Name. create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser.

2 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. select Level 1. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. double-click A104 . 4 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. click Modify. under Sheets (all).Floor Plan. and drag it to the sheet. double-click A102 . and click to place it. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets (all).Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson.Elevations.rvt. and click to place the view. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). Adding Views to Sheets | 197 . The red border around the view no longer displays.

Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. and click to place it. 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). 8 On the Design Bar. drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet.Sections. under Sheets (all). drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. click Modify. align it with the East elevation. double-click A107 . and click to place it. 12 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). click Modify.7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. and click to place it.

for View Scale. and click OK. move the cursor over it. zoom in to the grip. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. and on the Options Bar. 16 Select title bar.Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar. select 1:5. Adding Views to Sheets | 199 . and press TAB until it highlights. . click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view.

under Sheets (all). drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. 200 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click to place it. under Floor Plans. 18 Under Floor Plans. 22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. double-click A108 . double-click Level 1. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. 19 On the Design Bar. click Modify. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser.Stairs. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers.

and press ENTER.Sections. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. 2 Select the building section view.Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. click Modify.rvt. In order to do this. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 5 On the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). you must first activate the view on the sheet. double-click A107 . zoom in to the name and elevation of the level. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 201 . and then make changes and deactivate the view. enter 16700 mm. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. right-click.

you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You modify the view to hide the view title. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. After you create the sheet.6 Right-click. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click North. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 7 In the Project Browser. and click Deactivate View. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise.rvt. 202 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

double-click Level 1. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 203 . select the new sheet name. under Floor Plans. Click OK. and click OK. click Camera. The camera view displays. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 Place the camera as shown. right-click. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. select A0 metric. enter T. and click Properties. enter Title Sheet.Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser. For Sheet Name. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

Title Sheet. 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. enter 18000 mm. Click OK. Under Camera. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 100000 mm. Under Extents. For Far Clip Offset. for Eye Elevation. 11 On the View Control Bar. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 On the View Control Bar. double-click T . For Target Elevation.8 On the Options Bar. enter 1500 mm. 204 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Sheets (all). click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . and click to place it in the center of the sheet. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. select Far Clip Active.

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 205 . The title bar no longer displays on the sheet. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. select Scale (locked proportions). click Modify.15 With the view selected. click Size. Under Model Crop Size. and click OK. click Modify. for Show title. Click Apply. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 22 In the Name dialog. click Duplicate. 24 Click OK twice. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. 19 Select the view on the sheet. enter 635 mm. for Height. click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK. and on the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. enter Viewport/no title mark. . under Graphics. select No. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 25 On the Design Bar.

26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 206 | Chapter 4 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and close the exercise file.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. 207 . You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. Tagging Objects In this lesson. Because of the open style floor plan. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You also learn to create different types of schedules. click Training Files.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. such as room and window schedules. such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans.Level 1.Tagging and Scheduling 5 In this tutorial. such as doors and windows. in your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command.

3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active.2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing). move the cursor to the right. and click Room and Area. as shown: 208 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Separation. 4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. right-click in the Design Bar. as shown: 5 Using the same method.

Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 209 . 7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog. click Load. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. click Modify.6 Using the same method.

14 For Offset. 17 Zoom in on the tag number. click OK. The room tag number displays in blue. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. and click to place the room and tag. indicating that it can be edited. click Room.rfa. and press ENTER. 11 In the Tags dialog. 15 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Modify. type U18-1. 16 On the Design Bar. and select the room tag. 13 On the Options Bar. Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 210 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . verify that Tag on placement is selected.10 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. type 2400 mm. click it.

click Room. 19 On the Design Bar. place rooms and tags. type Entry. 20 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Click to place the new room and tag.18 Click the room text label. click Modify. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Dining. and Living): Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 211 . and edit the tags as shown (Toilet. and press ENTER. ■ 21 On the Design Bar. Sequential letters are also supported. 22 Click the room text label. 23 Using the same method. NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. and press ENTER. type Kitchen. click Modify.

click Modify. expand Lines. and moving clockwise. 29 On the Design Bar. The rooms are already placed. under Floor Plans. 25 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. on the Model Categories tab. and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar. 212 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . click Room Tag. double-click Unit 18 Plan . but they need to be tagged. Tag rooms on upper level 26 In the Project Browser.Hide the room separations 24 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Room Separation. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms. 28 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair).Level 2.

31 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar.30 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Tagging Doors and Windows | 213 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 1. clear Leader. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you learn how to place door and window tags.rvt. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. in the Project Browser. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt.

Closet door in living room

5 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 6 Click the door tag for the entry door, type U18-1, and press ENTER. NOTE The tag symbol and text size are determined by the tag family.

7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

8 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identify Data, for Mark, type U18-2, and click OK.

214 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

9 Using one of the methods you just learned, rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags.

10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right, and drag it down to center it in the doorway.

11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door.

Tagging Doors and Windows | 215

Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, verify that All objects in current view is selected. 15 Under Category, select Door Tags, and click OK. 16 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. 17 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown:

Place window tags 18 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

19 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. 20 In the Tags dialog, click Load. 21 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag.rfa. 22 In the Tags dialog, click OK. 23 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged. 24 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog, select Window Tags, and click OK.

216 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

25 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags.

26 Under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 27 Zoom to the drawing extents. 28 Using the same method, tag all untagged windows. 29 Save the file.

Tagging Other Objects
In this exercise, you learn how to tag furniture objects, and modify the tag placement and display. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress.rvt. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar, click Tag ➤ By Category. 3 On the Options Bar, select Leader. 4 Select a dining room chair. 5 At the confirmation prompt, click Yes to load a tag. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.rfa. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags; select the edge to which the leader connects.

Tagging Other Objects | 217

8 Select the furniture in the living room.

9 Click Modify. Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap.

11 Select the tag for the table, and drag it above the chair tag.

218 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click the elbow control, and drag it up to form an angled leader.

13 Optionally, modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 14 Click Modify. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1), and on the Options Bar, clear Leader. 16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table, and on the Design Bar, click Modify.

Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar, click Tag All Not Tagged, select M_Furniture Tag : Standard, and click OK. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged.

Tagging Other Objects | 219

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture.

20 On the Options Bar, click

(Filter Selection).

21 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Furniture Tags, and click OK. 22 In the Type Selector, select Furniture Tag: Boxed, and click Modify.

23 Save the file.

Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams
In this lesson, you learn to add schedules. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule.

220 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Creating a Window Schedule
In this exercise, you create a window schedule for the building model shown below.

You begin by creating a window instance schedule; that is, a schedule that lists every window in the building.

Creating a Window Schedule | 221

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model.

Next, you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. Finally, you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule, in which windows are listed by window type.

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams.rvt.

Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Windows. 4 For Name, type Building Window Schedule, and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select Comments and click Add. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. 7 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule:
■ ■ ■ ■

Count Height Level Type Mark

222 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

Width

8 Under Scheduled fields, order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down.

9 Click OK. A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model.

Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark, and on the Options Bar, click Show. If no open view shows the selected element, you are prompted to open one that does. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays, click OK to search through relevant views of the building model.

Creating a Window Schedule | 223

The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model.

12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog, click Close. NOTE By clicking Show, you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. However, in large building models with many views, this can be a time-consuming process. 13 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area, right-click the schedule, and click View Properties. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, for Sort by, select Type Mark 17 Click OK twice. The window schedule is displayed, sorted by type mark.

Change type mark from the schedule 18 In the window schedule, change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A, and press ENTER. 19 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type.

224 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 20 Right-click on the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog, clear Itemize every instance. 23 Click OK twice. The window type schedule is displayed.

24 Change the Type Mark for the other window types, so that the types are sequentially named from A to H, as shown:

25 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 2. 26 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed.

27 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt.

Creating a Window Schedule | 225

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule
In this lesson, you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. In this case, you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head, jamb, and sill conditions for a window can be found. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and, unlike shared parameters, you cannot use them to tag objects.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser, expand Schedules/Quantities, and double-click Building Window Schedule. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add to create the new parameter. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Categories, select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. Under Parameter Data, for Name, type Head Detail. For Group parameter under, select Construction. Select Type.

5 Click OK. The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog. 6 Using the same method, create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 7 In the Project Parameter dialog, click OK. Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Building Window Schedule, and click Properties. 9 In the Element Properties dialog, under Other, for Fields, click Edit. 10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail

11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list, so that they are listed before Comments.

226 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

12 Click OK twice.

Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule, select Head Detail, Jamb Detail, and Sill Detail. TIP To select all 3 headers, click in the Head Detail header, and without releasing the left mouse button, move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar, click Group. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule, type Window Details. 16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. For example, under Type Mark A, for Head Detail, type 1/A107; for Jamb Detail, type 2/A107; and for Sill Detail, type 3/A107.

17 Save the file.

Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 227

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter
In this exercise, you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. You then hide the column used for the filter, and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser, expand Floor Plans, and double-click Unit 18 Plan - Level 1. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Category, select Doors. Under Name, type Unit 18 - Door Schedule. Verify that Schedule building components is selected. For Phase, verify that Phase 1 is selected.

4 Click OK. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog, click the Fields tab. 6 Under Available fields, select the following fields, and click Add to add them to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark

7 Click the Filter tab, and specify the following values for Filter by:
■ ■ ■

Select Mark in the first field. Select contains in the second field. Type U18 in the third field.

This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with, and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. 8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab, and specify the following options:
■ ■

For Sort by, select Family and Type. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row).

9 Click the Formatting tab. 10 Under Fields, select Mark. 11 Under Field formatting, select Hidden field, and click OK.

228 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule, but is not included as a column in the schedule.

Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser, expand Sheets (all), and double-click A102 - Unit 18. 13 In the Project Browser, click Unit 18 - Door Schedule, and drag it to the sheet.

14 Click to place the schedule in the upper left corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule.

Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions.

Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 229

19 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 20 Save the file.

Creating a Room Schedule
In this exercise, you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. NOTE In some cases in this tutorial, partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise, m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar, click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active, right-click in the Design Bar, and click View. 3 In the New Schedule dialog, under Category, select Rooms, and click OK. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available fields, select Number, and click Add. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. 5 Using the same method, add the following fields to the schedule in order:
■ ■ ■

Name Level Area

6 Click the Appearance tab. 7 Under Text, to the right of Header text, select Bold. 8 Click OK. NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet.

230 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling

next to Rows. type Building Entry. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for Name. For 103. type Corridor. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. click New. add 5 more rooms. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. select Corridor. for room 101. 11 Using the same method.Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. 101-106. For 105. type Storage. and press ENTER. Creating a Room Schedule | 231 . For 104. The room Number is U17-46. and press ENTER. 10 Edit the number to be 101. For 102. select Storage.

Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. and click OK. 13 Save the file. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress.rvt. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser. under Projection/Surface. In the Lines field. type Stair. click the bright green swatch. Under Custom colors. For Weight. expand Lines. under Floor Plans. under Visibility. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. double-click Level 1. click the Color field. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. and press ENTER. In the Line Graphics dialog. select 9. For Room Separation. 4 Click OK twice. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog.■ For 106. click Override. and modify room names. 232 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. you add room separation lines. place rooms from a program list. click the Lines field.

First. draw the horizontal line. 7 Click to add 2 room separation lines in the corridor at the right side of the drawing. click Room Separation. click Modify. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. Place rooms from a program list 10 On the Design Bar. click Room. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 233 . 8 Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line.Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building.

for Room. select 101 Building Entry. type 2400 mm. 12 Click to place the room in the newly defined entry area (lower right). 13 On the Options Bar. 11 On the Options Bar.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. select 102 Storage. 234 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 For Offset. for Room.

Place 106 in the space with the stairs (to the left of room 105). as shown: Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 235 . 19 In the Project Browser. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 18 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. double-click Room Schedule. 17 On the Design Bar. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen.15 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. under Schedules/Quantities. 20 While pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in or adjacent to the storage areas). 16 Using the same method. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. place the following rooms. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor. under Floor Plans.

21 On the Options Bar. click 23 On the Design Bar. and click Add. and for all 3 finishes. 26 In the New Schedule dialog. clear Room Bounding. Floor Finish. type Units. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. while pressing CTRL. 29 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. type As Selected. and Wall Finish. for Rows. 236 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . (Element Properties). under Available fields. Create key schedule 25 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. under Constraints. 28 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 27 Select Schedule keys. 31 For Key Name. The Room Style Schedule displays without data. under Category. click Modify. and click OK. select Rooms. select Base Finish. 24 Open the Room Schedule. click Schedule/Quantities. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 30 On the Options Bar. click New.

click Check None. under Floor Plans. 44 On the Options Bar. under Schedules/Quantities. for Room Style. 36 Click OK twice. 43 In the Filter dialog. click (Filter Selection). right-click Room Schedule. 33 In the Project Browser. 42 On the Options Bar. for Fields. select Units. click (Element Properties). select Room Style. double-click Level 1. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 39 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. under Identity Data. All rooms are selected in the floor plan. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 237 . 37 Open the Room Schedule. click Edit. select Rooms. under Other. and click Add. select Units. for Room Style. 38 Under U17-8. 41 Draw a selection box around floor plan. and click OK.32 Using the same method. 35 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 40 Zoom to the drawing extents. for Available fields. and click OK. 45 In the Element Properties dialog.

7 Because you are creating a new color scheme. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. at the warning prompt. 103. select Public. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. For rooms 102 and 105. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). select Service. click the Color Scheme field. 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. type Room Type. and click OK. select Room Style. click 5 For Title. and 106. and click Properties. click OK. type Room Type. for Name. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise.46 Open the Room Schedule. under Views (all). 48 Save the file. under Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. and apply it to the Level 1 view. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 104. 4 In the New color scheme dialog. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 6 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. (Duplicate).rvt. under Graphics. 47 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. right-click Level 1. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. click OK. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. 238 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 9 In the Project Browser. for Color. expand Floor Plans.

click Edit Color Scheme. select Room Type. expand Lines. click the value in the Color column. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 239 . clear Visible. 20 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. When you move the cursor over the drawing area. 16 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. 14 Click OK twice. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 17 On the Design Bar. select the color legend. Add a color scheme legend 15 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 21 In the second row of the table (Public). a legend displays at the tip of the cursor. in the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none).11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. under Visibility. under Schemes. click Modify. Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 18 In the drawing area. and click OK. click Edit. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. click Color Scheme Legend. and clear Room Separation. for Visibility/Graphics Overrides.

for Size. under Graphics. (Element Properties). for Swatch Width. type 25 mm. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. 30 On the Design Bar. respectively. under Custom color. 29 Click OK twice. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog. select blue. and click OK. change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray. 240 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . type 5 mm. click Edit/New. 23 Using the same method. 24 Click OK. click Modify. 27 In the Type Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 28 Under Title Text.22 In the Color dialog.

Calculation of room volumes can affect project performance. for Color Scheme. and click OK. 38 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog. Turn on the visibility of rooms in the building section view 32 In the Project Browser. select Room Type. 35 Click OK twice. under Sections. under Visibility. right-click Building Section. 37 Click to place the legend on the drawing. the legend displays at the tip of the cursor. 39 Using the grip at the bottom of the legend. As you move the cursor over the drawing area. select Rooms. under Sections. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. position the legend horizontally across the bottom of the section view. click Edit. under Graphics. double-click Building Section. 34 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. volume computations must be enabled from Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 241 . for Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Color Scheme Legend.Create a section color diagram 31 In the Project Browser. NOTE In order for color fills to be displayed in section. Place the color scheme legend on the section 36 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. and select Properties.

and the room to the right of the stair on level 1 (Corridor 104). click . 45 While pressing CTRL. select all the rooms in the stairwell. 242 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Identity Data. and click OK. click Assign all rooms the Units room style 43 On the Options Bar. click Check None. under Identity Data. 41 On the Options Bar. 46 Click . (Filter Selection). and click OK. for Room Style. select Rooms. select Units. for Room Style. 42 In the Filter dialog.40 Draw a selection box around the entire drawing. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Public. 47 In the Element Properties dialog.

for Room Style. excluding the stairwell spaces. and click OK. and click . under Identity Data. Add suites as a new room style in the Room Style Schedule 50 In the Project Browser. select all the rooms on levels 3 and 4. 52 In the Room Style Schedule. double-click Room Style Schedule. under Schedules/Quantities. under Key Name for the new row. for Rows. type Suites. Assign the Suites room style to all rooms on levels 3 and 4 53 Open the Building Section. 49 In the Element Properties dialog.Assign the penthouse room the service room style 48 Select the penthouse. click New. 51 On the Options Bar. TIP You may need to use TAB to select the room in the upper right with the entertainment center. 54 While pressing CTRL. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 243 . select Service.

select Suites. Use volume calculations to control color fills 57 Click Settings menu ➤ Area and Volume Computations. 56 In the Element Properties dialog.55 Click . The color fill will extend to the roof. but not beyond it. The color fill extends to the roof. Change room heights 60 In the drawing area. verify that At wall finish is selected. A new Suites key is added to the color scheme legend. 62 Repeat this process for all rooms that are bounded by the sloping roof: the remaining suites and the public stairs on the top floor. select Areas and Volumes. and click OK. select the room on the left side of the top floor. under Identity Data. and click OK. 59 Under Room Area Computation. 61 Drag the top Control grip above the bounding roof. 244 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . under Volume Computations. for Room Style. 58 In the Area and Volume Computations dialog.

0. 70 For Limit Offset. the dining room. under Constraints. under Constraints. select Loft. select the public room next to the stairs (Corridor 104). type -254 mm. 71 Click OK. 68 Click . click Modify. 64 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit. type 0. 66 Click OK.Assign the correct heights to the rooms on the first level 63 On the first level. 67 On the first level. and the living room. select the stairwell room. 72 On the Design Bar. select Level 2. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 245 . and click 65 For Limit Offset. . 69 In the Element Properties dialog. for Upper Limit.

Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials. under 3D Views. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.73 Save the file. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. double-click {3D}. 246 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .

under Category. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Family and Type. select Material: Description.EPDM. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog. and click OK. 4 In the Type Selector. under Available fields. Select Grand totals. Clear Itemize every instance. 3 While pressing CTRL.Insulation on Plywood Deck . 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. 9 Using the same method.2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. click Modify. 5 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. and click Add. select Family and Type. Creating a Material Takeoff | 247 . select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. For Then by. select Roofs.

15 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. type Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Fields. select Calculate totals. 19 For Type. type Estimated Cost. 24 In the Roof Material Takeoff. and click OK twice. 12 Click OK. select Material: Cost. for Material: Cost. under Available fields. click the Formatting tab. click Edit. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. select Currency. 21 Click OK. 23 For Field formatting. select Material: Area. and click Properties. TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text.11 On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ Under Fields. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. Under Field formatting. 22 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. for Name. 20 For Formula. and click Add.80 248 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and under Fields. 17 Click Calculated Value.40 50. click Estimated Cost. type the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Material: Cost 16 13. select Calculate totals. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. The Roof Material Takeoff Schedule displays. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so that the cost estimate value can be calculated.

26 In the Project Units dialog. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. In this lesson. not just for currency. can be used for any number-based parameter.Material: Description Wood Joist Material: Cost 5.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. either within family components or within the project template. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. for Currency. creating a generic tag to tag the family. 30 Click OK twice. and schedule the total distance of each path. Digit grouping. 29 Select Use digit grouping. and reporting the shared parameters. for Rounding. 27 In the Format dialog. Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. 28 For Unit symbol. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. and are defined and stored in an external file. click the Format value. tag the line. 31 Save the file. regardless of category. which inserts commas after every three digits. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. you create an exiting plan for the building. The cost fields are formatted correctly. You draw a travel path line. select $. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 249 . ensuring consistency across families and projects. verify that 2 decimal places is selected. adding the shared parameters to a family. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Add currency formatting to the schedule 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. you create a shared parameter file.

and click Save. click Create. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog.rvt. click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. for File name. under Groups. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Click OK twice. for Type of Parameter. type Exiting.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. type Path ID. type OfficeStandardsParameters. and click OK. 9 Under Parameters. 7 Under Parameters. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. under Floor Plans. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. click New.rvt. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click New. 4 In the left pane of the Create Shared Parameter File dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. for Name. select Length. type Travel Distance. and click OK. for Name. click Training Files. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. 250 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .txt. for Name.

rvt. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file.rfa. group it under Dimensions. Create a tag using shared parameters 16 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and click OK. under Dimensions. 10 Using the same method. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. under Parameter Type. click Family Types. 13 Click Apply.Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise. Click Training Files. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. If you have multiple projects open. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rvt. 8 Select Instance. select Constraints. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. following the equals symbol (=). The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. for Travel Distance Formula. otherwise the family loads into the current project. add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. click Add. click Add. 15 If necessary. 11 Click OK. 3 On the Design Bar. type Length. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. and click Select. 14 On the Design Bar. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. in the Load into Projects dialog. under Parameter Data. and click OK. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. and click OK. and select Instance. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. click Load into Projects. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Parameters. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click OK. select Shared parameter. under Parameters. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 251 . for Group parameter under.

and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. under Category Parameters. select Travel Distance. 25 In the Edit Label dialog. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes.17 In the left pane of the New Annotation Symbol dialog. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 252 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click OK. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. 27 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files.rft. click Label. under Parameters. 19 On the Design Bar. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. click parameter(s) to label). click (Add Parameter). click Label. 24 Click OK twice. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Select. (Add 26 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Edit Label dialog.

for File Name. 29 In the drawing window. and press DELETE. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. 34 On the Load into Projects dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 In the Save As dialog. 31 Click File ➤ Save As. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. and click OK. click Modify. 30 Select the Note in the upper left area of the drawing window. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 253 .rvt is selected.28 On the Design Bar. and move it down. 35 Save the file. type M_Travel Distance Tag. select Path ID. click Load into Projects. and click Save.rfa.

double-click Exiting Plan . you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. After the lines are tagged. Training File Continue using the training file you saved in the previous exercise.Tagging.Level 1. click Component. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. select Chain. 4 On the Options Bar. above the exterior door as shown. 254 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .Placing. and click in the center of the corridor. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the corridor. Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID.

type 1-1.7 Move the cursor down. 17 On the Options Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Tagging. click Modify. click Modify. verify that Chain is selected. and click outside of the building. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. double click Exiting Plan . 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Constraints. click Component. 8 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 13 While pressing CTRL. clear Leader. for Path ID. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 255 . and click OK. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). Placing. 18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan.Level 2. 12 On the Design Bar. through the door. move the cursor near the right corner. 10 On the Options Bar.

256 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling .19 Move the cursor up through the door. 22 Click at the starting point of the previous path. click Component. 20 On the Design Bar. move the cursor to the left. and click. 21 On the Design Bar. and click in the stair. click Modify. and click above the door to the stair. 23 Move the cursor down.

32 In the New Schedule dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. under Category. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. Placing. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Path ID. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. type 2-1. click Modify. and click OK. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 257 . type Level 1 Exit Distance. under Constraints. . specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2. 30 Using the same method. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities.24 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify. 28 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. 27 On the Design Bar. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. 33 For Name.

35 Click the Filter tab. and click Rename. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise. select Path ID. 38 For Sort by. select Path ID and Travel Distance. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Available fields. 49 Click OK twice. 43 In the Project Browser. 45 In the Rename View dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Schedules/Quantities. 44 In the Project Browser. and under Field formatting. 50 Save the file. select Travel Distance. select Path ID. click Edit. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. and click OK. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. while pressing CTRL. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. 258 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. select Calculate totals. In the left pane of the Open dialog. type 2-. 41 Under Fields. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. and click Properties. in the second field. for Filter by.rvt. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. under Other. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. 36 For Filter by. type Level 2 Exit Distance. and in the third field. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 42 Click OK. 46 In the Project Browser. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. and click Add. select contains. in the first field. for Filter. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. click Training Files. type 1-. in the third field.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance.

Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 259 .Partitions ➤ C1010100 . right-click the Design Bar.Partitions . 7 In the Type Properties dialog.152 mm. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. 9 Click OK twice. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. and click OK. click the Value field. 4 Under Available fields. and click . and click View. under Categories. under Identity Data. and click Properties. 10 In the schedule. for Assembly Code.Fixed Partitions. select the following fields.Interiors ➤ C10 . Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser.Drywall w/ Metal Stud.Interior Construction ➤ C1010 . and select C1010145 .Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. expand C . click the Fields tab. select Walls. right-click Generic . TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. expand Families ➤ Walls ➤ Basic Wall. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule.

11 Click OK 3 times. 1 On the File menu. under Database. 260 | Chapter 5 Tagging and Scheduling . and click Next. the database display may be different than that shown. NOTE Depending on your version of Microsoft Access. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. click OK. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 8 In the New Database dialog. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. for Database Name. 5 Type RevitDSN for the name of the file data source. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database.mdb. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select the Microsoft Access Driver (*. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click the File Data Source tab. 9 Under Directories. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. and click Next. 10 When the confirmation dialog displays. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. and click OK to create the database. 6 Click Finish.11 Close the exercise file. 3 Click New.mdb). click Create. 12 Open the database in Microsoft Access. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. type Revit_Project.rvt. select a location for the database file.

tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. For example. This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 261 . which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. 13 Close the exercise file. Additionally. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. in addition to the Id column. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type.

262 .

you learn how to change the base elevation of a project. Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2009 projects. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm. 263 . You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels.Annotating and Dimensioning 6 In this tutorial.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project

264 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Shared levels report elevation relative to the base height

Relocating a Project
In this exercise, you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project, the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1.

Relocating a Project | 265

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt.

Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Elevations (Building Elevation), and double-click South. Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared, so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

266 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. 3 On the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated, you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. If you did that now, the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. However, to better demonstrate how shared levels work, only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time, and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. 5 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

Click Duplicate. In the Name dialog, type 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation, and click OK. Under Constraints, for Elevation Base, select Shared.

6 Click OK twice. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. 8 Select the Level 1 line. By selecting the Level 1 line, you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line, type 10000 mm, and press ENTER. By typing 10000 mm in this step, you specify the new location of the project. 10 On the View menu, click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The south elevation is displayed. The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. The elevation of the other levels remains the same.

Relocating a Project | 267

Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 12 In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. 13 On the Design Bar, click Modify. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

14 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click North. The changes in elevation have propagated to this view, as well as other views of the building model.

268 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Define the remaining levels as shared:
■ ■ ■

While pressing CTRL, select Levels 2-4, the Penthouse level, and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector, select Level : 8 mm Head - Shared Elevation. On the Design Bar, click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation.

Relocating a Project | 269

16 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 17 Proceed to the next lesson, Dimensioning on page 270.

Dimensioning
In this lesson, you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. In Revit Architecture, there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created, except when you sketch profiles to complete families. In this case, permanent dimensions are created automatically, although you must turn on their visibility to view them.

Creating Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear, multi-segmented, radial, and angular dimensions, and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model.

270 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Linear and multi-segmented dimensions

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. By default, dimensions are aligned, snap to wall centerlines, and are created by selecting individual reference points.

3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain wall, select it.

Creating Dimensions | 271

4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view, and when a blue dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall, select it.

5 Move the cursor above the view, and click to place the dimension.

272 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. The lock displays as locked, indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way.

7 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step, and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays, and select it. 11 Using the same method, select the right endpoint of the planter.

Creating Dimensions | 273

12 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall Faces. 13 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select its left exterior face.

14 Move the cursor to the right, and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. 15 After you select the reference points on the final planter, select the right side of the curtain wall. 16 Move the cursor up, above the plan view of the building, but below the first dimension that you placed, and click to place the multi-segmented dimension.

Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 17 With the multi-segmented dimension selected, click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another.

18 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

274 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Create a baseline dimension style 19 Select the dimension string, and on the Options Bar, click 20 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 21 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 22 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline, and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog, under Graphics, for Dimension String Type, select Baseline. Create an ordinate dimension style 24 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 25 In the Name dialog, enter Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Ordinate, and click OK. 26 In the Type Properties dialog, for Dimension String Type, select Ordinate. 27 Click OK twice. View and apply the new dimension styles 28 Zoom in to the dimension string. The dimensions start from 0 mm and increase moving away from the origin. .

29 Select the dimension string, and in the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial - Baseline. The dimensions are stacked and measure from the same baseline.

Creating Dimensions | 275

30 In the Type Selector, select Linear - 2.5 mm Arial to return to the original dimension style. Add text below a permanent dimension You can add supplemental text above, below, to the left, or to the right of a permanent dimension value. 31 Click the dimension value to which you want to add text, for example Text dialog displays. 33 Under Text Fields, for Below, enter Planter. 34 Click OK. . The Dimension

32 In the Dimension Text dialog, under Dimension Value, verify that Use Actual Value is selected.

35 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. suffix 36 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4.

276 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

37 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 38 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Radial).

For Prefer, select Wall faces.

39 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights, and select it. 40 Move the cursor outside the wall, and specify a point to place the dimension. 41 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Modify.

42 Select the radial dimension. 43 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right.

44 With the dimension still selected, click the dimension text. 45 In the Dimension Text dialog, for Suffix, type Typ., and click OK. 46 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

Creating Dimensions | 277

Place an angular dimension 47 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

48 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 49 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Click

(Angular).

For Prefer, verify that Wall faces is selected.

50 Select the horizontal line. This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building.

278 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

51 Select the left exterior face of the planter.

52 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc, and click to place the dimension. 53 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

54 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions on page 279.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building. When you dimension the wall, you select only the wall, instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings.

Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 279

Automatic wall dimension

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 3. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows.

Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 3 On the Options Bar:
■ ■ ■

For Prefer, select Wall centerlines. For Pick, select Entire Walls. Click Options.

4 In the Auto Dimension Options dialog:

Under Select references, select Openings, and select Widths.

280 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Click OK. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings, and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string.

Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall.

6 Move the cursor down below the plan view, and click to place the automatic dimension string.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

8 Proceed to the next exercise, Controlling Witness Lines on page 281.

Controlling Witness Lines
In this exercise, you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions, and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions, you specify their origin on the Options Bar. However, in some cases, you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. For example, for a multi-segmented dimension, you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall, where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. Training File

Controlling Witness Lines | 281

Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension.

3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Dimension. 4 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

For Prefer, verify Wall centerlines is selected. For Pick, select Individual References.

5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter.

6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights, and select it.

282 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

7 Using the same method, select the right edge of the planter, move the cursor down, and click to place the dimension.

8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. 9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted, and select it.

10 Using the same method, select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down, and specify a point to place the dimension.

Controlling Witness Lines | 283

Dimension the partition walls to centerlines 12 On the Basics tab, click Dimension. 13 On the Options Bar, for Prefer, select Wall centerlines. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan, and when the wall centerline highlights, select it.

284 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

15 Moving the cursor to the right, select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls, and click to place the dimension. 16 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed, and zoom in on the right end of the dimension. 18 While pressing SHIFT, select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark, and drag the dimension down the wall.

Controlling Witness Lines | 285

19 Release SHIFT, select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap.

20 Click the blue middle grip, drag it to the right, and press TAB until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.

21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan, and using the same methods, create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall. 22 On the Basics tab, click Modify. 23 Proceed to the next exercise, Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions on page 286.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions
In this exercise, you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. After you create the new family type, you change the dimension tick mark, text font, and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards.

286 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4, and select the lower dimension.

2 Click

(Element Properties).

3 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 5 In the Name dialog, type Office Standard, and click OK. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■

Under Graphics, for Tick Mark, select Arrow 30 Degree. Under Text, for Text Size, type 3.2 mm.

Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 287

For Text Font, select CityBlueprint. NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list, select another font.

Click OK twice.

7 On the Basics tab, click Modify. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type.

8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right, and select the bottom dimension.

9 In the Type Selector, select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 10 On the Basics tab, click Modify.

288 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

11 Using the same method, select the angular dimension on the planter, create a new angular dimension type, and modify it to use the office standard parameters.

12 Proceed to the next lesson, Creating Text Annotation on page 289.

Creating Text Annotation
In this lesson, you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes, and how to add leaders to the text notes.

Creating Text Annotation | 289

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan
In this exercise, you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan, zoom to the planter near grid line 5.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar, click Text. 3 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (None).

4 Move the cursor above grid line 4, but below the upper dimension string, and click and drag to create a text box.

290 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

5 In the text box, type EXISTING BUILDING.

Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 7 Select the text box, and click .

8 In the Element Properties dialog box, click Edit/New. 9 In the Type Properties dialog, click Duplicate. 10 In the Name dialog box, type 6 mm Arial Notes, and click OK. 11 Under Text, for Text Size, type 6 mm, and click OK. 12 In the Element Properties dialog, under Graphics, select Arc Leaders, and click OK.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 291

You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. If so, select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box.

Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar, click Text. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4, and type Planting Bed. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

16 Select the Planting Bed text box.

292 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

17 On the Options Bar:

Click (Add Right Arc Leader). A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. Click (Add Left Arc Leader). Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box.

Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader, and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. 20 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders, and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 23 In the Type Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

.

Click Rename. In the Rename dialog, for New, type Standard Notes, and click OK. Under Text, for Text Font, select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics, for Leader Arrowhead, select Arrow 30 Degree. Click OK twice.

24 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 293

Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar, click Text. 26 In the Type Selector, select Text: Standard Notes. 27 On the Options Bar, for Leader, click (Arc).

28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3.

29 Move the cursor up and to the right, over the Planting Bed text. 30 When blue dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text, click to place the text box.

294 | Chapter 6 Annotating and Dimensioning

31 Click in the text box, and type 457 mm Conc. Wall, and click Modify.

32 If you want to save your changes, click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 295

296

You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. and metal studs. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. plywood. add detail components. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model.Detailing 7 In this tutorial. you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail. In order to detail from the building model. These components display at the required scale. In the callout view. Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. like a standard door header condition. you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2009. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. you trace over the building model geometry. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. 297 .

rfa. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. you detail the view of the roof edge. region objects. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. They are also view specific. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. as well as detail lines. Exact location is not important. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 298 | Chapter 7 Detailing . double-click the detail callout head. 5 In the alert dialog. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. After you add components. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog.Detailing the View In this exercise. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 7 In the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. and click Open. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. click Training Files. The roof overhang detail displays. and insulation objects. select As underlay. You load detail components. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. which means that all detail components. click Detail Component. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. click Training Files. and click OK.rvt. Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.

12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Modify. select Corrugated Metal. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. 16 Click OK twice. click (Element Properties). click Edit/New. 17 In the drawing area. and click OK. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 19 On the Design Bar. Detailing the View | 299 . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 406. click Repeating Detail. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 14 In the Type Properties dialog.5mm. 13 In the Name dialog. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point. click Duplicate.8 Delete the component. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. 15 For Spacing.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Detail Component. ■ ■ Click Modify. and click Open. click Training Files. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected. 300 | Chapter 7 Detailing .20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. 25 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.rfa. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. click Load. 22 On the Options Bar. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. click (Move). 24 In the Type Selector. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. Add lumber detail components 21 On the Design Bar.

click Detail Component.rvt. 30 In the Type Selector. Load components as a group 26 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 33 In the Type Selector. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. click OK. you load them as a group from a single file. and click Open. press SPACEBAR 3 times. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Training Files. and place it in the detail view as shown. 29 On the Design Bar. 27 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog. 28 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 31 To properly orient the component. 32 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point.Because you still have several components to load. Detailing the View | 301 .

NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification.Add wallboard detail component 34 In the Type Selector. 38 Select the horizontal segment. 35 On the Options Bar. and click Modify. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 36 Place the wallboard component as shown. 37 Click Modify. 302 | Chapter 7 Detailing . The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. click the Flip instance arrows. select Chain.

Add insulation 39 On the Design Bar. as shown. select to near side. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. 42 Click Modify. click (Move). click Insulation. ■ Click Modify. 41 Place 2 segments of insulation. Add lumber components 44 On the Design Bar. enter 140mm. Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. Detailing the View | 303 . click Detail Component. For Offset. 43 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. and on the Edit toolbar. 40 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width.

select Thin Lines. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm.rvt. meaning they display only in this view.45 In the Type Selector. they are view specific. 51 Click Modify. 50 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. Add rigid insulation 49 In the Type Selector. 48 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. and lock the component. click Detail Lines. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. Adding Detail Lines on page 304. 47 In the Type Selector. Like detail components. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 46 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. as shown. 2 In the Type Selector. you add lines to your detail. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. 304 | Chapter 7 Detailing . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.

enter 10mm. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. For Offset. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 11 In the Type Selector. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. as shown.4 Click Modify. 7 In the Type Selector. 10 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. as shown. Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. Adding Detail Lines | 305 . select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. For Offset. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). enter 10mm.

and draw the detail lines as shown.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. select Chain. 16 On the Options Bar. 306 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and clear Chain. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown. click (Draw). 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. as shown.

19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut. When you turn the display model off. and press ENTER. 26 In the Type Selector. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. select Vapor Barrier. draw the detail lines as shown. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select the Penthouse level line. 20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. 22 In the Project Browser. click Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar.18 In the Type Selector. select Thin Lines. right-click. and click OK. 24 On the View Control Bar. For Offset. select Do not display. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. enter 10mm. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. Click (Pick Lines). Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. click Detail Lines. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ➤ Hide Crop Region. Adding Detail Lines | 307 .

31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. Adding Text Notes on page 308. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Detail Component. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. select M_Break Line. you add text notes to complete the detail. press SPACEBAR as necessary. 32 Click Modify. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar. Training File 308 | Chapter 7 Detailing .

click ■ ■ ■ ■ (Arc) to create an arced leader. click Text. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar.rvt. Enter the text. click Dimension. 6 Click Modify. and click to place the dimension.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Text Notes | 309 . Click again to specify the location of the text box. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 2 On the Options Bar. Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. click the left edge of the corrugated metal component.

8 In the Dimension Text dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. and press DELETE. enter Typ. and click OK.7 Select the dimension line. under Text Fields. and click the dimension text. and click OK. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. (Filter Selection). for Suffix. enter Roof Overhang Detail . Creating Detail Components In this exercise. right-click.Keynotes. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. click Select All Instances. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). select a text note. and click Rename.. right-click. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. right-click. and save the exercise file. and click OK. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Creating Detail Components on page 310. 310 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Roof Overhang Detail. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Detail Items and Dimensions.rvt. click 6 In the Filter dialog.

and click Open. select all the coping linework. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework. 14 Click Modify. Creating Detail Components | 311 . 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 15 Use a window to select all linework. 11 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component.7 Click Modify. pressing TAB. 16 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and selecting the chain. while pressing CTRL.rft. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. in the Type Selector. 9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select Medium Lines. click Training Files.

32 Proceed to the next exercise. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. navigate to your preferred location. for File name. The original linework remains selected. 22 Click Modify. and click OK. While pressing SHIFT. 27 On the Design Bar. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click it in the Project Browser.rfa. and the component can be placed in the detail. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. Adding Keynotes on page 312. and click Open. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. 25 In the Filter dialog. click Load. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 26 Press DELETE. 31 Using the same method used previously. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. click Detail Component. 21 To place the component. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . 28 On the Options Bar. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. clear Detail Items. click Training Files. Adding Keynotes In this exercise.18 In the Save As dialog. delete the underlying linework. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. click . click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. 30 In the drawing area.Keynotes view is not the open view. you place keynotes on objects. and click Save. 24 On the Options Bar. Training File 312 | Chapter 7 Detailing . select the coping. 23 Using a window. enter Roof Edge. click Load into Projects.

(Element Properties). click Keynote ➤ Element. click Edit/New. Adding Keynotes | 313 .C1. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click OK. 2 In the alert dialog. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. Click to place the leader arm. 19mm Plywood. 63mm Rigid Insulation.D11.B5.rfa. Roof Edge4. 6 Click Modify. and click Open.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. use keynote 06160. In the Keynotes dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. click Training Files. For the metal coping. 3 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. use keynote 07645. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. 5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking. select the metal fascia with drip edge.

For the 50 x 300. click Keynote ➤ Element. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties.D1. navigate to 07645. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote.G1. click Detail Component.20 Ga. For the 19mm Plywood Siding. click in the Value column. you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. use keynote 06110. use keynote 09250.I1.D11.A8. Creating Line-based Detail Components on page 314. 22mm Corrugated Steel . FasciaProfile_1. 18 Save the file. 314 | Chapter 7 Detailing .F1. 11 Click OK 3 times. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. use keynote 06160. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. For the 50 x 150. 17 Keynote the component. use keynote 06110. and click .F1. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 14 On the Design Bar. 12 On the Design Bar. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag.9 In the Type Properties dialog. For the 50 x 200. 13 Tag components: ■ Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. use keynote 06110. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 15 In the Type Selector. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard. You do this in order to keynote the component. using keynote 07460. select Corrugated Metal.

23 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. click Edit/New. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click Open. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 315 . 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. select Medium Lines. 15 Click Modify. click Load into Projects. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. for File name. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. and click (Element Properties). click Training Files. click Detail Component. 4 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 Press DELETE. 5 In the drawing area. 8 In the Save As dialog. 2 In the left pane of the New Family dialog. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click Training Files. select the left end point of the reference line. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components.rvt. 9 On the Design Bar. click Load. click Lines. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and click Save. and click Modify. click Detail Component. and select the right end point. and click Open. 6 Lock the line. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 Select the component.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 20 Click OK 3 times. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Type Selector. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. 22 On the Options Bar. enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown.rft. 19 In the Name dialog. and m_Light Line Detail Component. navigate to your preferred location.

Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 31 Select the component. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. click (Move). name the component 50 x 200 Framing. against the 19mm plywood.A1. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Edit toolbar. 40 Click Modify. and click . and click the lower end at the break line. and hidden) used in the view. enter EPDM Membrane. click the end points of the long detail line above the roof. 27 On the Design Bar. 42 Using the same method used previously. You add the components to the project and keynote them. 34 In the Name dialog. and assign it keynote 07260. 46 Click Modify. name the component Air Barrier. 47 Select the component. click Edit/New. and click .25 Next. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. and click . 30 Click Modify. 44 On the Design Bar. invisible. and click OK. and click . 36 In the Keynotes dialog. 37 Click OK 3 times. and assign it keynote 06110. click Detail Component. 28 In the Type Selector. click in the Value column. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 316 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Detail Component. 29 In the drawing area. 49 With the component selected. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 41 Select the component just added. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang.G1. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light.A5. 50 Move the air barrier to the right. 38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 48 Using the same method used previously.

Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. 52 In the Type Selector. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. and click . click Detail Component. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. 53 On the Options Bar. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. leaving the detail component lines. select Chain. 55 Click Modify. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 317 .

67 In the Type Selector. 63 In the drawing area. select Invisible Lines. click Load into Projects.rfa. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. in the Type Selector. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 61 In the drawing area. Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 50 x 200 Framing. and assign it keynote 07260. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.A4. select m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select the component.rfa. click Detail Component.58 Using the method used previously. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents. 60 On the Design Bar. Air Barrier. and Vapor Barrier. 68 In the drawing area. 318 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Keynote ➤ Element. name the component Vapor Barrier.

The database file opens in a text editor. and press TAB. Modifying a Keynote Database on page 319. and assign it keynote 07210. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer. click Browse. Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture.A9. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. and click ..txt. add a keynote for the component. Modifying a Keynote Database | 319 . and press TAB. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. under Keynote Table. 72 Save the file. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.69 Select the component. and press ENTER. 73 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 In the text editor.rvt. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. 70 Using the method used previously. Enter 07463. 71 In the drawing area. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Enter 07460. and close the text editor. name the component Batt Insul.A4. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. click File menu ➤ Save. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file.A1.

and click to place the note. under Path Type. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. 9 In the drawing area. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. and click OK. 11 Click Modify. The descriptive text for each keynote displays.6 In the Browse for Keynote File dialog. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. select all the keynotes. select Absolute. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. In the Type Selector. After you create a drafting view. click Keynote ➤ Element. and click Open. These details do not update with changes to the building model. Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text. 320 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click to place the leader. you learn how to create a drafted detail.txt. ■ ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar.A1. navigate to 07463. and click OK. 14 Save the file. 13 Click Modify. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Each keynote displays as a simple number. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang).

expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail).Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise.rvt. select 1 : 5.Center to Center is selected. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. verify that Auto . select Black and White. click Training Files. Click Open. 6 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. For Colors. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. enter EPDM Metal Coping. for Scale. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing.dwg. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Training File Use the training file you used in a previous exercise. right-click Drafting 1. Importing a Detail into a Drafting View | 321 . Creating a Reference Callout on page 321. For Positioning. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 7 In the Rename View dialog. The detail that you import is in DWG format. and click OK. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 4 In the Import/Link CAD Formats dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.rvt. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. and click Rename. and click OK. The detail is imported as an import symbol.

and use the callout grips to move the callout head. and click OK. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. for New. click Callout. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. enter Detail . 6 Select the callout.No Reference. and click Properties. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. select Reference other view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Rename. click Edit/New. delete the existing value. 4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). 11 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 In the Rename dialog. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. 322 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. 12 Click OK twice. 5 Click Modify. 3 On the Options Bar.

/Det. and double-click the callout. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all). Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 323 . There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. double-click A105 . 15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 18 Save the file. Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet.Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View on page 323 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise.Elev. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view.No Reference). The callout is updated with the sheet information. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 19 Proceed to the next exercise./Sect.

select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. for Name. 5 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 324 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Region Properties. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. for Name. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. . verify that the scale is 1 : 5. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. 11 In the Name dialog. Board. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 14 Click OK 3 times. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. and click OK. select Gypsum-Plaster. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. enter Header @ Sliding Door. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. enter Gyp. Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

and enter 20. select the left and bottom edges of the region. Draw a rectangle as shown. Select the lower left corner of the 50 x 150 lumber as the start point. click Finish Sketch. select the width dimension. 16 Select the left edge of the region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 325 . Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. 18 While pressing CTRL. 17 Click Modify. and on the Edit toolbar. 20 On the Design Bar. click . click (Draw). select Wide Lines. 19 In the Type Selector.5mm.15 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. (Mirror).

24 Select the mirrored region. 25 Click Modify. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. click Region Properties. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. click Filled Region. . and click OK.23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.Finish. select Wood . Move the cursor up. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. 33 Click OK 3 times. enter Wood . 28 In the Element Properties dialog.Finish. 326 | Chapter 7 Detailing . for Name. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. 30 In the Name dialog. and click above the top of the region as the end point. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern.

click (Rectangle). select Medium Lines. and select the right edge of the wood region. select Medium Lines. Draw a rectangle as shown. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. click Finish Sketch.5mm. in the Type Selector. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150. click (Align). 40 On the Options Bar. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 327 . verify that the thickness is 19mm. click Filled Region. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. click . sketch the new region as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. 39 In the Type Selector.34 Draw the region: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 38 On the Design Bar.

and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). and press ENTER. click 48 Click Modify. enter 10mm. For Offset. Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar.42 On the Design Bar. 328 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). click Finish Sketch. (Align). Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. click Ref Plane. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. For Offset. enter 6mm. and press ENTER. click Filled Region. 47 Click the reference plane. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. 46 On the Tools toolbar.

and click to select the point. Select Chain. and press ENTER. Move the cursor right 25mm. 56 On the Design Bar. and select the bottom horizontal line. and click to select the point. Move the cursor left 25mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. For Offset. click Finish Sketch. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 329 . Move the cursor down 305mm.52 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Click (Draw). 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. 54 On the Tools toolbar. enter 0. click (Trim/Extend). and click to select the point.

enter 3mm. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. 68 Click Modify. click Training Files.2mm.rfa. select Medium Lines. select the height dimension. and press ENTER. 65 On the Options Bar. enter 76. 69 Select the bolt. For Offset. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. 60 Select the left. and press ENTER. 61 Click Modify. TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Load. click Detail Lines. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 330 | Chapter 7 Detailing . top. and right edges of the door panel region. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 62 Select the left detail line. 58 In the Type Selector. 66 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog.Add detail lines for mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component.

click Detail Lines. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar.rfa. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Component. 74 Select the expansion bolt. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 72 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. use the images as a guide. and click Open. 76 In the Type Selector. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150. select Wide Lines. 71 On the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 331 . navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. click Training Files. click Load. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail.70 On the Design Bar.

81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 84 On the Design Bar. (Mirror). select Thin Lines. click Detail Lines. 82 Select the rectangle. 79 In the Type Selector. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown. 332 | Chapter 7 Detailing . and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 85 On the Options Bar. 80 On the Options Bar. 87 Click Modify. click Detail Lines. click .78 On the Design Bar. click .

click Detail Lines. click (Mirror). as shown. 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. select Medium Lines. 92 Select the line. 89 On the Design Bar. 90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line.88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 333 . drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left. and on the Edit toolbar.

97 On the Options Bar. draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. 101 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. and press ENTER. enter 3mm. and click to place the arc as shown. click Detail Lines. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. 103 Add two break lines as shown. 102 In the Type Selector. 95 On the Design Bar. 334 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click . 99 Click Modify. select the length dimension. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left.94 Select the mirrored line on the right.

click Dimension. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2.Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar. and click Modify. 108 In the Type Selector. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. using the Drag Text grip. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. click Dimension. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. 105 In the drawing area. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 335 . 106 Click to place the dimension. 107 On the Design Bar. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 110 Select the dimension line.5mm Arial.

336 | Chapter 7 Detailing . click Dimension.5mmArial. select Replace With Text. under Dimension Value. enter See Schedule. 118 Select Modify to end the command. and enter 175 mm @ Type A. under Dimension Value. 119 Select the topmost of the 3 wall dimensions. Add dimension strings based on the wall type 115 On the Design Bar. Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types. select Replace With Text. and then click the dimension text. and enter Varies. 120 In the Dimension Text dialog.Add dimension overrides to represent different wall types 111 Select the wall dimension. 114 Click OK. for Below. and click the dimension text. 112 In the Dimension Text dialog.2. 113 Under Text Fields. 116 In the Type Selector select Linear Dimension Style: Detail Linear . 117 Click to place additional dimensions on the wall as shown.

122 Repeat this process for the next 2 dimensions: ■ ■ Enter 200 mm @ Type B. Add text notes to complete the detail 124 On the Design Bar. Board. select the gypsum board region on the left. 127 Enter Gyp. 125 In the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader). 126 In the drawing area. click Text. 129 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click Modify.121 Click OK. click to create an arced leader. and click to place the text. 130 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. Enter 225 mm @ Type C. 123 Click OK. 128 Select the note. and on the Options Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 337 .

338 | Chapter 7 Detailing . 132 Save the file. click Modify to end the command.131 On the Design Bar.

Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Finishing the Sheets 8 In this tutorial. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). click Training Files. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. including: ■ ■ ■ Creating a note block that contains typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources (images and text) from other applications into project sheets ■ ■ Using Note Blocks In this lesson. and double-click East.rvt. 339 . and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the note text.

4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. click Training Files.rfa. 5 On the Options Bar. for Number of Leaders. 8 Select the keynote.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. type 1. and drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. click Symbol. 340 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .Hexagon. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Modify. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project.

click (Element Properties). Creating a Note Block | 341 . for Text. on the Options Bar. click (Copy). type Seal existing doors and insulate. and click OK. under Identity Data. 13 Select the tag. and click above the tag to place the copy. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. 12 On the Edit toolbar.

make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building.14 With the copy selected. and click. 18 Using the same method. click Copy. 15 For Text. on the Options Bar. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. type B. 16 For Tag. 17 Click OK. click (Element Properties). and on the Options Bar. 19 With the tag selected. type Repair existing door surround. 342 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . on the Edit toolbar. (Mirror). clear 20 To create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements.

continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B Text Seal existing doors and insulate. Repair existing door surround. Clean exterior brick wall. and moving counter-clockwise. Tuckpoint as required. Repair as required. using the table as a reference. C D E F G Creating a Note Block | 343 . Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation.21 On the Design Bar. Clean existing concrete loading dock. 22 Optionally. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Remove all existing windows. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. click Modify. Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required.

select Tag. 29 In the Project Browser. and click Add. The Exterior Construction Notes block displays.Elevations. and click Add. for the value. for Note block name. 30 Click to place the block in the upper left corner of the sheet. 28 In the Project Browser. and double-click A103 . 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. and click OK. expand Sheets (all). type 6 mm. select Tag. On the Formatting tab. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. select Center. and drag it to the sheet. for Header text. Create. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and for Alignment. type Mark. 26 Click OK. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. Clean cut and repair wall as required. expand Schedules/Quantities. verify that Arial is selected. and select Bold.Tag H Text Saw cut existing brick wall. under Available fields. select Exterior Construction Notes. for Sort by. for Heading. Select Text. 344 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . On the Appearance tab. type Description. format. type Exterior Construction Notes. 27 In the column header (text).

Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. double-click T . 1 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project.rvt.rvt. click Modify.31 On the Design Bar. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 33 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 32 Zoom in to see the note block.Title Sheet. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. Using Drawing Lists | 345 .

for Filter by. type T. in the first field. select Sheet Number. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. change Drawing List to Sheet Index. 7 In the Project Browser. and drag it to the sheet. in the second field. On the Filter tab. 346 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and expand the right column to accommodate the text. ■ 4 Click OK. for Sort by. select Sheet Number. The drawing list displays. Select Sheet Name. under Available fields. under Sheets (all). 5 In the list title field. 8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower right corner. and in the third field.Title Sheet. expand Schedules/Quantities. select does not equal. select Sheet Index. and click Add. and click Add. select Sheet Number. double-click T . 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab.2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List. 6 In the Project Browser.

you use a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. windows. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. doors. 11 Save the file. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. For the text. Annotation legends are made up of components (such as section markers and door tags) that are paired with text that identifies them. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. Finally. and so on). door frame schedule. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends.9 On the Design Bar. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. and door frames. On construction documents. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Training File Using Legends | 347 . you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it. On construction documents. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. click Modify.

2 In the New Legend View dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector. 6 On the Options Bar. 10 For Text Size. Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Text. for Name. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. type 3mm. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. 9 For Text Font. click Symbol. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a text type with the necessary size. You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties.Open Level Head . click Edit/New. type Typical Symbol Legend.rvt. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Custom-Section Head: Section Head . and click OK. click Duplicate. select Arial. 348 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . and click OK. for Name. type Legend Text. click .Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. and click OK twice.

Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Sheets (all). and for Leader. and double-click A101 . Creating a Symbol Legend | 349 . drag it to the lower right corner of the sheet.Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. expand Legends. 16 In the Project Browser. 13 Type Detail Callout for the text note. 12 Click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. click Typical Symbol Legend. 14 Working from the top down. and click to place it. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. type the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 15 In the Project Browser. verify that is selected.

17 In the Type Selector. double-click A102 . under Sheets. 23 Save the file. 21 In the Type Selector. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 On the Design Bar. 20 Drag Typical Symbol Legend to the lower right corner of the sheet.Unit 18. click Modify. click Modify. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. 350 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 22 On the Design Bar. The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. select Viewport : No Titlemark. and click to place it. select Viewport : No Titlemark.

6 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. select Medium for Detail Level.Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. For Host length. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click Legend Component. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. 5 On the View Control Bar. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select 1 : 50. 3 For Scale. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. type 900 mm. and click OK. for Name. Create a legend view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Legend. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Creating a Component Legend | 351 . You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Section. type 4th Floor Wall Types. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. For View.rvt. and press ENTER.

Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and type Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall. 352 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. for Leader. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text. 12 In the Type Selector. click Text. for Family.9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 Select the second wall. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. and type Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. and on the Options Bar. click to add text without a leader.

24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point.Add text to the legend 16 On the Options Bar. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The text note with leader is added to the legend. right-click Sheets (all). select Level 4. 23 In the Project Browser. and click New Sheet. Creating a Component Legend | 353 . and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. 19 Type the following text. 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. under Floor Plans. click to add text with a single-segment leader.

28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. 29 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. select 4th Floor Wall Types.25 In the Project Browser. under Legends. double-click Level 4. and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 354 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . click Modify to end the command. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. under Floor Plans. allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing. The open drawings are both visible. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types.

Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. click (Match Type). 34 Select the patio divider wall. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. Creating a Component Legend | 355 . select Detail Level: Medium. The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. 33 In the floor plan view. select the Wall Type 2 component.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar. zoom to the lower right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. 35 On the View Control Bar.

you open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.36 Optionally. In this exercise. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. under Floor Plans. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. or changes in building material availability. unanticipated changes in construction conditions. you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. click 37 Save the file.rvt. if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. contractor inquiries. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. You can create a sequence of revisions. These changes can be due to owner requests. Using the table. 356 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . double-click Level 4. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

the revision is locked and issued to the field. Setting Up a Revision Table | 357 . verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. When you use this option. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. for Numbering. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. If Visible is not selected. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared.2 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. When Issued is selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. Add a revision to the project 4 For Date. if the active revision is number 1. 5 For Description. For example. type Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. In general. In most instances. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. type a date. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. 7 Under Show. 3 On the right side of the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog. verify that Per Project is selected. yet as concise as possible. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. If you select Per Sheet.

and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. 4 On the Edit toolbar. 5 Select the divider. click (Move). 6 On the Design Bar. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. double-click Level 4.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 9 Save the file. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. move the cursor up. 3 Select the divider. Revision clouds have read-only properties. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. you make changes to the project floor plan. including revision number and revision date. click Modify. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. 358 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets .8 Click OK.

Sketching Revision Clouds | 359 . NOTE To turn off snaps when drawing a revision cloud. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. and click OK. 8 In the drawing area. select Snaps Off. In the Snaps dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. click Revision Cloud. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition. click Finish Sketch.Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

14 In the Object Styles dialog. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. you load a revision tag into the project. click the Annotation Objects tab. for Line Weight. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise. select 6. Training File 360 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. 16 Click OK. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. 17 Save the file.

12 Save the file. 6 Click Load. 4 On the Options Bar. You then issue a revision. you need to add one. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 5 In the Tags dialog. click Tag ➤ By Category. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. If the cursor is just inside the cloud. click Tags.rfa. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. scroll down to Revision Clouds. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you view a sheet on which you place a revised view. the cloud is tagged as number 1. click OK. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. 11 Click to place the tag. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser. select Leader. Because you chose to number by project. double-click Level 4. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left.rvt. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. under Floor Plans. click Training Files. 10 In the drawing area. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. 8 In the Tags dialog. Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds. Training File Working with Revisions | 361 .Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Working with Revisions In this exercise.

with the description Relocate Door. select Issued. and click OK. type Modify Paving Area. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 7 For Description. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. under Sheets. double-click A107 . you prevent further changes to the revision. You can continue to add revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. Issue a revision 3 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. You do this by issuing the revision. click Add. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. and enter a date.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 Zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock. and enter a date for the revision. View the revision schedule on a sheet 1 In the Project Browser. Create additional revisions 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. 8 Add another revision row.rvt.Unnamed. you can no longer modify it. A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. 362 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 9 Click OK. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. NOTE After you issue a revision. 6 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog.

Relocate Door to the revision cloud. click to add a revision clouds.Modify Paving Area. under Sheets (all). 16 Add another revision cloud as shown. 10 In the Project Browser.Change revision scheme from numeric to alphabetic You place the new revisions on a sheet. 11 On the Drafting tab. for Revision. 21 Zoom in to the revision schedule in the titleblock. select Revision Cloud. select Seq. select the revision cloud. Tag the revision clouds 18 On the Drafting tab. 13 Click Finish Sketch. 17 Using the same method learned previously. double-click Level 4. 3 . and then specify the revision table sequence to alphabetic. Working with Revisions | 363 . 12 In the drawing area. 19 To add tags. double-click A107 . under Floor Plans. click outside each of the two revision clouds you just drew. select Tag ➤ By Category. Information for all tagged revisions displays in the schedule. 15 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Project Browser. Apply revisions to revision clouds 14 In the drawing area.Unnamed. in the drawing area. 2 . apply Seq.

You do this so that the revision can be changed. Click Options. select the titleblock. 23 In the Sheet Issues/Revisions dialog: ■ For Sequence 1. for Sequence. 364 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . ■ ■ 24 In the Sequence Options dialog. The revision schedule now uses alphabetic characters. 25 Click OK twice. 26 In the drawing area. delete the first 3 characters. You want to change the numbering value from numeric to alphabetic for all sequences. You can modify the sequence of characters used for the alphabetic numbering scheme. you edit the titleblock family. For each revision. for Numbering. and rotation) to the revision schedule. Edit the titleblock family The revision schedule is part of the titleblock family. beginning with "D".Change the sequencing of revision to use alpha characters 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Revisions. select Alphabetic. In order to make formatting changes (appearance. height. clear Issued.

for Appearance. Working with Revisions | 365 . under Other. and drag it above the schedule area. 37 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. 33 Select the schedule header. select Bottom-up. 28 In the alert dialog. Reload the titleblock family into the project Because you changed the titleblock family. click Load into Projects. for Build Schedule. on the Appearance tab: ■ ■ Under Graphics. expand Views (all) ➤ Schedules. all sheets that use this titleblock in the project will be affected. Relocate revision schedule You relocate the revision schedule to the bottom of the revision area. click Modify. and click Properties. Grid lines will now be dynamically added as the revision schedule is built. Select Outline. Clear Blank row before data. 34 On the Design Bar. Modify the revision schedule properties 29 In the Project Browser. 36 Drag the header to the bottom of the revision schedule area. right-click Revision Schedule. click Edit. and press DELETE. 38 In the Reload Family dialog. and delete the schedule lines because the table will be dynamically built. and select Wide Lines for the outline type. 35 Select the existing schedule lines. Select Grid lines. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit Family. ■ ■ 32 Click OK twice.27 On the Options Bar. and then zoom in to the revision schedule. 31 In the Revision Properties dialog. click Yes.

under Other. and on the Options Bar. for Rotation on Sheet. 44 On the Formatting tab of the Revision Properties dialog. When the height property is variable. Rotate revision schedule to display it vertically 39 Using the same method learned previously. select User defined. for Heading. for Formatting.. enter Rev. Use grip editing to resize the revision schedule 47 In the drawing area. 46 Click OK twice.The revision schedule is now shown in a bottom-up format. 45 On the Appearance tab. With a user-defined height. and the most current revisions display in the available rows. right-click Revision Schedule. 48 Click the circular grip and drag it so that the schedule fills the revision area. Modify the properties of the revision schedule 42 In the Project Browser. for Height. 366 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . the schedule is restricted to a specific size. and click Properties. select 90° Counterclockwise. 41 Drag the header to the right side of the titleblock. 43 In the Element Properties dialog. open the titleblock family for editing. select the revision schedule. 40 Select the revision schedule header. the schedule continues to add rows as revisions are created. click Edit.

Importing from Other Applications | 367 . and spreadsheets) from other applications into a project. text. click Load into Projects. 51 Save the file. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson. 50 In the Reload Family dialog. The modified revision schedule displays on the project sheet.Load revised schedule into the project 49 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Yes. you learn to import information (such as images.

6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 5 On the Design Bar. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. under Sheets. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. click to add text without a leader. and place it on a sheet. Importing Text Documents In this exercise. for Leader.Title Sheet.Importing Image Files In this exercise. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Text.rvt. 3 On the Options Bar.Title Sheet.JPG. click Modify. double-click T . click Training Files. double-click T . you import a logo image in JPG format into a project. 368 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. under Sheets. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress.

click Modify. 11 Save the file. with the new text box still selected. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. NOTE Some formatting may be required after the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. 6 Select the text. 9 On the Design Bar.Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text. Training File Importing Spreadsheets | 369 . Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy.doc text file in another window. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.

click File menu ➤ Print. double-click A102 . 12 Save the file.JPG. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. 1 In the Project Browser. and saved as Fixture Schedule.JPG. 3 In Microsoft Excel. click Desktop. 370 | Chapter 8 Finishing the Sheets . 8 In the left pane of the Import Image dialog. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. This exercise demonstrates a common method. and click Save.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. 6 In the left pane of the Save the file as dialog. 5 Click OK. click Modify. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. This step has been completed for you.mdi. for File name. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures.xls.Unit 18. under Sheets. This process may vary from system to system. you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet.rvt. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. click Training Files. 10 On the Design Bar. for Name. type Fixture Schedule. select the document writer. 4 Under Printer. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet.

called dependent views. as well as a large lab building. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. you break up the plan into sections. 371 . for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 9 In this tutorial. The large floor plan. or footprint. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site.

Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes. 372 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .

Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. click Training Files. you ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation ■ ■ Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt Using Dependent Views in Documentation | 373 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.

Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 374 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . and click OK. 5 Click in the drawing area. and the model crop is the interior crop region. The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. 2 In the Project Browser. for Name. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 3 In the Project Browser. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. under Level 2. under Floor Plans. The dependent view opens. 6 In the drawing area. and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. enter Level 2 . double-click Level 2. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. click Zoom To Fit. select the crop region.Aviary.

Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 375 . click (Hide Crop Region). 9 On the View Control Bar.8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary).

17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. right-click Level 2. right-click Dependent on Level 2. and on the Zoom flyout. and click Rename. enter Level 2 . 15 Select the crop region. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 13 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 11 In the Project Browser.Labs. for Name. 376 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 14 Click in the drawing area.10 Click in the drawing area. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). click Zoom To Fit.

click Zoom To Fit.) Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 377 . (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. under Floor Plans. Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split for dependent views. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. click Matchline. click Modify. and on the Zoom flyout. 20 Click in the drawing area.The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the Design Bar.

378 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views .■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 24 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. Click above the left corner of the lab building.

and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Under Matchline.Unnamed. 28 For Line Pattern. for Line Weight. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. expand Sheets. for Name. select Double Dash. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. right-click A101 . Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 379 .25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click Level 2 . Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.Aviary. enter Level 2 Aviary. and click OK. click the Annotation Objects tab. select 9. 33 In the Project Browser. 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog.

Labs dependent view on the sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 . 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline.35 On the Design Bar. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. 38 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Aviary is selected. double-click Level 2. click View Reference. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet. for Target view. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views. under Floor Plans. and place the Level 2 . click Modify. 380 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . 39 On the Options Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs.

45 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 41 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click Zoom To Fit.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline. for Target view. 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 381 . 42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline.

Aviary. double-click Level 2 . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. click (Show Crop Region).46 In the Project Browser. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. under Floor Plans. 382 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click. 48 Select the crop region. 47 On the View Control Bar. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. 49 If. click the far right control.

you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. 54 In the Project Browser. click Apply dependent view settings to other plans (Hide Crop Region). 51 On the View Control Bar. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view. expand Level 1. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. right-click Level 2. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view. and click OK. but are not placed on sheets. under Floor Plans. 55 On the Zoom flyout.50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). 52 In the Project Browser. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 383 . click Zoom To Fit. 53 In the Select Views dialog. New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. select all views in the list. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. and click Apply Dependent Views.

click Zoom To Fit. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Dependent_Views. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. and double-click South Elevation.57 On the Zoom flyout. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 384 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views . right-click South Elevation. The matchline is already placed in the view. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

and click OK. 4 In the Rename View dialog. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. for Name. 5 In the drawing area. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. and click Rename. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. expand South Elevation. 10 In the Rename View dialog. for Name.Right. select the Crop Region. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 385 . enter South Elevation . 8 In the Project Browser.Left. 11 Select the crop region. 3 In the Project Browser. 7 On the View Control Bar. enter South Elevation . and click OK. and drag it toward the center of the drawing.The dependent view opens. 9 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. cropping the view to the aviary. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. and drag it toward the center of the view. click (Hide Crop Region). 6 Select the inside crop region control on the right.

13 On the View Control Bar, click

(Hide Crop Region).

Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog, click OK to accept the default titleblock. 16 In the Project Browser, under Sheets, right-click A103 Unnamed, and click Rename. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog, for Name, enter South Elevation, and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Left, and drag it onto the sheet. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet.

20 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, click South Elevation - Right, and drag it onto the sheet. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet.

386 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 23 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click South Elevation. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar, click View Reference. 25 On the Options Bar, for Target view, verify that Elevation: South Elevation - Left is selected. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline.

28 On the Options Bar, for Target view, select Elevation: South Elevation - Right. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline.

Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 387

30 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 31 In the Project Browser, under Sheets (all), double-click A103 - South Elevation. NOTE If the view references are not visible, you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet. Right-click the view, and click Activate View. Select the crop region, and use the annotation crop controls to modify it.

388 | Chapter 9 Using Dependent Views

Viewing and Rendering

389

390

Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

10

In this tutorial, you learn to use the rendering features in Revit Architecture 2009 to create rendered interior and exterior views of a building information model. You also learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of a model.

Rendering an Exterior View
In this lesson, you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a pool house building model and create rendered images for daytime and nighttime lighting.
Daytime rendering of the pool house

391

Nighttime rendering of the pool house

You learn to create and apply materials to the building model, add trees to the building site, and create the perspective view that you want to render. After you create the perspective view, you specify options that define the model environment, and then render a final exterior view.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model
In this exercise, you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. You also learn how to create a new material and apply it to a building component. You work with a building model that already has materials applied to it.

In this exercise, you:
■ ■ ■

change the render appearance of the wood material applied to the exterior screen wall of the pool house. change the material of the pad of the pool house from the default material to concrete. define a new black anodized aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions of the pool house wall.

When you complete these changes, you render a region of the building that includes the exterior wall, the pad, and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes.

392 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

Training File
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Pool_House.rvt.

View the finish material of the screen wall 1 Verify that the 3D view of the pool house is displayed.

2 Zoom in to the wall of the house near the pool.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 393

3 In the drawing area, select the wooden screen wall, and on the Options Bar, click Properties).

(Element

You check the construction of the screen walls to determine the material assigned to the wall, so you can change the render appearance for the material.

4 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 5 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 6 In the Edit Assembly dialog, verify that the material for Structure [1] is Wood - Teak, Solid. 7 Click OK 3 times. Change the render appearance of the wood material 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. The Wood - Teak, Solid material is currently a light stained teak. The design calls for the use of a dark stained, satin-finished teak. 9 In the Materials dialog, for Materials, select Wood - Teak, Solid. 10 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace.

394 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

11 In the Render Appearance Library dialog, click Wood Teak Stained Dark Medium Gloss, and click OK. You do not want the medium gloss finish, but it is the closest material to what you want. You make modifications to the settings for this material to more closely match the desired finish. 12 On the Render Appearance tab of the Materials dialog, for Finish, select Satin Varnish. 13 Click Update Preview, and click OK. The Update Preview option provides a real time rendering of the changes to the material. It can be used for visual feedback to see if the setting produces the desired results. Change the material of the pad from the default material to concrete 14 In the drawing area, select the pad, and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

The material assignment for the pad is currently set to By Category, which is using a default material. You change the material assignment to use a concrete with a straight broom finish.

15 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 16 Under Construction, for Structure, click Edit. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog, for the Structure [1] Material value, click <By Category>, and click . 18 In the Materials dialog, select Concrete - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 19 On the Render Appearance tab, for Finish, select Broom Straight, and click Update Preview. 20 Click the Graphics tab, and review the material patterns. 21 Click OK 4 times. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 395

Define a new material and apply it to the mullions 23 Zoom in to view the curtain wall mullions.

24 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. You create a black anodized aluminum material, and apply it to the mullions of the pool house wall. 25 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum. You use an existing material as a template to create the black anodized aluminum material. 26 At the bottom left corner of the Materials dialog, click (Duplicate).

27 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog, for Name, enter Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black, and click OK. 28 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, select Use Render Appearance for Shading. By selecting this option, the color used for this material in shaded views is an average color defined by the render appearance. 29 On the Render Appearance tab, click Replace. 30 In the Render Appearance Library, click Aluminum Anodized Black, and click OK. 31 On the Graphics tab of the Materials dialog, review the material appearance (color and pattern), and click OK.

396 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

32 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. The mullions and frame for the wall are defined as By Category. You change the material used by the curtain wall mullion category. 33 In the Object Styles dialog, for Curtain Wall Mullions, select the Material value, and click 34 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Aluminum, Anodized - Black. 35 Click OK twice. .

36 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

Render a region of the model to view the material changes 37 On the View Control Bar, click 39 Select the rendering crop boundary. (Show Rendering Dialog).

38 At the top of the Rendering dialog, select Region.

Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 397

40 Adjust the extents of the region by dragging the borders in tight around the areas where the materials changed (pool house screen, mullions, and pad). NOTE The smaller the region, the faster the image renders. It is a good practice to define a precise render region until you are ready to create the final rendered image.

41 Zoom in to the region in order to see the results of the rendering test more clearly.

398 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

42 Specify options in the Rendering dialog:

Under Quality, for Setting, select Medium. Several quality settings are available. The higher the quality, the longer the rendering process will take. Refer to the Revit Architecture Online Help for best practices for optimizing quality and output settings. Under Lighting, for Scheme, select Exterior: Sun only. For Sun, select Sunlight from top left.

■ ■

43 Click Render. The Rendering Progress dialog displays, providing information on the status and duration of the rendering process.

44 To display the building model, after the rendering process completes, on the Rendering dialog, under Display, click Show the model. 45 Close the Rendering dialog. 46 Click File menu ➤ Save, and save the project as c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. 47 Proceed to the next exercise, Adding Trees to the Site on page 399.

Adding Trees to the Site
In this exercise, you place trees and shrubs on the building site in order to provide a more realistic context for rendering the project.

Adding Trees to the Site | 399

In a later exercise, when you render an exterior view of the model, the RPC model is used in the rendering. NOTE For simplicity, imperial components and units are used in this lesson. Specific types and sizes of trees are referenced in the steps, but any type and size can be used. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise, c_Pool_House_in_progress.rvt. Add shrubs and trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (all), expand Floor Plans, and double-click Site.

2 Zoom in so you can easily view the area surrounding the pool house and walkway.

400 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar, click Site Component. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Site. 4 In the Type Selector, select RPC Shrub : Yew 2'-4''. NOTE If planting families are not loaded into a project, they can be loaded from the Content Library. See Loading Families in the Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. 5 Place 4 shrubs to the right of the patio, near the walkway, as shown. (Exact placement is not important.)

6 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Red Maple - 30', and place 2 trees in the project, similar to the locations shown.

Adding Trees to the Site | 401

7 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Scarlet Oak - 42', and place a tree to the left of the pool house between the 2 maple trees.

Create a tree type and add it to the site 8 In the Type Selector, select RPC Tree - Deciduous : Honey Locust - 25', and on the Options Bar, click (Element Properties).

9 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. You change the size of the existing Honey Locust tree family. 10 In the Type Properties dialog, click Rename. 11 In the Rename dialog, for New, enter Honey Locust - 18', and click OK. 12 In the Type Properties dialog, for Height, enter 18'. 13 Click OK twice. 14 Click in the drawing area to the right of the pool house to place the tree.

402 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs

you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. Creating a Perspective View on page 403. click Modify. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Perspective View | 403 . 17 Proceed to the next exercise.15 On the Design Bar.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. ■ Exact placement is not important because you modify the view as required.rvt. click Camera. Place a camera in the site view 1 With the Site view open. The perspective view displays. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Specify the second point in the upper left corner of the pool house to define the target point of the camera. c_Pool_House_in_progress. 404 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ Specify the first point along the curve of the walkway facing the pool house to position the camera.

3 Zoom out. double-click Site. in the Project Browser. If the camera is not shown in the view. and click Show Camera. right-click 3D View 1. Creating a Perspective View | 405 . With the camera shown. The camera can also be moved along the walkway to get the desired perspective view. as necessary. under Floor Plans. the back wall of the yard may be cut off. and adjust the field of vision. Depending on camera placement. Adjust the back clipping plane so that it is beyond the wall in the yard. Adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane 5 In the Project Browser. as shown. 4 Adjust the crop boundary to display the entire building and some of the pool in the foreground. and select the crop boundary. the triangle that represents the field of vision can be adjusted.

double-click Exterior . and click OK. 9 Zoom to fit the perspective view in the window. under 3D Views. 406 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . and click Rename. Creating the Exterior Rendering on page 407. 7 In the Rename View dialog. enter Exterior .Day to open the view. right-click 3D View 1.6 In the Project Browser.Day. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 In the Project Browser. and make any final adjustments to the crop boundary to improve image composition. 10 Save the file.

and render a daytime view of the exterior. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 407 .Day.rvt. You then duplicate the view. double-click Exterior . under 3D Views. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. modify render settings. and create lighting groups for a nighttime view of the exterior. c_Pool_House_in_progress.Creating the Exterior Rendering In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you specify the time and location settings for the rendering.

enter Spring Equinox . export the resulting image in PNG or TIFF format. select Medium. 6 Click OK twice. under Background. You create a location and time for the rendering.Santa Monica. 8 Under Quality. and click Render. 7 In the Rendering dialog. select Spring Equinox. select Edit/New. For information on how the rendering/sun relates to the location settings. 3pm. In this case. for Setting. You adjust cloud settings as required. 4 On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.Specify rendering settings for a daytime view 2 On the View Control Bar. see Re-orienting the Project on page 447. The PNG and TIFF formats place the chosen background on an alpha channel for easier manipulation during photoediting. NOTE If a background image is required. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 408 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 5 In the Rename dialog. select Sky: Cloudy. the sky will be a procedural sky based on cloud settings and time of day. and click Rename. 3 In the Rendering dialog. under Lighting. for Sun. for New.

select Portable Network Graphics (*. Creating the Exterior Rendering | 409 . click Desktop. Export the rendered image to an external file 11 In the Rendering dialog. click Export.png). 12 In the Save Image dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane.9 In the Rendering dialog. After the image is rendered. For Files of type. click Show the model. click Show the rendering. Click Save. The image file is saved to the Desktop for later reference. 10 In the Rendering dialog. you can switch between the rendered view and the model view as long as the Revit Architecture session is open. 13 Close the Rendering dialog.

press and hold SHIFT.120V to the Pool Lights group. under Ungrouped Lights. 24 In the New Light Group dialog. Lighting groups allow greater control over lighting schemes used in renderings.Flat Round : 60W . 21 In the Light Groups dialog. on the View Control Bar. and click OK. 19 In the New Light Group dialog. under Group Options.120V through 35 :Sconce Light . Create lighting groups 18 In the Artificial Lights . 16 With the Exterior . under Ungrouped Lights.120V. enter Pool House Lights.Night. select the first light. 22 Using the same method. and click OK. 27 In the Rendering dialog. and click OK.Day view to Exterior . under Group Options. for Name. 23 In the Artificial Lights dialog.Night. 25 Using the same method. highlight 9 :Sconce Light .Day. under 3D Views. To create a similar view using different rendering settings. dialog.Flat Round : 60W . 20 In the Artificial Lights dialog. 26 In the Artificial Lights dialog. enter Pool Lights. and select the last light. under Lighting. click New. you duplicate the view and change the settings. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Name. 410 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . add 30 :Sconce Light . You change the rendering settings to create a nighttime rendering of the same view. To select a sequential list.120V through 14 :Sconce Light . 15 Rename the Copy of Exterior .Specify rendering settings for a nighttime view 14 In the Project Browser. (Show Rendering 17 In the Rendering dialog. for Scheme. add 16 :Light Fixture through 29 :Light Fixture to the Pool House Lights group.Flat Round : 60W . select Exterior: Artificial only. click New. verify that Pool Lights is selected. and click Artificial Lights. click OK. right-click Exterior .Flat Round : 60W . click Dialog).Exterior .Night view open. and click Move to Group. click Render.

After the image is rendered. Rendering an Interior View | 411 . 31 Close the Rendering dialog. In this example. for Exposure Value. 29 In the Exposure Control dialog. click Show the model. 30 In the Rendering dialog. under Image. Settings can be changed at any time within the Revit Architecture session. you create a nighttime and a daytime rendering of the interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. the exposure can be modified to improve the output. you change the brightness of the exposure. and click OK. but the other settings can be modified as well to control the final rendering. enter 4. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. 32 Save the file.Adjust the exposure 28 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. and then switch between the views by clicking Show the rendering. Rendering an Interior View on page 411.

define the perspective view and rendering settings. and finally. you add ArchVision® realpeople (RPC content) to the interior of the pool house. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.Draft nighttime rendering of the interior High quality daytime rendering of the interior To create the rendered view. Adding RPC People In this exercise.rvt. 412 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . RPC people are represented by a 2D symbol in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. c_Pool_House_in_progress. you add an RPC person to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. render the views.

the person’s line of sight. 5 On the Design Bar. double-click Level 1. click Component. ■ (Rotate). click 7 Rotate the figure: The pointed portion of the symbol represents the front of the figure. select RPC Female : YinYin.Add an RPC figure to the view 1 In the Project Browser. but place the figure close to the front of the vanity so that her reflection displays in the mirror after the scene is rendered. and place the component inside the pool house. Adding RPC People | 413 . 2 Zoom in to the pool house. click Modify. Click to set the rotate start point at the line of sight. and on the Edit toolbar. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 6 Select the figure. Exact placement is not important. 4 In the Type Selector.

■ Rotate clockwise about 20 degrees. By default. the reflection of RPC content is turned off in order to enhance rendering performance. select Cast Reflections. the reflective properties must be turned on for the family type. on the Options Bar. 12 Click OK 3 times. click Edit/New. click (Element Properties). under Identity Data. you can enable this option. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. under Parameters. 14 Save the file. click Edit. for Render Appearance Properties. 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 11 In the Render Appearance Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. and click so that the figure is angled toward the vanity. 414 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In order to see the figure’s reflection. Enable reflective properties for RPC content 8 With the RPC figure selected. If reflections of RPC content are important to the rendering.

15 Proceed to the next exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. You place a camera into the view to create an interior perspective. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. You define the interior perspective by placing a camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ ■ Click inside the lower right corner of the pool house to place the camera. Click outside of the pool house to the left to place the target point. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 415 . you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Exact placement is not important because you will adjust the crop boundary of the view in later steps. click Camera. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise. and using a section box to limit the geometry included in the rendering process. Creating the Interior Perspective View on page 415. c_Pool_House_in_progress.

under 3D Views. select Section Box. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Properties. and click OK. right-click 3D View 1. You can use a section box to limit the geometry included in a rendering. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 3 Zoom to fit the view in the window. 6 Zoom out so that you can see the selection box.The perspective view displays. 416 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . under Extents.

you display an elevation/section view and a plan view. 10 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. select the section box. double-click South. under Floor Plans. 9 In the Project Browser. 11 In the 3D view. 8 In the Project Browser. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 417 . In order to accurately adjust the section box. double-click Level 1. under Elevations (Building Elevations). in addition to the 3D view.7 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows.

12 In the floor plan view. 418 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 13 In the South Elevation view. select the section box. size the box as shown. size the box as shown. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. right-click. 14 In the 3D view.

you define daylight portals for the glazed panels of the curtain wall. Daylight portals improve the quality of light that shines through windows. and curtain walls. Training File Creating the Interior Rendering | 419 . 16 Zoom to fit the view in the window. doors that contain windows or glass. and render the interior view. and adjust the crop boundary to match the illustration. you define artificial lighting and render a nighttime view of the interior. To create a daytime view. Creating the Interior Rendering In this exercise.15 Maximize the 3D view. Creating the Interior Rendering on page 419. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. 17 Save the file.

2 In the Rename View dialog. for Scheme. Define lighting for a nighttime view 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Rendering dialog. enter Interior . 420 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . You can specify a lower quality. under 3D Views. 7 Under Quality.Night.Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. The Interior: Artificial only option defines a baseline for the exposure and other settings for an interior rendering without daylight. After these settings are established. for Setting. click (Show Rendering Dialog). click Render. and click Rename. These settings can be adjusted after the rendering is complete using the Adjust Exposure option. and click OK. 6 In the Artificial Lights dialog. select Interior: Artificial only. 4 In the Rendering dialog. select Draft. Because the exterior pool lights will not have an effect on this rendering. the view can be rendered at a higher quality level. clear Pool Lights. you turn them off for this scene. under Lighting.rvt. c_Pool_House_in_progress. and render the view to check lighting levels and material selections. right-click 3D View 1. 5 Click Artificial Lights. 3 On the View Control Bar. Using light controls and lighting groups can help to define multiple lighting conditions for views. and click OK.

9 Close the Rendering dialog. By default they are turned off. The daylight portals help to further refine this daylight into a more realistic rendered effect. Specify rendering settings 12 On the View Control Bar. select Spring Equinox .Night. This process must be repeated if you want to use custom settings in other views. 3pm. select Edit. see the Revit Architecture Online Help. click 14 For Setting. You can duplicate the view for each lighting condition/time of day you want to render. and click OK. select Interior: Sun only. but the space will receive standard daylighting. in order to turn on daylight portals. The preset schemes are read-only. For sunlit interiors. You create a view for the interior during the day.Santa Monica. (Show Rendering Dialog). Creating the Interior Rendering | 421 .Day. 17 In the Rendering dialog. click Copy To Custom. 13 In the Rendering dialog. You have to copy a preset scheme to your custom settings in order to make changes. Create an interior day view 10 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 Rename the copied view to Interior . In this case. you must create a custom setting. For more information on daylight portals. select Region. for Daylight Portal Options. select Curtain Walls. the daylight portals can be turned on. for Scheme. 16 Scroll to the bottom of the dialog. NOTE The custom setting is only applied to this view. IMPORTANT Enabling daylight portals can drastically increase rendering times. 15 In the Render Quality Settings dialog. and click Render. for Sun. right-click Interior .

under Image. (Element 422 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . For Saturation. and close the Rendering dialog. View the properties of the column and note that the assigned material is Wood. click Show the model. click Properties). In the next steps. enter 1.18 In the Rendering dialog. click Adjust Exposure. select the column on the right. Modify the column material 21 In the drawing area. and on the Options Bar. enter 10. Click OK. 19 In the Exposure Control dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Exposure Value. you adjust the material of the column to improve the effect. Notice that the speckling on the wooden column in the foreground is reflecting too much light. 20 In the Rendering dialog.

For Width. select Unfinished. 32 In the Rendering dialog. The rendered output can be set to a printed ratio and the printed size of the output as well as the DPI for the image can be controlled. select Wood. Click OK. select Printer. After you use the test renderings to verify that you made the correct lighting and material selection. select Scale (locked proportions). for Resolution. click OK. and rotate the material so that the grain of the wood runs vertically along the column. enter 5''. Create a print quality rendering 27 On the View Control Bar. enter 90. for Setting. 31 In the Crop Region Size dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. select the crop boundary. 28 In the Rendering dialog. add a bump map to create texture. under Output Settings. select High. 24 In the Materials dialog. You change the varnish setting. For Rotate. and click Render.6. click Settings menu ➤ Materials.22 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 Click Update Preview. click the dimensions for Size. Creating the Interior Rendering | 423 . 29 In the Rendering dialog. As size and DPI are increased. you can define the output and quality settings for final output. the render time increases significantly. and on the Options Bar. For Amount. 30 In the drawing area. and click OK. 23 With the column still selected. move the slider to the right until the value is approximately 5. select Based on wood grain. click (Show Rendering Dialog). 25 Specify options on the Render Appearance tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Finish. clear Region. For Bump.

you can record it by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player. you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shading 424 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Usually. You learned to create perspective views suitable for rendering and to modify rendering options in order to optimize the final output. elevation.The rendered image displays. independent of the Revit Architecture software. you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough. or section view. but you can also define it in a 3D. In a plan view. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. which is the path that a camera will follow through the building model. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. 33 Close the exercise file with or without saving. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. you rendered an exterior and an interior view. The walkthrough path is a spline. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2009. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. The file can now be exported or saved to the Revit project. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view.

and click the tab in the context menu. click Walkthrough. verify that Perspective is selected. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. click Training Files.rvt. on the Options Bar. 5 Specify 4 additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown. and double-click 1st Floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. and ends in the far corner of the living room. expand Floor Plans. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 To create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. If you prefer to use metric values. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Some imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Creating a Walkthrough | 425 . and change unit formats as desired. and open Common\c_Townhouse. and click to specify the start point (the first key frame) of the walkthrough.■ ■ Shading with Edges Rendering Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Settings ➤ Project Units. expand Views (all). Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. proceeds through the dining room.

Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser. The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and double-click Walkthrough 1. 426 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the Options Bar. click Finish.6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Walkthroughs.

enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. enter 9''. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). 15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. 11 Under Change. verify that Field of view is selected. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of a total of 300 frames. enter 16''. Creating a Walkthrough | 427 . 12 On the View menu. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. select the crop boundary. on the Options Bar. click the dimensions for Size.8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. for Frame. and for Height. and click OK. If it is not. for Width. 17 Click . and select the crop boundary. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). and click OK. 13 On the Options Bar. 14 Click . The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 9 To change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. click Edit Walkthrough. enter 1. 16 On the Options Bar.

double-click 1st Floor. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. under Extents.The walkthrough plays. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 2 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. 428 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser. The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Floor Plans. 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. clear Far Clip Active. click Edit Walkthrough. click (Element Properties). Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position on page 428. press ESC. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. c_Townhouse. The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. and click OK.

7 Click the third key frame position. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. for Controls. 6 On the Options Bar. so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 429 . You can move any camera target or key frame position. and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown. Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration. select Path.5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and drag it to the location shown.

5 In the Video Compression dialog. shading. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walkthrough from the location that you specified previously. c_Townhouse. If you are unsure of what option to use. and save the exercise file with a unique name. perhaps to 6'' wide x 4'' height. 1 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Walkthrough. hidden line. 430 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Export Walkthrough dialog. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. for Frames/sec. without opening Revit Architecture 2009. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. 2 In the Length/Format dialog. specifying the number of frames.rvt. for Model Graphics Style. under Output Length. and then click 10 Proceed to the next exercise. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. 9 To play the walkthrough. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise. and click OK. on the Options Bar. enter 15. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. select <Shading>. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 3 Under Format. 8 If you want to save this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. and click OK. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. click Edit Walkthrough. under Walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough on page 430. shading with edges. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. It produces files that are larger than compressed files. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI file. and click Save. click File menu ➤ Save As. reducing the size of the image. . or rendering. for Compressor. double-click Walkthrough 1. When you export the walkthrough. 7 Try creating other walkthroughs. The walkthrough is recorded.

Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. 431 . Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. In this tutorial. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year. Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. More specifically. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define.

click Camera.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. as 432 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click shown. (SteeringWheels). and double-click 01 Entry. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis.Creating a Solar Study . expand Views (all). as shown. expand Floor Plans. A 3D view is created.Courtyard View In this exercise. 4 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to adjust the view. and open Common\c_Solar_Study. click Training Files. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point.

9 On the File menu. if necessary. 7 In the Project Browser. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. click Modify. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Rename. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view. and click OK. enter Solar Study .Courtyard View. right-click 3D View 1. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.5 On the Design Bar. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click Section. you create a section cutaway view. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. as shown. 6 Click the view boundary to select it. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 433 . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View on page 433. 3 On the Design Bar.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. click Save As. double-click 01 Entry. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. expand 3D Views.

click 10 On the View toolbar. click Modify. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. (SteeringWheels). 8 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. 13 On the Design Bar. expand Sections. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. and click Orient to View ➤ Section: Section for Solar Study Cutaway. double-click the section head. 6 To view the section. 11 On the SteeringWheel. right-click Section 1. 434 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . 7 In the Project Browser. 12 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view down and to the right. and click OK. and click Rename.5 On the Design Bar. click . Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar.

Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. 18 On the File menu.14 In the Project Browser. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View on page 435. and click Rename.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. 17 To hide the section box. click . double-click 01 Entry. right-click {3D}. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Typical plan views. including the house. click Save. 6 In the Rename View dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 435 . under Floor Plans. you create a plan cutaway view. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. clear Section Boxes. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. then select Medium. as shown. 4 In the Project Browser. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. and click OK. and click OK. and click Rename. 15 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. then Fine. under Floor Plans. click Callout. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. do not display many elements in 3D. In some cases. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 5 In the Project Browser. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. 16 On the View Control Bar. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow.

14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. click (SteeringWheels). 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 10 Use the Orbit tool to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side. 11 On the Design Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. as shown. so you can see into the building from the top. 15 Select the Roof. 436 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Orient to View ➤ Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 9 On the SteeringWheel.8 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click the pull-down arrow to display the Wheel menu. 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model.

18 In the Project Browser. click Save. and click OK. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. right-click {3D}. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations | 437 . double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study .17 On the View Control Bar. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. and click Rename. 20 On the View Control Bar. under 3D Views.Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under 3D Views. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 21 On the File menu. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice. enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site.

Training File Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. leave the slider at 50. date range. 2 On the View Control Bar. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. 10 Under Place. and click Duplicate. Click the Single-Day tab. CA. and 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. MA. USA is selected. USA.rvt training file you used in the previous lesson. and time range. or multi-day solar study.Boston. click click OK. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice. you specify the location. For this study. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. For the Multi-Day solar study. and click OK. date. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. 9 In the Name dialog. click . Los Angeles. . 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. 5 Click the Single-Day tab. select Los Angeles. you specify the location. 438 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . enter Summer Solstice. and time. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. For the Single-Day solar study.Creating Solar Studies . 3 Select Cast Shadows. expand Views (all). and double-click Solar Study Courtyard View. Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. click . single-day. You can create a still. for City. 4 For Sun Position. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. expand 3D Views.

4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select Winter Solstice. 2 On the View Control Bar. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. 2008. click OK. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . click Save. enter 20 and press ENTER. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Los Angeles is selected. click . Los Angeles. you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. Los Angeles. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Previewing Solar Study Animation on page 439. click OK. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. select June 22. and click OK. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 6 On the View Control Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 On the File menu. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Duplicate.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. enter Winter Solstice. 14 In this case. confirm that Summer Solstice. 2008. for Date. 16 In the Name dialog. on the Single-Day tab. Under Frame. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. select December 22. under Frame. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. and click OK. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. enter 10 and press ENTER. NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset. ■ For Time Interval. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. for Sun Position. Clear Ground Plane at Level. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. Previewing Solar Study Animation | 439 . 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 7 On the Options Bar. click .Courtyard View is currently displayed. For Time Range. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. . Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click OK. . on the Single-Day tab. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. double-click 01 Entry. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. approximately as shown. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser. click To play the animation from start to finish. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. under Floor Plans. click . click To display the next sequential frame. 14 On the Options Bar.■ To display the next key frame. ■ To display the previous sequential frame. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. click . click . Los Angeles. select Summer Solstice. 13 On the View Control Bar. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. click ■ ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. . you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. click Text. for Sun Position. Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. The solar study animation plays. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 440 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

as shown. On the Options Bar. expand 3D Views. click . 5 In the Project Browser. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space.■ ■ Click outside of the text box to end the command. as shown. 8 For Sun Position. 6 On the View Control Bar. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Click and enter Dining. click . Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. approximately as shown. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. click Lines. and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. Exporting the Study as AVI | 441 . 4 Sketch rooms: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics.

select Section Boxes. NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control.9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. select Frame Range. select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that the value is set to 15. 14 Click outside of the section box. and click OK. if necessary. and click OK. 12 In the drawing area. 442 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. on the Single-Day tab. On the Annotation Categories tab. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. Los Angeles. ■ For Frames per second. under Output Length. and enter 5 to 50. On the Annotation Categories tab. select Summer Solstice. 11 To display the section box. 15 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. as shown. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area. 17 Specify the export options: ■ In the Length/Format dialog. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang.

and click OK.■ ■ Under Format. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. on the Single-Day tab. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. 3 For Sun Position. select Winter Solstice. select Frame Range. Under Format. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. verify that Hidden Line is selected. of the animation separately. 7 Specify the export options: ■ ■ ■ In the Length/Format dialog. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. for Compressor. Los Angeles. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. or frame. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select AVI Files. 6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. To view the animation. For Files of Type. verify that the value is set to 15. Click OK. verify that Hidden Line is selected. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . under Output Length. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. For Dimensions. click . enter 450 in the first field (width). For Frames per second. For File Name. 2 On the View Control Bar. click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ 18 Click Save. you open each image. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and enter 5 to 10. for Model Graphics Style. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. for Model Graphics Style. and click OK. To maintain the proportions of the frame. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save.Los Angeles. Exporting a Study as PNG | 443 . Exporting a Study as PNG on page 443.

you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. In this example. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. 8 Click Save. such as JPEG. or GIF.rvt training file you saved in the previous lesson. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Click OK. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. select PNG.■ For Dimensions. For File name. under 3D Views. Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson. 444 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. TIFF. ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE When you export to PNG. BMP. click Save. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. as shown: 9 On the File menu. click the Desktop icon. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway.Los Angeles. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. depending on the Frame Range. enter 450 in the first field (width). The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. or any single-frame format. For Files of Type.

as shown. NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts.2 Select the section box in the drawing area. Creating an Internal Plan Study | 445 .

click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 8 On the View Control Bar. Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. specify 2:00 pm. click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. 446 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . For Time Interval. select One week. for File name enter 2pm . USA. For Time. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. On the Annotation Categories tab. MA. 5 Select the roof. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building. and click OK. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click OK. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. and click Duplicate.Week Interval.Boston. clear Section Boxes. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box.4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top. and on the View Control Bar.Los Angeles . 12 In the Name dialog. for Sun Position.

West or North .rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. and click Save. you use the Mirror Project feature to create a mirror of the project along an axis. model views. enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. 17 On the View Control Bar. Click the Desktop icon.South. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and annotations in non-drafting views. You also re-orient the project to True North and compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. under Floor Plans. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. for File Name. In the Length/Format dialog. double-click 01 Entry. Re-orienting the Project | 447 . In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. Mirroring the Project In this exercise. you re-orient a building information model by creating an exact mirror of the project along an axis.15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. Re-orienting the Project In this lesson. click OK. and click OK. for Compressor. Mirror the project 1 In the Project Browser. you mirror all model elements. ■ 16 In the Video Compression dialog. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). When you mirror a project. such as East . 2 Zoom to fit the drawing in the view.

you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. see Revit Architecture 2009 Online Help. View still solar studies 1 In the Project Browser. 5 In the warning dialog. Then. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. under 3D Views. In this exercise. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 448 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements.West axis. 6 On the Standard toolbar. NOTE Some elements may have to be checked manually for proper placement after the mirror process. For additional information. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. 2 In the drawing area. click (Undo) to restore the project to its original configuration. select the roof.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. select East .3 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Mirror Project.West. Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that Project North is the top of the view. right-click. 4 In the Mirror Project dialog. click OK. The project is mirrored along the East .

Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. and click OK. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. and select Winter Solstice. click . 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click the Still tab. click . on the Still tab. select Cast Shadows. 10 Under Date and Time. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 8 For Sun Position. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. specify 11:00 AM for time. For example. Orienting to True North | 449 .3 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. click . 11 For Sun Position. click Apply. 12 Under Date and Time. 5 For Sun Position. and click OK. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting.

and click OK. click OK. for Orientation. Rotate project to True North True North and Project North can have different values for rotation. NOTE When rotating True North it is often helpful to draw lines representing the relationship between Project North and True North. 21 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. 450 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . This process establishes the view setting to True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Plan views are defined to use Project North or True North for the representation. select True North. IMPORTANT After you toggle the views. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. the Project North and True North are coincident and pointing toward the top of the computer monitor (in most cases). make sure to click in the view and zoom slightly in and out. click OK. 22 Re-orient the project: ■ To relocate the rotation center point. Notice that the drawing did not change when you changed the orientation from True North to Project North. and click Properties. 19 In the Project Browser. click the Still tab. When a project is started. under Floor Plans. click . and select Winter Solstice. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the view settings must be set for True North. In order to rotate True North so it is not coincident with Project North. double-click 01 Entry. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click at the intersection of the arrows that have been draw in the project representing True North and Project North. 14 On the View Control Bar. 15 For Sun Position. right click 01 Entry.13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog.

■ To establish the True North direction. ■ To establish the new direction of True North. Orienting to True North | 451 . The floor plan rotates in the view. click above the end of the magenta line representing True North. click toward the top of the screen. as shown.

and click OK. 32 On the View Control Bar. select True North. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click Apply. select Project North. 26 Right-click Copy of 01 Entry. under 3D Views. and click Element Properties. 27 In the Rename View dialog. select Summer Solstice. 34 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Properties. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 452 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. and click Rename. right-click 01 Entry. right-click. click . 31 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 33 For Sun Position. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click 01 Entry. 28 In the Project Browser. enter True North Orientation. right-click.23 In the Project Browser. and click OK. for Orientation. View the solar study with the Project North orientation 30 In the Project Browser. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. for Orientation. Notice that the view now displays the plan in the correct orientation for True North. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. select True North Orientation. click the Still tab. 25 In the Project Browser. 24 In the Element Properties dialog.

Export animated solar study 37 Export the animation: ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. In the Export Animated Solar Study dialog. and click OK. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. for Compressor. Los Angeles. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project. Orienting to True North | 453 . verify that AVI Files is selected. For File Name. click the Desktop icon. and click OK. click OK. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Dimensions. click Summer Solstice. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. Click Save. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. For Files of Type. click the Single-Day tab. In the Length/Format dialog.35 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 36 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 38 In the Video Compression dialog. under Format. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. Click OK. enter 600 in the first field.

and click OK. In the Name dialog. select Interior: Sun only. 3 On the View Control Bar. On the Still tab of the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 454 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . for Date and Time. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. and click OK. you also save the image to the project and export it as a JPEG file for future use. select Winter Solstice. enter Winter Solstice 2pm Los Angeles. and 2:00 PM. In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click 4 Specify rendering options: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. select 12/22. Since a rendered image is temporary. select Edit/New.Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. and exporting it as a JPEG image. under 3D Views. ■ ■ 5 In the Rendering dialog. In this exercise. (Show Rendering Dialog). under Settings. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. Under Lighting. The scene is rendered in full color at medium quality. 2 In the Project Browser. For Sun. for Scheme. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Rendered views do not have this limitation. capturing it. select Medium. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. Refer to Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391 for additional information on rendering. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. click Render.rvt training file you saved in the previous exercise. for Setting. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. under Quality. Training File Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click Duplicate. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage.

enter living area_winter solstice. 8 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ ■ In the Rendering dialog. verify that JPEG Files is selected. and click OK. The rendered image is saved under the Renderings folder in the Project Browser. For Files of type. In the left pane of the Save Image dialog. click Desktop. click Save to Project. and click Save.6 In the Rendering dialog. click Export. so use the Save to Project option to save the view in the project. 7 In the Save To Project dialog. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. Rendering an Interior View | 455 .

456 .

you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views. linework. When organizing presentation graphics. and section boxes. help to explain the subjective complexity of the work. type. or the client. Other tools in the software. Many tools in Revit Architecture 2009 describe number. 457 . You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. For the realistic approach. you learn various methods of communicating your design intent by creating presentation views. an outside reviewer.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial. you learn several graphic techniques using various tools to create an analytique. you explore the stylistic approach. however. elevations. a consultant. Using the pre-built building model. advanced model graphics. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. you can choose between realism and stylistics. In this tutorial. Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs on page 391. Co-house. The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. sections. Revit Architecture provides several options for expressing the architecture. They include rendering. Whether the audience is the general contractor. transcending the building process to recognize the architecture of the project. and other quantifiable elements in construction documents. and details. In this series of exercises. use the tutorials for the rendering features of Revit Architecture. length.

Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. 458 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. To fit the floor plan into the analytique. you create a copy of the plan. you create a presentation floor plan. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation.

TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. Cnst. click in the drawing area. and click Rename. under Floor Plans. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Cnst.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Modify visibility/graphics 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. exit the menu. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique | 459 . and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. right-click 2nd Flr. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr.

you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and other annotations in this view. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. navigate to the folder of your choice. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. 8 Click OK. UP Text.5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. Modify the view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. and Up Arrow. click the Annotation Categories tab. click the Scale control and select 1:100. expand the Stairs category. Using Advanced Model Graphics on page 460. this represents the view getting smaller. elevations. No annotations display in the view. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 7 Under Visibility. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. and click Save. Down Arrow.rvt. This turns off the visibility of all tags. 460 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and clear DOWN Text. dimensions. 11 In the Save As directory. sections.

Using Advanced Model Graphics | 461 . specify 10/27. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen. 7 For Place. the darker the shadows. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 10 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. on the Still tab. ■ For Contrast. click OK. 3 On the View Control Bar. click . 12 Click OK. select By Date. NOTE For this step. 11 Select Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 9 For City. If you select a different city. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. you can select any city. you can create. MA. select Boston. select Cast Shadows.rvt. select Sun and Shadow Settings. specify the following: ■ Under Shadow. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. ■ 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and select 1st Flr. Time and Place. 6 Under Settings.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The higher the number. and delete multiple locations to analyze a single prototype. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click (Shadows Off). For Sun Position. Cnst. 1:00 PM. click . The sun and shadow settings can also be used when rendering a 3D view. 8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. modify. Within a project. 13 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. you can specify one place where the project resides in the world. specify 35. NOTE Shadows can display in all view styles except Wireframe. At that place. for Date and Time. click the Place tab. however. double-click it in the Project Browser. The shadow contrast dictates the darkness of the shadow display.

15 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 18 Click File menu ➤ Save. click 16 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet on page 462. 17 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 19 Proceed with the next exercise. click (Shadows On). click OK. Turn off the ground plane shadows 14 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. under Settings. 462 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Ground Plane at Level. . This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. for Sun Position.Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. and click Advanced Model Graphics.

and click Add View to Sheet. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 463 . click Add View. click Sheet. and notice the view title. and click OK. select Arch Portrait. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. 4 In the Views dialog. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. The blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 6 On the Design Bar.Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The viewport displays at the cursor. and click View. TIP If the View tab is not available. right-click the Design Bar. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. and click to place it. 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown.

Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. For this analytique. select No. click Edit/New. under Graphics. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. To accomplish this. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet. enter Presentation. 9 On the Options Bar. click . and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The viewport no longer displays a view title. 464 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Activate View. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click OK. for Show Title. click Duplicate.

Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 465 . TIP If you have difficulty sketching with invisible lines. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. click . The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. If necessary. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. select the entire chain (use Tab) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. click Filled Region. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. 22 On the Design Bar. click . and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 18 On the Options Bar. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. fill properties. 20 On the Options Bar. and the boundary of the region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. click Edit/New. When you finish drawing the chain. The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. You enter sketch mode where you define the line type.This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. and select Chain. 16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. 17 In the Type Selector. select Invisible lines.

click Duplicate. and click OK. under Identity Data. 466 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . for Sheet Name. 25 In the Name dialog. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. for Fill Pattern. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. and click OK. click OK. scroll down. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique on page 466. select Solid fill. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. click Finish Sketch. under Graphics. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. 26 In the Type Properties dialog.24 In the Type Properties dialog. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. and click Deactivate View. under Name. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 28 In the Type Properties dialog. enter Solid Black. and click OK. enter Presentation. 30 On the Design Bar. 27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. and click View Properties. 34 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet.

you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 467 .rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate.Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. right-click South. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.

This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. 13 For Contrast. select Cast Shadows. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 2:30 PM. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click in the Walls row. specify 35. clear Visible. enter Presentation South Elevation. under Visibility. and click OK. click Override. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. Time and Place. scroll up. Changes made in the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog apply only to the active view. 12 Under Shadow. and click OK. click Duplicate. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Doors category. 14 For Sun Position. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. 11 On the View Control Bar. 16 In the Name dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. and clear Elevation Swing. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. click (Shadows Off). 18 For Time. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 468 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 Click OK. under Elevations. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click . click OK. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Rename. on the Model Categories tab. exit the menu. right-click Copy of South. under Visibility.2 In the Project Browser. Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Settings. and click OK. select By Date. and click OK. under Pattern Overrides. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click in the drawing area. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

click Add View. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.rvt. double-click A105 . select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet on page 469. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 469 . under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Presentation. TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown. and click Add View to Sheet. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

5 In the Type Selector.The viewport displays a view title. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. 470 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

7 On the Design Bar. Adding Section Views to the Analytique on page 471. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views.6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views. click Modify. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 471 . 9 Proceed with the next lesson. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique.

click Section. under Floor Plans. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. for Scale. select 1: 100. 4 Add the section shown below. 472 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 3 On the Options Bar.Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and use the flip arrows if necessary.rvt. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique.

and double-click Section 2. you will create a callout around the building model in the section view. To fit correctly in the analytique. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so you can see it easily. 8 Draw a callout around the building model in the section view.Section 2 is added to the building model. select 1 : 100. Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. To accomplish this. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 473 . this view needs to be rotated 180°. as shown. click Callout. for Scale. 7 On the Options Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1).

11 In the Rename View dialog. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Pattern Overrides. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ Casework Ceilings 474 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 17 Under Visibility. enter Presentation Section 2. 12 In the Project Browser. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click Modify. scroll up. click Override. under Sections (Callout 1). and clear Elevation Swing. under Sections (Callout 1). 15 Under Visibility. click the Model Categories tab. clear Visible. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. and click Rename. expand the Doors category. Modify visibility/graphic overrides 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. click in the Walls row. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser.Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. right-click Callout of Section 2.

■ ■ ■ Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. When you select the crop region. The inner boundary shows the crop region for model elements. The outer boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. click The crop regions no longer display. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. (Hide Crop Region). and clear Show annotation categories in this view. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 475 . 24 Proceed with the next exercise. 20 Click OK. 22 On the View Control Bar. Hide the crop region 21 Select the crop region. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View on page 476.

specify the following: Under Shadow. ■ For Sun Position. click . you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view.Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 4 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. In addition. TIP You may need to move the dialog to see the view. Click Apply. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 2 On the View Control Bar. you create new sun and shadow settings to add contrast to the presentation view. In the steps that follow. 3 On the View Control Bar. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. and click OK. The shadows do not offer much contrast. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 35. double-click Presentation Section 2. 476 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. select Cast Shadows. under Sections (Callout 1). For Contrast. click Duplicate. 6 In the Name dialog. in the Project Browser. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view.

7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click (Shadows On). Notice the application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. Select Relative to View. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. For Azimuth. Silhouette Edges. and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify 135°. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 477 . 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. You can modify this line style by clicking Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. click OK. Click OK. NOTE The line style. for Silhouette style. TIP You can also use the Linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. was added to this training file for training purposes. The shadows now provide more contrast and a sense of depth. and click OK. select Directly. specify 70°. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique on page 478. select Silhouette Edges. For Altitude. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. Apply silhouette edges 9 On the View Control Bar. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise.

478 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser.Presentation. and click Add View to Sheet. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Sheets (all). click Add View. and click to place the selected view. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180°. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 3 In the Views dialog. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views.rvt.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. double-click A105 . 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown.

double-click Section 2. To rotate an object. you click to specify the start radius. The section needs to be rotated 180°. enter 180 to specify the degrees of rotation. and press Enter. under Sections (Callout 1). 8 Select the callout that you added previously. Using a clock as a reference. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. Rotate the callout 7 In the Project Browser. In the steps that follow. click (Rotate). and enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. 6 On the Design Bar.5 In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. The view title no longer displays. click Modify. 9 On the Edit toolbar. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 479 . 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. you accomplish this by rotating the callout in the section view.

Presentation. Its boundaries need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. 480 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . double-click A105 .The callout rotates 180°. under Sheets (all). 12 Drag the callout boundaries until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. The Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180° and needs to be repositioned.

you create a view template for presentation views to reduce repetitive work when creating subsequent views. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. click Modify. 15 On the Design Bar. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. Working with a Presentation View Template | 481 . Working with a Presentation View Template on page 481. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. After applying the view template to a new section view.

and click OK. 3 In the New View Template dialog. 482 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . right-click Section 1. and click OK. 2 Click View menu ➤ Create View Template from View. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Section 1. Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Type 1).Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. Rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. enter Presentation Section 1. 7 In the Rename View dialog. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 4 In the View Templates dialog. double-click Presentation Section 2. you can simply apply the presentation view template.rvt. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. under Sections (Type 1). under Sections (Callout 1). click OK. enter Presentation. Apply the presentation view template 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template.

and click Add View to Sheet.9 In the Apply View Template dialog.Presentation. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Graphics. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. The furniture. and click OK. under Sheets (all). 12 In the Views dialog. Working with a Presentation View Template | 483 . 17 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. annotations. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. under Names. and click Deactivate View. and click Activate View. select Section: Presentation Section 1. double-click A105 . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. and elevation swings no longer display. 16 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 18 Right-click the viewport. select Viewport : Presentation. select 90° Counterclockwise. 14 In the Type Selector. select Presentation. 15 Right-click the viewport. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. for Rotation on Sheet. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. click Add View. lighting fixtures.

In this exercise. 484 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Working in a Callout Analytique on page 484. traditional analytiques contain a detail. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. such as a tracery window or a column capital.20 Click File menu ➤ Save.

double-click Section 1.Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. under Sections (Callout 1). 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. and modify its boundaries and the location of the callout head. as shown. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select the callout. click Modify. right-click Callout of Section 1. Create a callout 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and click Rename. After you add the callout. under Sections (Type 1). 4 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Working in a Callout Analytique | 485 . click Callout.

7 Select the crop region. and adjust the bottom to create a small gap. 8 Right-click. 486 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Annotation Crop. enter Presentation Callout. under Extents. and click OK. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region.5 In the Rename View dialog. under Sections (Callout 1). clear Crop Region Visible. and click View Properties. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click Presentation Callout. 6 In the Project Browser. as shown.

12 In the Views dialog. For Scale Value 1. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Activate View. under Sheets (all). 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.Add the callout to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Type Selector. and click Add View to Sheet. select Custom. click Add View. Working in a Callout Analytique | 487 . click Modify. specify 22. select Viewport : Presentation.Presentation. select Section: Presentation Callout. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. Modify the presentation callout on the sheet 16 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. Click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click A105 . do the following: ■ ■ ■ For View Scale.

and move it to the position shown below. and make adjustments as necessary. turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. double-click Presentation Callout. activate the viewport. 488 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . Although you can use several methods to create these areas of contrast. click Filled Region. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet.19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. under Sections (Callout 1). click Region Properties. and click Deactivate View. In the steps that follow. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. Apply filled regions to the presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. When finished.

for Fill Pattern. 28 In the Project Browser.25 In the Type Properties dialog. click . under Sheets (all).Presentation. 26 In the Fill Patterns dialog. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as a stylized representation of the architectural forms. click Filled Region. You can sketch one filled region at a time or all of them at once. When you are finished. Working in a Callout Analytique | 489 . 27 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. Add a poche region 29 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Finish Sketch. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click Activate View. select Solid fill. on the Design Bar. and click OK 3 times. 30 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. double-click A105 . You do not have to replicate the image exactly.

32 On the Design Bar. click (Show Crop Region). and drag the left and bottom boundaries until the entire poche region displays. 490 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click . 34 Select the crop region.31 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. 33 On the View Control Bar. and sketch the rectangle shown below. The entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region.

you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes on page 491. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 491 . and click Deactivate View.35 On the View Control Bar. 36 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. 37 Click File menu ➤ Save. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. click (Hide Crop Region).

and apply shadows to the views. click (Shadows Off). Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 492 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under 3D Views.Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. you create 3 similar isometric views with different cutaways.rvt. Create a southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. and click 1 : 200. 3 On the View Control Bar. 5 On the View Control Bar. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. double-click Isometric. click the Scale control. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise.

Click OK. 12 In the Rename View dialog. 13 In the Project Browser. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Shadow. and click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 493 . 7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. right-click Isometric. select Cast Shadows. For Contrast. and click Rename. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Select Relative to View. and click OK. click Duplicate. Select Ground Plane at Level. and click Rename. Rename and duplicate isometric views 11 In the Project Browser. For Sun Position. specify 35. in the list. double-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 1.6 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. and click OK. For Altitude. specify 45°. 8 In the Name dialog. 17 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. under 3D Views. click . and click OK. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. select Silhouette Edges. For Azimuth. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Add a section box to Isometric 2 16 In the Project Browser. specify 135°. Cnst. enter Isometric 1. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Settings. 14 In the Project Browser. A section box displays around the building model. Select 1st Flr. right-click Isometric 1. select Section Box. enter Isometric 2. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. under Extents. for Silhouette style. select Directly.

19 Select the section box. When you are finished. Grips display on each face of the section box. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the third floor. as shown. 20 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. TIP Notice the rotation symbol. These grips allow you to modify the boundaries of the section box. click Modify on the Design Bar. 494 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . You can use this to rotate the section box.

under 3D Views. Next. and click OK. select Viewport : Presentation. make a copy of the view. and click Rename. under 3D Views. clear Section Boxes. 24 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. When you are finished. under Sheets (all). In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. 27 Select the section box.Before turning off the visibility of the section box. you stack the 3 isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.Presentation. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 26 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric 2. 25 To hide the section box. and click OK. 21 In the Project Browser. clear Section Boxes. drag Isometric 3 under the left section view as shown. double-click Isometric 3. On the Annotation Categories tab. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 31 In the Project Browser. 22 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box. you can adjust the plane location. enter Isometric 3. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. The section box no longer displays. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 30 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 495 . 23 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify on the Design Bar. If desired. 28 Select the grip for the top plane of the section box. double-click A105 . On the Annotation Categories tab. the stairs and railings may display. double-click Isometric 2. 29 To hide the section box.

You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. 496 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . In the Type Selector. The filled region partially covers the view. drag Isometric 2 under Isometric 3 as shown. In the Type Selector. select Viewport : Presentation. under 3D Views. under 3D Views. select Viewport : Presentation. drag Isometric 1 under Isometric 2 as shown.32 In the Project Browser. 33 In the Project Browser.

36 On the Design Bar. select Concrete. click Edit/New. click Lines. 39 For Background. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Using the drawing tools. for Fill Patterns. and click Activate View. On the Options Bar. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 497 . 35 Select the poche filled region. 38 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit. select Transparent. You may need to use the Split tool and the Trim tool to modify lines during this process. This will make it easier to draw lines. 40 Click OK twice. click Region Properties. You change the fill pattern back to solid fill when you are done. 41 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. The image below shows the redrawn lines.Modify filled region boundaries 34 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport.

Creating Cutaway Perspective Views on page 499.43 On the Design Bar. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. click Edit/New. 498 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Click OK twice. 50 Proceed with the next exercise. 47 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click Deactivate View. for Fill Pattern. select Solid fill. click Region Properties. 45 In the Type Properties dialog. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save.

The view opens immediately. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. you create the final view for the analytique. under Floor Plans.Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. Cnst. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. then you specify the eye direction and range. a cutaway perspective view. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 499 . Adding a camera is a 2-click process: first you specify the eye location. click Camera. you add it to the presentation sheet. double-click 1st Flr.

select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select Cast Shadows. Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. for Name. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 500 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 6 On the View Control Bar. For Sun Position. and click Advanced Model Graphics.4 Adjust the crop region so the entire building model fits in it. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics Settings dialog. click ■ ■ ■ (Shadows Off). click . for Silhouette style. and click OK. For Contrast. specify 35. specify the following: Under Shadow. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges.

13 Use the section grips to modify the location of each plane until your view resembles the following image.Add a section box 10 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Grips display on each plane of the section box. under Extents. You may need to adjust the location of the crop region as well. select Section Box. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 Select the section box. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 501 . A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK.

under Change. under Sheets (all). select Viewport : Presentation. 502 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 21 In the Project Browser. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. and click OK. On the Annotation Categories tab. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. double-click A105 . select Scale (locked proportions). 19 To hide the section box. clear Section Boxes. and click OK. for Width. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. click (Hide Crop Region). 18 On the View Control Bar. you must specify the actual size of the image. In the Type Selector. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.14 Select the crop region. 17 Under Model Crop Size. Because scale does not apply to perspective views.Presentation. under 3D Views. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 In the Project Browser. enter 165 mm. click Size.

rvt. 10 In the Name dialog. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. Annotating the Analytique on page 503. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New. and click OK. Create new text types 1 If the Sheets: A105 . 3 On the Options Bar. Annotating the Analytique | 503 . specify a text size of 40 mm. enter Description. Add a title and description 13 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Name dialog. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. double-click it in the Project Browser. under Text. Training File Continue to use the training file you saved in the previous exercise. enter Title. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. select a font. under Text. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. click Text. specify a text size of 6 mm. select the same font as the title. click Duplicate. and click OK. select Text : Title. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet.22 Click File menu ➤ Save.Presentation sheet is not the active view. and click OK.

18 On the Design Bar. select Text : Description. 16 In the Type Selector. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial.15 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. 504 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Modify. 19 Click File menu ➤ Save. 17 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

Importing and Exporting 505 .

506 .

you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.Importing SketchUp Files 13 The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported. you create a small building from the front mass form. curtain walls. you can easily add detail with Revit components. such as walls. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements. In this tutorial. that compose the building. 507 . and roofs. After you import the SketchUp model.

click Training Files. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. select All. click OK. and click Save. Create a Revit project 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. buildings. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. and not in the library. Import a SketchUp model 7 On the Design Bar. Double-click the Common folder. under Template file. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. select Preserve. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. For Files of type. 4 In the New Project dialog.skp.rte. click OK. right-click in the Design Bar.Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass In this exercise. 12 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Training Files icon. For Layers. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 9 In the informational dialog. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar. 6 In the Save As dialog. click Browse. for File name. and click Massing on the context menu that displays. enter SketchUp Model. click the Massing tab. or select from a list. you create a Revit Architecture project. select Auto-Detect. 10 In the Name dialog. For Import units. Click the Sketchup file. click Create Mass. and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. and click OK. enter Import SketchUp. For Colors. select SketchUp Files. ■ 508 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . visible elements.

For Place at level. ■ ■ For Positioning. such as walls. Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 509 . Click Open. 17 In the warning dialog. and roofs. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from. click the Close button. Level 1 is the only choice. ■ The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. In a new project. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry.You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers. click . select Manual . curtain walls. select Level 1. 14 On the View toolbar. depending on the complexity of the project.Center. 15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements.

verify Level 2 is selected. for Level. such as walls. You turn their visibility off to view only the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. Creating a Building from Mass Faces on page 510. Creating a Building from Mass Faces In this exercise. you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.400mm displays. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 510 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . After you create the building from the mass faces. that compose the building. 4 On the Options Bar. select the face so that it highlights in red. click Roof by Face. curtain walls. and roofs.18 Proceed to the next exercise. Create roofs from mass faces 1 Zoom in to the front mass form. and when the cursor displays a plus sign. and on the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass. verify Basic Roof: Generic .

To see the new roof. 10 Adjust the view: ■ On the View toolbar. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof.) to turn off mass visibility in the view. A roof is created from the mass face.The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign. click to display masses. click Create Roof. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 511 . on the View toolbar. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create Roof. 9 On the Options Bar. indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right. Click again 7 With the Roof by Face command still active. on the Options Bar. 6 On the Options Bar.

14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.■ Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form. click Create Roof. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. click Roof by Face. 512 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel.15 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Type Selector. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 16 On the View toolbar. click roofs that you created. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 513 . This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. click Modify to end the command. select Core Face: Exterior. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Wall by Face.200mm displays. 20 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. for Loc Line. and display only the 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. 21 On the Design Bar. 19 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the mass form.

25 On the View toolbar. 28 In the Type Selector. 26 Click to redisplay the masses. click to view only the walls and roofs. click Curtain System by Face. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. Create curtain systems from mass faces 27 On the Design Bar.24 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below. 29 Select the left face of the left mass. 514 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

31 Using the same technique. Create walls from mass faces 34 Close the Full Navigation Wheel.30 On the Options Bar. 32 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. click Create System. 33 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the back of the mass forms. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 515 .

35 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. Create a roof from a mass face 37 On the Design Bar. 40 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and select it. Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 39 On the Design Bar. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar. click Create System. click Roof by Face. 38 Select the mass face shown below. click Create Roof. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. 516 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . 36 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Wall by Face. and on the Options Bar.

42 On the View toolbar. double-click Level 1. 45 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. specify a point to place the camera. Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 44 In the Project Browser. 43 Click to redisplay the masses. click Camera.Create the final wall 41 On the Design Bar. Below the right corner of the view. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 517 . 46 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. click to view the building that you have created. under Floor Plans. and select the mass face shown below.

click your building in the view. specify a point for the camera target. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 518 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files . and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. roofs. as shown.■ In the far left corner of the building that you created. The perspective view created by the camera displays. to view only the walls. and curtain systems that make up You may need to resize the view again. Click the frame to display its grips. 47 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. 48 On the View toolbar.

for Justification. click Modify. Under Grid 1 Pattern. 52 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. select Center. and select the left curtain system in the view. select Center.Change the justification of the curtain systems 49 On the Design Bar. for Justification. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 519 . click . Modify the roofs 53 On the Views toolbar. click 51 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Click OK. 50 On the Options Bar. Under Grid 2 Pattern.

click Door. 62 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. Add doors to the building 58 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 59 On the View toolbar. 60 Click the Orbit section of the Full Navigation Wheel and drag your cursor to rotate your viewpoint as shown so you can see the front of the building. click SteeringWheels to display the Full Navigation Wheel. 57 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. under 3D Views. double-click {3D}. 63 In the Type Selector.54 Select each roof to display its grips. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 55 Right-click. and move the roof edges as shown below. 61 Close the Full Navigation Wheel. and click Cancel to end the command. double-click 3D View 1. 520 | Chapter 13 Importing SketchUp Files .

65 Save and close the drawing. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 521 .64 Add doors to the building as shown below.

522 .

Using Advanced Features 523 .

524 .

panel. grid lines. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. For example. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Like walls. 525 . To change grids. or you can use a specific curtain system command. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. you select the grid. and they are not windows. you need to change the length of the wall. you create a curtain system using the wall command. To switch panel types. you need to select a panel. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall.Curtain Systems 14 Curtain systems are not walls. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. Unlike windows. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. and mullions. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.rvt. click Training Files. A typical curtain system comprises a wall. Flat Curtain System In this lesson. to resize the system. and you can change these elements individually. This affects the entire curtain system. Like windows.

1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. 526 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. and double-click Ground Floor. click Wall. 6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building.

9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast. and double-click Southeast Isometric. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Creating an Entrance | 527 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser.7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall.

using curtain grids. For Top Offset. enter 1200. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. top constraint. Click OK. and click (Properties). Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels.11 Select the curtain system. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. 528 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. top and base attachments. and room bounding.

and click Rename.a. right-click Elevation 1 . 20 In the drawing area. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 18 In the Project Browser. click Curtain Grid. click Elevation. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. and click OK. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. under Floor Plans. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 25 On the Design Bar. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. click Modify. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary.Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. 15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Entrance | 529 . 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line.

26 While pressing CTRL. The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. and SEVENTH FLOOR. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. click Curtain Grid. This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. select SECOND FLOOR. FIFTH FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. Click to place another grid line. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. one larger than the other. watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. select the 3 grid lines you just placed. 530 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . while pressing CTRL. 33 On the Design Bar. Click to create a vertical grid. THIRD FLOOR. SIXTH FLOOR. and click OK. click Modify. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. FOURTH FLOOR.

The segment line style changes to dashed. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view. and on the Options Bar. Creating an Entrance | 531 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. you add a doorway to the curtain system. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. The two segments are removed.Next. click Add or Remove Segments. Instead of using the Door command. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. and then select the segment above it.

remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. 39 On the Design Bar. select One Segment. 42 Place dimensions as shown. 40 On the Options Bar. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 532 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .38 Using the same method. and lock them.

43 Delete the dimensions. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Creating an Entrance | 533 . You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. click in any white space to exit the editor. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added.TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. Use the following image as a guide.

and click Wireframe. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. Now.rfa. 534 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. not as curtain panels. 52 On the Type Selector. click Modify.Next. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. . Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. The panel changes to a double door. on the new curtain system you added. 56 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel. These panels schedule as doors. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. under Floor Plans. They are part of the curtain panel category. under Elevations. 55 In the Project Browser. 59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. 57 On the View Control Bar. click view. double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. This changes the graphics style of the Next. 54 On the Design Bar. double-click Entrance Elevation.

and the solid panels display in white. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click . The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. 67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. Creating an Entrance | 535 . and Material specifies the shading and patterning. click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. 65 On the View Control Bar. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. 61 With the panel still selected. 66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. click System Panel : Solid. The glazed panels display in blue.60 On the Type Selector. 63 Click OK twice.

5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 2 On the Options Bar. select Grid Line Segment. 536 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . click Mullion. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.rvt. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. click Save As. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.68 On the File menu. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. select Entire Grid Line. 4 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors.

select All Empty Segments. You are going to change some mullion joins. because their width reduces the size of the doors. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 537 . Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. clickModify.6 On the Options Bar. so you remove them next. however. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. Changing mullion joins 11 On the View Control Bar. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 10 Delete the mullions below them. 12 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. there are a few that you do not want. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. 9 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.

538 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. click Modify. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. you can also right-click. 15 On the Design Bar. 14 Click the top mullion control. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion.Two mullion join controls display. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. double-click Southeast Isometric. Finally. you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. 13 Click the lower mullion join control. 16 In the Project Browser. 17 Save the file.

You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 5 Click ■ ■ ■ . 7 On the Options Bar. you add a curtain system using the wall command. The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. enter 1200. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. (Arc passing through three points). For Top Offset. 4 In the Type Selector. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. for Top Constraint.Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 1 In the Project Browser. Curved Curtain System | 539 . Click OK. click Wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. under Floor Plans. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: Under Constraints. Finally. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side.

under Elevations. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. You are going to use one of these snaps points. 540 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems .10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc. Divide the halves into quarters. Next. eighths. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. and then sixteenths. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. click Curtain Grid. double-click East. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. 14 In the Project Browser. you place grids on the system.

Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 541 . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. Remember to click other elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. click Modify. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system.300mm. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. you change some panels in the system. to filter out all 19 Save the file. Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 18 In the Type Selector. Next. 16 On the Design Bar. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. select Basic Wall: Generic . Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids.15 Zoom in to the cylinder. select the bottom layer of panels.

click . click Lines. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 9 Select the extrusion. 11 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Model Lines. 4 On the Design Bar. enter 100. and click . select Glass.rft. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. clear Chain. and on the Options Bar. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel. 8 On the Design Bar. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. for Depth. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 542 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 3 In the Project Browser. double-click Exterior. . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion. under Elevations. 12 On the Options Bar.

double-click FOURTH FLOOR. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 24 On the View toolbar. 26 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. (SteeringWheels). All fourth floor panels are selected. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa family. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 543 .14 On the Design Bar.Pattern. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Modify. 18 Load the Curtain Panel .Pattern. click (Default 3D View). 21 In the Type Selector. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. and click Change Walls Orientation.rfa. 23 Right-click.Pattern. and save the family as Curtain Panel . All the panels change to the custom panel you created. click 25 On the View toolbar. select Curtain Panel . and return to the project file. right-click. under Floor Plans.

The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. 544 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . right-click.Solid. The finished arc wall should look like the following image. under Floor Plans. All the panels change to the solid panel. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. 30 Save the file. 28 Highlight a panel in the arc. 29 In the Type Selector. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. 27 In the Project Browser. select System Panel . All fifth floor panels are selected.

Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Click again to specify the ending point. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). click ■ ■ For Sides.Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 545 . 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Select Radius. for Profile Usage. and click OK. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. and select it. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. under Elevations. double-click East.rft. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. . click Mullion. 8 On the Design Bar. select Mullion. click Training Files. 1 In the Project Browser. enter 8. click Lines. For vertical mullions. and enter 50 mm for the radius. except at the GROUND FLOOR level.

clear Fine. 20 Select the detail component. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rfa. 28 On the View toolbar. clear Coarse and Medium. 31 Click . After the new profile is loaded. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Modify. click Mullion. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Visibility. 13 On the Options Bar. and return to the project file. 27 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar.11 On the Design Bar. 29 Spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog.detail. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. under 3D Views. it can be added as a mullion type. 12 Select the lines in the octagon. click (SteeringWheels). 17 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. and click OK. click Training Files. and click Visibility.rfa family. click Modify. double-click Southeast Isometric.rfa. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. 546 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown.

33 Click Edit/New. 36 Under Construction. right-click. 38 On the Options Bar. 43 Press DELETE. click Duplicate. so you remove the unwanted ones. You have placed more mullions than you want. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 34 In the Type Properties dialog. 40 On the Design Bar. click Modify. under Floor Plans.32 In the Element Properties dialog. 41 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 547 . select Circular Mullion for Family. 42 Highlight a mullion in the arc. 44 Save the file. select All Empty Segments. 37 Click OK twice. 35 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. for Profile. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 39 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline.

you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. 548 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. a storefront system. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Design Bar. and a ruled curtain system. In this lesson. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and you can click to select them all. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. select Defines slope. click Pick Walls. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E.This completes the exercise for adding mullions. and then apply those custom elements to the system. All the inside faces highlight. 5 On the Options Bar. make custom curtain panels and mullions. you learned to create a curved curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. TIP To chain select all the walls. double-click TOP OF ROOF. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous lesson. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls.

11 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Finish Roof. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. enter 600. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. select Entire Grid Line. Click OK. 14 On the Options Bar. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. click Roof Properties. double-click Southeast Isometric.7 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 16 On the Design Bar. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Mullion. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. 9 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Sloped Glazings | 549 . 18 Save the file. under 3D Views.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Unconnected for Height. under Floor Plans. and enter 2400. click Wall. 4 In the Type Selector.Storefront System In this exercise. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. 5 On the Options Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 1 In the Project Browser. You are going to place a storefront system in this wall. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 550 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall.

the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. To see how the grid layout is defined. even if the wall height changes. For this wall. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. 12 Select the storefront wall. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. which is specified in the type. This specifies an exact length for the wall. enter 10200 mm. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. 9 On the Design Bar. click Edit/New. click Modify. and press ENTER. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. double-click Southeast Isometric.7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. Storefront System | 551 . The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. 10 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. and click . 8 Click the temporary dimension. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. The curtain wall cuts the original wall.

18 On the Options Bar. Angle. or end. select All Empty Segments. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. In this exercise. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. under 3D Views. click Mullion. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. Justification.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. center. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. 20 Save the file. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 16 Click OK. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. see the Revit Architecture help. you find Number. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. enter 15. and Offset. By setting the Angle value. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. 19 Select a curtain grid. 552 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . double-click Southeast Isometric. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. For more information about these curtain wall parameters.

7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. 6 Click the highlighted line. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted.3 On the View Control Bar. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and highlight the model line. Curtain System by Lines | 553 .

click Curtain Grid. but now that you have created a ruled curtain system.8 Select the highlighted line. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Next. 11 Click OK. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Design Bar. 554 | Chapter 14 Curtain Systems . NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 10 Select the panel. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids. and click . click Modify. A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall.

and then eighths. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. Finally.13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. right-click. select System Panel : Solid. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves. 16 In the Type Selector. quarters. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and define a ruled curtain system. Curtain System by Lines | 555 . place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. and then eighths. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. 18 Save the file. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel. This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. quarters.

556 .

In addition. Before you can sketch the roof profile. 557 . and low sloped roofs. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In this tutorial. and open Metric\m_Roofs. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this lesson. shed. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. you learn how to add fascia. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. gutters. including hip. mansard. gable. you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2009. In this exercise. Creating Roofs Creating an Extruded Roof You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. and soffits to the roofs that you create. click Training Files.Roofs 15 In this lesson. You do not need to create the work plane.

and so on). This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. 4 Click OK. and click OK. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. click the blue square on the witness line. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and double-click Level 1. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. 5 In the Go To View dialog. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. select Name. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. click Ref Plane. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. centerline. expand Floor Plans. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.1 In the Project Browser. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 558 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. expand Views (all).

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. Creating an Extruded Roof | 559 .9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. 11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2.

click Finish Sketch to complete the roof. 13 On the Options Bar.Next. 560 | Chapter 15 Roofs . The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. 16 On the View toolbar. select Chain. click Lines. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. sketch the roof profile. Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections.

click Modify. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). press TAB. and then select the exterior face of the wall. The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof. expand Sections (Type 1). 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. 21 In the Project Browser. Next. The roof should resemble the following illustration.Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. and double-click Section 1. expand Views (all). Creating an Extruded Roof | 561 . 19 On the Tools toolbar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. and select the second wall. press CTRL. 18 Select the edge of the roof. 17 On the Tools toolbar. click (Join/Unjoin Roof). Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway.

(Default 3D View) to view the completed breezeway roof in the 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 26 On the View toolbar. 562 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click model. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint on page 562.24 On the Options Bar. you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. click Attach for Top/Base.

Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 563 .You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. verify that Defines slope is selected. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. 3 In the Project Browser. click Pick Walls. m_Roofs. Next. 6 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. expand Views (all). 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Garage Roof. 5 On the Options Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. and click Yes. expand Floor Plans.rvt. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. sketch the roof footprint. 2 Select Garage Roof to move the roof to the correct level. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang.

9 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint.7 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line. click Finish Roof. 15 On the View toolbar. and click OK. Verify that a dashed blue line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. click the model. click (Properties). 14 When you see the informational dialog. (Default 3D View) to view the gable roof and attached walls in 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 8 On the Options Bar. clear Defines slope. 13 On the Design Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint on page 565. By default. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope. 10 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. 564 | Chapter 15 Roofs . under Dimensions. select both slope definition lines. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. and on the Options Bar. 11 Press CTRL.

Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. press TAB. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. expand Views (all). and then verify that a dashed blue line displays to the exterior side of the walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and enter 600 for Overhang. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney.Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. and double-click Level 3. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. m_Roofs. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 565 . you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. 3 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt. When you complete the roof. clear Defines slope.

15 On the Options bar. 10 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. 566 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click (Rectangle). 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. sketch the chimney opening. Next. 9 Using automatic snaps. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. 8 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. select Defines Slope. select Defines Slope. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 17 When you see the informational dialog. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. add new slope lines to the roof. Next. sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Lines. click Modify.6 Click to select all the walls. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.

4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. m_Roofs. and enter 600 for Overhang. expand Views (all). Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.18 On the View toolbar. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint on page 567. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 567 . expand Floor Plans. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Level 2. select Defines slope.rvt. click Pick Walls. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. click (Default 3D View) to view the new roof in the model.

8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. click Lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. close the roof sketch. 9 On the Tools toolbar. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. select the left vertical slope definition line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. click (Trim/Extend). and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. Next. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 568 | Chapter 15 Roofs .5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. Next. using the following illustration for guidance. and click (Pick Lines). 7 On the Options Bar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof. 10 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 11 To trim the first line segment. Verify that a dashed blue line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch.

click Roof Properties. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 569 . (Press ESC to close the SteeringWheels. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click (SteeringWheels). 18 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify.12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof.) Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. 17 On the View toolbar. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. Next. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. and use the Orbit tool to view the back of the house. 14 Under Constraints. and click OK. click Finish Roof. enter 600 for Base Offset From Level.

24 Select the edge of the hip roof. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint on page 571. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. join the two remaining walls to the roof. 570 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 23 On the Tools toolbar. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. and use the Orbit tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof.21 Click (SteeringWheels). click (Join/Unjoin Roof). use the Join Roof command to fix the roof. Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. 22 Using the same method that you used previously. The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. Next.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Next. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. 8 On the Tools toolbar. click (Trim/Extend). 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. click Pick Walls. press TAB. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. 7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. and double-click Level 2. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 1 In the Project Browser. select the left vertical roof line.rvt. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 571 . You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 10 To trim the first line segment. enter 0 for Overhang. Verify that a blue dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. and enter 300 for Overhang. m_Roofs. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Views (all).Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. clear Defines Slope. 6 On the Options Bar. expand Floor Plans. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.

13 On the Options Bar. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). select Defines slope. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. 572 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Modify. and double-click 3D. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. m_Roofs. (SteeringWheels). 1 In the Project Browser. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. and use the Orbit tool to rotate the model. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker.rvt. 19 On the View toolbar. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. click Finish Roof to complete the roof.11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. and click OK. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. you add a slope-defining line. 16 Under Constraints. Next. expand 3D Views. and press ENTER. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 20 On the View toolbar. you add slope arrows to the shed roof.

verify ■ (Draw) is selected. expand Floor Plans. 11 On the Design Bar. and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. click Ref Plane. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. Next. clear Defines Slope. and double-click Level 2. and enter 600 for Offset. 14 On the Options Bar. click Slope Arrow. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 573 .2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. 4 In the Project Browser. 5 On the View menu. add two new slope arrows. click (Pick Lines). 3 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. To help locate the position of each split. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click Modify. 12 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Tools menu. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). you need to add two reference planes. Before you can add slope arrows. click Split Walls and Lines. 15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail.

1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Garage Roof. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. and click 19 Under Constraints. click Edit. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. (Properties). expand Views (all). m_Roofs. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. When you sketch a hip roof. and move the cursor to place the arrow. select both slope arrows. When eave heights differ. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof.■ Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 574 | Chapter 15 Roofs . the adjacent eave heights must align. 22 Click (Default 3D View) on the View toolbar to display the model. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. click Modify. 18 Press CTRL. and then click OK. enter 500 for Rise/1000. 20 Under Dimensions. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. Aligning Roof Eaves on page 574. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. select Slope for Specify. 16 Repeat steps 13 . expand Floor Plans.15 to add the second slope arrow.rvt.

16 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. click Finish Roof.4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). 6 With the two gable end lines selected. When aligning eaves. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click Align Eaves. click 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the Options Bar. select a method to align the eaves. The eave lines display with a dimension. under Dimensions. Next. click Save As. 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000. (Properties). on the Options Bar. Aligning Roof Eaves | 575 . 10 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 13 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 14 If you want to save your changes. select Defines Slope. Creating a Mansard Roof on page 576. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. on the File menu.

(Properties). and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level.Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. 576 | Chapter 15 Roofs . on the Options Bar. and double-click North. under Constraints. click Training Files. click Modify. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. expand Views (all). expand Elevations.rvt. 3 Select the roof and. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Element Properties dialog.

16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. click Modify. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 10 On the Options Bar. and then select Defines slope. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click . expand Floor Plans. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. under Dimensions. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. and select the remaining three lines. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. click (Pick Lines). Creating a Mansard Roof | 577 . and click OK. click Lines. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. click (Default 3D View) to display the model. click Finish Roof. 14 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 3. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar.6 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. press TAB. 15 In the Element Properties dialog.

17 On the View toolbar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. 578 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you add the roof. and open Common\c_Low_Slope_Roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof In this exercise. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. NOTE This exercise uses a common training file and Imperial units. (Default 3D View) to display the model with the complete 18 If you want to save your changes. you add a roof to a building shell. click Save As.rvt. click mansard roof. you modify the slab to represent roof drains in the low slope roof. Creating a Low Slope Roof on page 578. You also modify the structure of the roof slab to more accurately represent the tapered insulation condition used to create the roof drainage system.

select the interior face of the curved wall on the right. 4 On the Options Bar. verify that Defines slope is not selected. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. under Floor Plans. click Pick Walls.Create a flat roof by footprint 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 579 . 5 In the drawing area. and that Overhang is 0' 0''. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 Select the interior face of a wall segment on each side of the building and 1 on either side of the arc wall at the entry. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. double-click Roof.

for Type. click Roof Properties. 7 On the Tools toolbar. 580 | Chapter 15 Roofs . 11 On the Design Bar. click (Trim/Extend). you cannot use TAB to select the chain of walls.Insulation on Metal Deck .EPDM. 8 Select the walls to create a closed loop. click Finish Roof. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.Because the walls are not continuous. as shown: 9 On the Design Bar. and click OK. select Steel Truss . Instead you select walls on each side of the building and then use the Trim tool to create a closed loop sketch.

and click to select it. The roof has been created. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 581 . click (Draw Split Lines). 15 Use the TAB key to highlight the roof. double-click Roof. double-click the section head to open the section view. In the next steps. 13 Zoom in to the upper left area of the roof.Open a section view 12 In the drawing area. You use this tool to split the roof slab into 6 regions so that you can modify the slope independently. but it is a flat object with no slope or indication of roof drainage. Add split lines to segment the roof 14 In the Project Browser. you alter the shape of the slab to represent a roof drainage layout. under Floor Plans. 16 On the Options Bar.

19 Select the lower endpoint of the arc line. and select the midpoint of the bottom horizontal roof line You create a split line vertically down the center. 20 Using the same method. move the cursor horizontally to the left. and select a point on the opposite roof line. 18 Move the cursor down. 582 | Chapter 15 Roofs .17 Select the midpoint of the top horizontal roof line. add a second horizontal split line beginning at the top endpoint of the arc.

You modify the points individually. on the Options Bar. In this exercise. Next. click 22 Click to add a point close to the center of each section.The roof is now divided into 6 sections. You could also select multiple points and change them all at once from the Options Bar. Add elevation points 21 With the roof still selected. 23 On the Options Bar. (Add points). Layout tools in Revit Architecture such as reference planes and dimensions can be used to more accurately place editing points on a roof slab. you begin to shape the slab by adding points for the roof drains and modifying the elevations of the points and edges. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 583 . exact placement of the points is not important. click (Modify Sub-Elements).

for the dimension. Edit the roof edges 26 On the Options Bar. 584 | Chapter 15 Roofs . specify a -2'' dimension for the remaining 5 points. enter -2''. and press ENTER. The dimensional value is relative to the roof plane. The lines on the roof now represent the ridges of the deformed slab shape. click (Modify Sub-Elements). 25 Using the same method.24 Select the point in the upper left region of the roof.

and press ENTER.27 Press and hold CTRL. double-click the section head to view the additional affects of the shape editing. and select all of the roof edges. including the interior edges of the roof regions. Creating a Low Slope Roof | 585 . and on the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. as shown: 28 On the Options Bar. for Elevation. enter 4''. 31 Select the roof slab. Modify the construction of the slab type 30 In the drawing area. Clicking Modify or pressing ESC exits the editing mode and the shape edits are applied to the slab. click (Properties). click Modify.

for the Thermal/Air Layer. 34 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 586 | Chapter 15 Roofs . After you create a roof. but in this case you want the insulation layer to create the slope. under Construction. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. gutters. click Edit/New. and Soffits on page 586. The entire slab is sloped. The insulation now tapers from the edges to the drain in the center. In some cases this type of slope is desired. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 39 Proceed to the next lesson. on the File menu. and soffits. you can easily create its fascia. 37 If you want to save your changes. and soffits in Revit Architecture. you learn how to create roof fascia.The slab has not responded exactly as intended. click Edit. for Structure. 35 Click OK 3 times. You edit the construction of the slab type to achieve this result. click Save As. gutters. Creating Fascia. 36 View the results in the section view. Gutters. 38 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. Gutters. By making the insulation layer variable. the slope will be accommodated in the insulation layer. select Variable. Creating Fascia. leaving the other layers to maintain the original plane of placement for the roof. and Soffits In this lesson.

rfa and M_Gutter-Cove.rvt. click Training Files. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Creating Roof Fascia | 587 . select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and open Common\c_Condominium. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. under Construction.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 8 In the Name dialog. 3 Press CTRL. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. and click OK twice. 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. click (Properties). and click Open. and click OK. click Training Files. enter Built-up Fascia.rfa. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia.

13 On the Design Bar. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. Creating Gutters on page 588. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Creating Gutters In this exercise. click (Properties). 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. c_Condominium. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter.11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 588 | Chapter 15 Roofs .rvt. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify to exit the Fascia command.

click in the Value field for Material. 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. Creating Soffits on page 590. click Duplicate. Creating Gutters | 589 .3 In the Properties dialog. under Construction. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Edit/New. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. . and click OK. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and click OK three times. 10 Click to place the gutter. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. 11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model.

2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 15 Roofs . click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. expand Views. 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. c_Condominium. 3 On the Design Bar. and double-click Roof. click Pick Roofs.Creating Soffits In this exercise. you learn how to place a roof soffit. expand Floor Plans. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. expand 3D Views.4 Select the roof. click Finish Sketch. click Join Geometry. and double-click 3D. and then select the soffit to join them. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 Select the roof. expand Views (all). 5 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Tools menu. Creating Soffits | 591 .

592 | Chapter 15 Roofs .9 If you want to save your changes. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Save As. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. on the File menu.

You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas.rvt. under Length. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. select Millimeters. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. click Project Units. For Unit Suffix. select mm. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. Click OK. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. 2 In the Project Units dialog. 593 . If you are using metric units. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. your values will be different. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. 3 Under Area. and open Common\c_Area. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. select Square meters. Finally. click Training Files.Area Analysis 16 In this tutorial. click Format and specify the following: ■ For Units. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. In the final exercise. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson.

View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. click the Room Calculations tab. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. expand Views (all). For Unit Suffix. select 2 decimal places. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. click OK. 594 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. or 0. 4 In the Project Units dialog. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. and verify that Level 1 is the active view. click the Area Schemes tab. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. the system-computed height defaults to the level. 9 Click Cancel. and click Room and Area.■ ■ ■ For Rounding. Click OK. You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. expand Floor Plans. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. click Settings. You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. These schemes define spatial relationships. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. select m2. right-click in the Design Bar. it is not necessary in this exercise.

and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type. 13 In the Project Browser. If you select No. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. you must manually add these boundary lines.Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. click Area. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). you must select one of the reference lines. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. rather than the area tag. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 595 . area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. To modify the area. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. under Views (all). click Area Plan. 12 When the informational dialog displays. When you select Yes in this dialog. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Click OK. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. forming a closed loop.

18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. 21 On the Options Bar. When you pick the walls. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 596 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . Expand Area Plans (Rentable). When you add area boundary lines.NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. click Area Boundary. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click Area Plan. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. and store area. common areas. you can either draw them or pick them. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. you create a new area plan for rentable space. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. If you do not select this option. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. Next. the area boundary lines do not update automatically. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). Click OK. Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls.

click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click ■ ■ . do the following: Enter Tenant 1 for Name. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 597 . click Area. click Modify. Select Office area for Area Type. 25 On the Design Bar. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar. 27 On the Options Bar. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. and click to select the area.23 On the Design Bar.

In the Element Properties dialog. click ■ ■ ■ . 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model.■ Click OK. 598 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . do the following: ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. 32 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Design Bar. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify and select the area. do the following: Enter Tenant 2 for Name. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Click OK. 31 On the Design Bar. Select Office area for Area Type. click Area. Select Building Common Area for Area Type.

Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. 35 Add an area to the building model core. enter Core for Name. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. and select Store Area for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 599 .■ Click OK.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click Color Scheme Legend. 37 On the File menu. In this exercise. and click to place the legend. name the project Area-in progress. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise.rvt.Notice that within the two store areas. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. 600 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis . and click Save. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. In the next exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. click Save.

Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. select Area Type and click Add. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. 7 Under Available fields. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. 8 Add the fields Area and Name. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. click Schedule/Quantities.3 When the dialog displays. select Areas (Rentable). Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 601 . and click OK. click the Fields tab.

The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule.9 Click OK. 602 | Chapter 16 Area Analysis .

You use mass floors to divide the mass at each level of the building model. and floors.Massing 17 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. You assign the default wall. you then need to update the building face. After you make building elements. Using Massing Tools In this lesson. At any time. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. 603 . you can specify the view to display massing elements. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. and perimeter information. you can create a schedule to assign usages and to analyze the design. and roofs. building elements. floor. curtain systems. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. or both. volume. After creating mass floors. In this tutorial. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. You create a mass floor schedule and assign mass usage to analyze floor area. If you modify a massing face. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. floors. roofs.

and cutting geometry. click Training Files. Add a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. and click Massing. under Floor Plans.Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.rvt. 604 | Chapter 17 Massing . click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar. click Create Mass. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The Design Bar title changes to Mass. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. sweeps. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar.

and click . Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. under Materials and Finishes. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 19 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. under Constraints. click 18 On the Options Bar. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 605 .6 On the Sketch Design Bar. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. click the value for Material. select Mass (Opaque). and on the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. and on the Options Bar. click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. for Offset. 20 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. under Views (all). click Lines. and click OK. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 25000. under Floor Plans. (Pick Lines). for Extrusion End. double-click Level 1. click Extrusion Properties. 10 In the Materials dialog. 15 On the View Control Bar. enter 1550 mm. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Sketch Design Bar. click (Default 3D View). for Name. (Line). click Lines.

highlight the larger form. 30 In the drawing area. enter 27500. and click OK. click Extrusion Properties. 29 In the Work Plane dialog. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 In the Materials dialog. under Views (all). select Pick a plane. for Name. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click {3D} to see the results. select Mass (Transparent). 606 | Chapter 17 Massing . and click OK. for Extrusion End. under Elevations (Building Elevation). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. click the value for Material. double-click West. under Constraints. Continue creation of next massing form 27 In the Project Browser. enter 25000. under Materials and Finishes. for Extrusion Start.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . 25 On the Design Bar. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. and click OK. under Views (all). press TAB to highlight the entire face. TIP If necessary.

and on the Options Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 607 . and clear Chain. Next. 36 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. 32 On the Sketch Design Bar. you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click (Arc passing through three points). and click to select the line start point. 34 On the Options Bar. click (Draw). click Sketch the blend base 33 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 37 On the Options Bar. 35 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown. (Pick Lines). click Lines.31 Click to select the face. The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint.

click (Move). click Edit Top. 608 | Chapter 17 Massing . 41 On the Edit toolbar. Sketch the blend top 44 On the Design Bar. click Modify. on the Options Bar. and delete the vertical construction line. under Views (all). click Lines and. 43 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.TIP If you do not see this option. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. under Elevations (Building Elevation). (Line). 40 Select the arc and the horizontal line. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 46 On the Design Bar. click 47 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 45 In the Project Browser. 38 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 39 On the Design Bar. double-click East. 42 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown.

verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected. you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. 52 On the Design Bar. 51 In the Element Properties dialog. click (Default 3D View). and that -92000 is specified for Second End. click 49 Create an arc as shown. 53 On the View toolbar. 54 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 609 . click Finish Sketch. In this exercise. for Material. 50 On the Design Bar. and click OK. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model on page 610. (Arc passing through three points).48 On the Options Bar. click Blend Properties. In the next exercise.

place 3 more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. double-click Level 1. and select Chain. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. select the mass. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise.rvt.Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 610 | Chapter 17 Massing . click (Line). Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. click Lines. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 10 On the Options Bar. m_Massing_Start. click (Pick Lines) and enter 15000 for Offset. under Views (all). as shown. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. 1 In the Project Browser. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. under Floor Plans. 9 On the Design Bar. 4 On the Options bar. 7 Using the same technique. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. click Ref Plane.

you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. In this exercise. 11 Enter SI for intersection snap. 16 On the Design Bar. enter 12000 and for Extrusion Start. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Extrusion Properties. The curved form you create connects 2 pieces of the sloped face side of the massing. 12 Sketch 2 additional void extrusions as shown. click Finish Sketch. 14 Under Constraints. Using Swept Blends In this exercise. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 Click OK. Using Swept Blends | 611 .NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. snap the corners to the intersections. click (Default 3D View). When sketching each extrusion. enter 0. for Extrusion End. 17 On the View toolbar. on the View Control Bar. you add a swept blend shape to the massing study created in the previous exercises. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown.

Training File ■ Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Swept Blend. Select the midpoint of the lower face of the middle mass. 2 On the Mass tab of the Design Bar. 612 | Chapter 17 Massing . m_Massing_Start. select a point below the mass elements. 4 On the Options Bar.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises and the resulting building model. and click Lines. double-click Level 1. ■ Select the lower left endpoint of the left mass. under Floor Plans. ■ For the radius.rvt. Sketch a 2D path 1 In the Project Browser. click 5 Sketch the arc: ■ (Arc passing through three points). click Sketch 2D Path.

10 On the Design Bar. From a 3D view you can sketch the profiles for the 2 ends of the swept blend. 11 On the Options Bar. and sketch a 6000mm x 6000mm rectangle on the face of the mass. 8 On the Design Bar. 12 Select the right endpoint of the arc as the lower right endpoint of the rectangle. and click Edit. 6 On the Design Bar.Use a radius for the arc (about 180 degrees) that will make the beginning and end planes of the sweep parallel to the face of the existing mass. verify that <By Sketch> is selected. click (Default 3D View). click Finish Path. click (Rectangle). Using Swept Blends | 613 . 9 On the Options Bar. as shown. The only way to align these elements is visually. click Profile 1. Sketch profile 1 7 On the View toolbar. click Lines.

13 On the Tools toolbar. click Finish Profile. click (Align). 15 On the Design Bar. 17 Using the same method. Sketch profile 2 16 On the Design Bar. as shown: ■ ■ 614 | Chapter 17 Massing . and sketch a rectangle on the face of the mass. Align the top of the rectangle with the top edge of the cut extrusion. 14 Align the left edge of the rectangle to the mass edge. sketch a second rectangle: ■ Click to position the lower left corner of the rectangle at the left endpoint of the arc. (The size of the rectangle is not important because you align it to the mass edges.) Align the right sketch line of the rectangle with the right edge of the mass. click Profile 2. and press ESC.

under Materials and Finishes. click Swept Blend Properties. and click .18 On the Design Bar. click Finish Swept Blend. Change the material properties of the mass 19 On the Design Bar. click <By Category>. Using Swept Blends | 615 . 20 In the Element Properties dialog. 23 On the Design Bar. 21 In the Materials dialog. select Mass (Transparent). 22 Click OK twice. click Finish Profile.

click Finish Mass. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. 616 | Chapter 17 Massing . you create new family types from a mass family file. In this exercise.rvt. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it.24 On the Design Bar. 25 Click File menu ➤ Save As. you added a swept blend shape to the massing study. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. Finally. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. 26 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete.

and for Name. 4 In the Family Types dialog.rfa. 8 For Width. click New. Creating New Mass Family Types | 617 . for Height. enter 68000 mm. click Family Types. enter 18000 mm. and click OK. 5 Click New. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. enter 11000 mm. 2 In the Family Types dialog. In this exercise.rfa. enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Apply. and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box. and click Apply. 3 In the Name dialog. you opened a mass family file and created 3 new types of this family file. enter 6000 mm. 6 For Width. for Width. for Depth. enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. enter 9000 mm. under Other. for Height. 9 Click OK. enter 15000mm. enter 18000 mm. for Depth. Create 3 family types 1 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. and click Apply. 7 Click New. enter 12000 mm.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. and click OK. and for Name. for Height. for Depth. enter 46000mm.

under Views (all). 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. click Training Files. (Show Mass) to show the massing model. on the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 6 Open the Box-Training. 4 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place. Semi Barrel Vault. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. you load and place the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.rvt.rfa family files. and Triangle.rfa. click Place Mass. 618 | Chapter 17 Massing . as shown. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. 1 If not already selected. 8 In the Type Selector.Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. In the left pane of the Open dialog. double-click Site. 2 In the Project Browser.rfa. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 On the View Control Bar. click Training Files. Arc Dome. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa.

select Rotate after placement. and click (Element Properties). 17 Press CTRL. for the Material parameter. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. click Modify. select the 3 boxes. select the triangle. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. 24 On the Design Bar. click (Element Properties). enter 90 for Angle. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family. click Modify. and click to place the mass. 16 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. click Place Mass. as shown. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 23 On the Options Bar. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm. for the Material parameter. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. specify Mass (Opaque). and on the Options Bar. 12 In the Element Properties dialog.10 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. specify Mass (Transparent). 25 In the drawing area. 20 In the Type Selector. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 619 . 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. 11 Select the box.

specify Mass (Transparent).26 Select the triangle. specify Mass (Opaque). select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click OK twice. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. and click (Element Properties). 620 | Chapter 17 Massing . 30 Place the box mass family as shown. for the Material parameter. for the Material parameter. 29 In the Type Selector. and click OK twice. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). 34 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. 31 Select the box and click (Element Properties).

You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. NOTE When you join geometry. the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. you join these mass elements. you join and modify the mass elements that you placed in the previous exercise. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar. click 2 On the Tools toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Training File ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. In this exercise. Joining Mass Elements | 621 . you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise.Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed overlap.rvt file. In the next exercise. (Join Geometry).

3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. on the Edit toolbar. 622 | Chapter 17 Massing . Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. click (Mirror). 6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. under Views (all). 4 Select the triangle. Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected.

16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle. 17 Press ESC to see the result. click (Default 3D View). 12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. 11 Move the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. and then select the triangle. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. click (Draw). for Axis. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. (Join Geometry). as shown. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. enter SM. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar.8 On the Options Bar. Joining Mass Elements | 623 .

(If Design Options is already selected. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise.In this exercise. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson.rvt. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. and select the triangle mass element. 2 On the Window menu. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. click (Add to Design Option Set). Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson. do not clear the check mark. 624 | Chapter 17 Massing . you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. click Modify.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar. you joined mass elements together. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options.

select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. enter 90. 14 In the drawing area. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material parameter. 18 Place 3 arc domes as shown. Mass Elements in Design Options | 625 . select Sloped (primary). 17 In the Type Selector. double-click Site. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. 5 In the Project Browser. and click OK. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H. 8 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans. 12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Place arc dome mass elements 16 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 7 In the Type Selector. 11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. click Place Mass. and click (Element Properties). 10 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. select Rotate after placement.4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. for Angle. Place semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Place Mass. clear Curved. click Modify. and click OK twice. specify Mass (Transparent). under Views (all).

and click (Element Properties). 19 On the Design Bar.TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. and click OK twice. 626 | Chapter 17 Massing . under 3D Views. Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Modify. under Views (all). select the three arc domes. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. under Elevations. TIP To find the correct shapes. and watch the status bar. under Views (all). click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. clear Sloped. select Curved. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. 23 On the View Control Bar. 27 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. Create a Design Option set 25 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. for the Material parameter. 24 Move the 3 arc domes to the position shown. While pressing CTRL. specify Mass (Transparent). double-click {3D}. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. double-click North. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Design Options toolbar. click (Add to Design Option Set). 22 In the Project Browser. 28 In the Project Browser.

and click OK. 34 Close the warning that displays. 32 On the Design Options toolbar. You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option. and click Close.rvt. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog.29 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 35 On the File menu. click Make Primary. click the Design Options tab. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces. you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. 33 In the Design Options dialog. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 627 . 31 Click the value for Design Option. select Curved and. click (Design Options). In this exercise. select Curved from the Design Option menu. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. under Option. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you can make it the primary option.

under Views (all). 2 On the View toolbar. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 5 In the Type Selector. double-click {3D}. 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown. click Training Files. select Basic Wall: Exterior . you pick massing faces to create walls. click (Pick Faces). select Wall Centerline. 1 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. Create walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and for Loc Line. 3 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southeast. 6 On the Options Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 628 | Chapter 17 Massing .Brick on CMU.Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. click (Show Mass) to show the massing model.

alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. 8 In the Project Browser. 15 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 5. 12 On the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. 16 In the Type Selector. under Views (all). Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 629 . double-click Level 3. ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed.The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Floor Plans. 14 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 1. under Views (all). under Views (all). under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. click Wall by Face. 9 On the Design Bar.

under Views (all). 20 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 9. If desired. 21 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. 19 In the Project Browser. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar.18 Select all the faces shown in red. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. you can select the overlapping curtain wall. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. click Wall by Face. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. 630 | Chapter 17 Massing . You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping.

Curtain Systems. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 7 In the Mass Floors dialog. and click OK. double-click {3D}. The following information is available for mass floors: mass floor area. Creating Floors by Picking Masses In this exercise.rvt. click Mass Floors. 8 On the Design Bar. perimeter. and Walls. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Revit Architecture generates a mass floor for each selected level that intersects the mass. When you select levels. click Modify. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 1 In the Project Browser. and exterior surface area. clear Curtain Panels.In this exercise. under Views (all). 4 Click OK. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 631 . select all levels. volume. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. you pick mass elements and select levels to create floors. you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. 6 On the Options Bar.

and select the three15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. select Levels 1-4. 13 On the Design Bar. 632 | Chapter 17 Massing . 10 Press CTRL.9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Northeast. 12 In the Mass Floors dialog. click Mass Floors. and click OK. 11 On the Options Bar. click Modify.

NOTE The semi vault barrel elements are the 2 sloped components in the front of the view. 16 On the Options Bar. clear Exclude Design Options (to allow you to select the semi vault barrel elements in the next step). The box mass is the long box element in the middle of the model.14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click Mass Floors. select Level 1. Creating Floors by Picking Masses | 633 . and select the 2 semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 17 In the Mass Floors dialog. 15 Press CTRL.

select Floor Area. 634 | Chapter 17 Massing . under Available fields.rvt. Create a mass floor schedule 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. add the following additional fields: ■ ■ Usage Mass: Family and Type You use the Mass: Family and Type field to help sort the schedule so it is easier to assign usage to the different masses. under Category. and click Add. you created floors by selecting mass elements and levels for the floors. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Floor Volume.In this exercise. 4 Using the same method. The Floor Area. and click OK. select Mass Floor. and select Level. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Mass Study Analysis In this exercise. you generate mass floor schedules for the hotel and retail massing in the model. press and hold SHIFT. schedules can be created using the mass floors. Now that the floor areas have been added to the mass objects. Floor Perimeter. and Level fields should display under Scheduled fields (in order).

select Mass: Family and Type. for Usage. Assign usage values to the mass components 8 In the first entry in the schedule. The Mass Floor Schedule displays. 7 Adjust the schedule columns so the entire field is displayed. NOTE Double-click the column divider in the schedule header to automatically expand the column to fit the text.5 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. you can select it from the drop-down list for subsequent entries. enter Retail. 9 Enter or select the appropriate usage value for all items in the schedule. 6 Verify that Itemize every instance is selected. and click OK. Mass Family Box-Training: 1500 mm x 1800 mm x 1200 mm Usage Retail Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 635 . for Sort by. according to the following guidelines: NOTE After you enter a usage value in the schedule.

click Edit. expand Schedules/Quantities. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. under Other. 13 With Usage selected. 12 In the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. and click Move Up until Level is listed second. 636 | Chapter 17 Massing . the column Mass: Family and Type can be deleted. 14 Select Level. After you assign usage.Mass Family Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 1100 mm Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm Mass 1: Mass 1 Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500 Usage Atrium Atrium Hotel Atrium Modify the schedule to calculate hotel floor area 10 In the Project Browser. under Scheduled fields (in order). click Move Up until Usage is listed first. You can also arrange the schedule so it is more useful for analyzing the massing. and click Remove. select Mass: Family and Type. and click Properties. right-click Mass Floor Schedule.

20 Click in the title of the schedule. 16 On the Formatting tab. and select Grand totals. and click Rename. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Creating a Mass Study Analysis | 637 . 24 In the Project Browser. for Sort by. select Usage. 23 In the Rename View dialog. and enter Hotel Floor Area Schedule. select Usage. for Filter by. in the field under Filter by. and in the field below. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 In the Project Browser. for Field formatting. select Level. You create separate schedules to calculate retail and hotel space independently. under Fields. select Calculate totals. enter Hotel. and click Properties. 19 Click OK twice.15 On the Sorting/Grouping tab. TIP The values from these floor area schedules can be tagged in section. 18 On the Filter tab. enter Retail (instead of Hotel). right-click Retail Floor Area Schedule. Create a retail floor area schedule 21 In the Project Browser. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. for Then by. for Filter. under Other. for Filter. right-click Hotel Floor Area Schedule. enter Retail Floor Area Schedule. click Edit. 27 Click OK twice. select Floor Area. right-click Copy of Hotel Floor Area Schedule. and click OK. elevation. click Edit. under Other. and click OK. and plan views.

under Views (all). 1 In the Project Browser. and floor volume information of hotel and retail massing in the model.rvt. by level. you created mass floor schedules. 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click {3D}. The mass floor schedules list. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise.In this exercise. click Roof by Face. 638 | Chapter 17 Massing . the floor area. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. floor perimeter. Create roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. you pick massing faces to create roofs.

Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 639 . 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. click Create Roof. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. select Basic Roof : Generic . NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof. 7 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest. 5 On the Options Bar.4 In the Type Selector.400mm. and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. Your model should now look as shown.

10 With the Roof by Face command still selected. and click OK. 640 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. Curtain Systems. 13 Using the same method. and Walls. create the same roof on the swept blend (curved) mass.8 Using the method you just learned. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 9 Use the ViewCube to orient the view back to the Northeast. select Curtain Panels. select Sloped Glazing. in the Type Selector. click Create Roof. 11 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. 12 On the Options Bar. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. 15 Click the Model Categories tab. 14 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.

double-click {3D}.Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. verify that Select Multiple is selected. Creating Curtain Systems | 641 . 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Views (all). 3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm. click Create System. 5 Press CTRL. 4 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face.

select the blended form on the in-place mass.7 Using the same method. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. create a curtain system for each of the other 2 domes. 642 | Chapter 17 Massing .

create a curtain system for the walls of the swept blend (curved mass). 11 Using the same method. Creating Curtain Systems | 643 . click Create System.9 On the Options Bar. 10 Use the ViewCube to orient the view to the Southwest.

rvt. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces. and modify building elements to resize with the new mass family. you change the size of an existing mass family. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise.12 Click Modify to exit the command. 644 | Chapter 17 Massing . In this exercise. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

and click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 645 . clear Curtain Panels. 8 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. 4 Select the box mass family as shown. 7 On the Options Bar. click Modify. for Width. 2 On the View menu. Next. 9 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. Floors. clear Exclude Design Options.1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Model Categories tab. enter 30000. 6 On the Design Bar. click Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. under Views (all). double-click Site. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click OK. and click (Element Properties). Roofs. and Walls.

13 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the 3 walls shown. The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. under Floor Plans. 11 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. 12 On the View Control Bar. under Views (all). In the next steps. 646 | Chapter 17 Massing .10 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe.

14 On the Options Bar. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 647 . Also.TIP To select the curtain wall. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. you want to select the smaller one. click Remake. click OK. 15 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. 16 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 17 Select the roof as shown.

18 On the Options Bar. 19 Select the arc dome curtain system. and click Remake. click Remake. 648 | Chapter 17 Massing .

you changed the size of an existing mass family. Training File ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 1 Open the 3D view.rvt. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family. click (Show Mass) to turn off massing. In this exercise. Notice that the values have changed in the schedule to reflect the changes in the mass elements. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements.20 In the Project Browser. Turn off massing 2 On the View toolbar. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 649 . under Schedules/Quantities. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. double-click Retail Floor Area Schedule.

4 Rename the view 3D . under 3D Views. and click OK. right-click {3D}.Massing only. 5 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab.The 3D view now shows only the building shell. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. 9 Select Mass. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 650 | Chapter 17 Massing . click All to select all categories. 3 In the Project Browser.

to the building shell. you can continue adding additional Revit Architecture modeling components. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 651 . This concludes the massing tutorial. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. You might create the model shown. If desired. such as columns and an extruded roof.In this exercise.

652 .

you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. You can also nest groups within other groups. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. In another exercise. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. By grouping objects. and modify repetitive units. hotel rooms. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. In this tutorial. After you create a model group. the host group is also updated automatically. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. Modifying. you also simplify the modification process. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. In this exercise. Creating. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. The new group is considered nested within the host group. place. all instances in the building model are updated. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. you not only simplify their placement. Training File ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project. you add the new model group to a previously created group. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. For example. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. and typical office layouts. When you make changes to a nested group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. You mirror one instance of the group.Grouping 18 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2009. You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. 653 . or with those working on a different project.

■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Click in the drawing area. NOTE You may need to scroll the left pane to see the Training Files folder.rvt. and double-click First Floor. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. enter ZR. click Training Files. 654 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. expand Views (all). and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium.

and click OK. 4 On the Edit toolbar. Creating and Placing a Group | 655 . The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. click (Group).3 Draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. enter Typical Kitchen.

656 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen. click Modify. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin.Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area.

10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. 13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. under Groups. and click Create Instance. right-click Typical Kitchen. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. Creating and Placing a Group | 657 . 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.

15 On the Options Bar. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. clear Copy.14 On the Edit toolbar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. click (Mirror). NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following image. 658 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

Creating and Placing a Group | 659 . click (Rotate). and on the Edit toolbar. 19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen.17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

and one rotated. select the group and use the arrow keys on your keyboard to make any minor adjustments. You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. 20 On the Design Bar.NOTE If the kitchen is not placed exactly as shown in the following images. one mirrored. as shown. 21 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. click Modify. 660 | Chapter 18 Grouping .

When you finish editing. Modifying a Group | 661 . Modifying a Group In this exercise. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. press TAB to highlight the wall. 2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. click Save As.Save the training file 22 On the File menu.rvt. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise.rvt. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and click to select it. all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. you make changes to an instance of a group. and click Save. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair.

8 On the Design Bar. Click icon to exclude in this group instance.). Click icon to exclude in this group instance. click Modify.). and click to select the door. 662 | Chapter 18 Grouping .).). (Restore excluded group 5 Click (Group Member. NOTE To display an excluded element.3 Click (Group Member. press TAB. 7 Click (Group Member. 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click to select the wall. 4 Move the cursor over the door. Click icon to exclude in this group instance. and click member to group instance. press TAB. select the element.

127mm. move the cursor to the left. and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Door. click Modify. Modifying a Group | 663 . select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 12 On the Design Bar. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. 10 In the Type Selector. click Wall. 13 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance.Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall : Generic . 14 In the Type Selector.

click Edit Group. In edit group mode. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening.17 On the Design Bar. 18 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Modify. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. 23 In the drawing area. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 664 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. 21 On the Options Bar. move the cursor up.

you add the Typical Kitchen group.25 On the Design Bar. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Nesting Groups | 665 . created in an earlier lesson. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. for Unconnected Height. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish. enter 1000. click 28 For Base Offset. under Constraints. and on the Options Bar. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. and click OK. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. click Modify. (Element Properties). Nesting Groups In this exercise. enter 2134. 26 Select the opening. which acts as the host. 29 On the group editor toolbar.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar.Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. click (Add to Group). 5 In the drawing area. click Edit Group. in the Project Browser. 666 | Chapter 18 Grouping .rvt. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 4 On the group editor toolbar. double-click First Floor. select the Typical Kitchen group.

6 Press TAB. Nesting Groups | 667 . 7 On the group editor toolbar. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. 8 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. double-click Second Floor. select the wall between the folding doors. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group. click Finish. and each of the bifold doors.

10 Click File menu ➤ Save. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. 668 | Chapter 18 Grouping . and filled regions. such as text. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. you add door tags to a group. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. such as door and window tags. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. In the next exercise. under Floor Plans.rvt. double-click First Floor. and create an attached detail group containing the tags. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser.

click Filled Region. 7 On the Design Bar. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle. and select a point below the left elevator. 6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click Finish Sketch. click to draw a rectangular region.3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 669 . 4 On the Options Bar.

click to add an arc leader. 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 On the Edit toolbar. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. and click OK. and on the Design Bar. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. 15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 9 On the Options Bar. 670 | Chapter 18 Grouping . click (Group). as shown. 12 Enter Tile. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. 16 In the drawing area. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. click Text. click Modify. and select the text note and the filled region.

double-click Second Floor. under Floor Plans. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile. click Modify 23 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. under Groups. expand Detail. click Modify. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 22 On the Design Bar. Add a group instance to a different view 19 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click to place the detail group in front of the elevators. it cannot be added to a group in the same Using Attached Detail Groups | 671 . and click Create Instance.18 On the Design Bar. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 20 In the Project Browser. 21 In the drawing area. Because the detail group contains variables.

m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Training File Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click Tag ➤ By Category.rvt. double-click First Floor. 4 Place door tags (10 total) in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. 3 On the Options Bar. draw a selection box (lower-right corner to upper-left corner) around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. NOTE Your door tag numbers may be different. clear Leader. as shown. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 672 | Chapter 18 Grouping .manner that a drawing component can be added.

and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. 9 On the Edit toolbar.7 On the Options Bar. double-click Second Floor. for Attached Detail Group Name. 11 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Door Tags. expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. click (Group). click Check None. 8 In the Filter dialog. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click (Filter Selection). 10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Using Attached Detail Groups | 673 . and click OK.

the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group. click Place Detail. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson.13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. click Modify. 14 On the Options Bar. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. therefore. Training File 674 | Chapter 18 Grouping . you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. you can then work with it in the context of the new project. When you load the group from the library into a new project. 16 On the Design Bar.

click Desktop. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Saving and Loading Groups | 675 . right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used. browse to the Desktop. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). Load the group in a new project 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. and click OK. for Create new. click Modify. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt.Continue using the training file saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click Save. click OK. 3 For File name. 12 On the Design Bar. 5 In the New Project dialog. expand Groups. 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. and click Open. and expand Model. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. A warning dialog displays. accept the default template file. and click Save Group. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. verify that Project is selected. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. under Groups\Model. and click Create Instance. In this case. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor.rvt. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. verify that Same as group name is selected. select 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group.

20 On the Options Bar. When a group is converted to a link. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. click Link. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Modify. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. select the linked Revit model. click Remove Link. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project. 676 | Chapter 18 Grouping . 17 On the Design Bar. click OK. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 24 In the message dialog. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.rvt file is added as a link to the project. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group.rvt. verify that Attached Details is selected only. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. click Bind. 18 In the Project Browser. 23 In the confirmation dialog. click Training Files. expand Revit Links. and the link is removed. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate.Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. click Use Existing.

Using Site Tools In this lesson. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you add a building pad to the site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. You add property lines manually.Site 19 In this tutorial. convert the data to a table. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. 677 . and then modify the data. You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2009 to add and modify site components within a project. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. In the final exercises. and walkways. islands.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. click Point. and open Metric\m_First_Project. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Site. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface. and click Site.The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. 678 | Chapter 19 Site . enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. This project file was created using the default metric template. In the second part of this exercise. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. click Toposurface. expand Views (all). you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. Using the first method. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a toposurface using two different methods. right-click in the Design Bar.rvt.

Use the following illustration as a reference. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. Creating a Toposurface | 679 . Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point.5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide.

11 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. enter an absolute elevation of 6000mm. 15000mm. 12000mm. under Additional Contours. 680 | Chapter 19 Site .8 On the Options Bar. and 18000mm absolute elevations. Use the following illustration as a reference. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000mm. TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. and click OK. 12 On the Settings menu. enter 1500mm. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. under Increment. click Site Settings. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000mm elevation points inside the 3000mm contour.

on the Standard toolbar. and press ENTER. click the elevation value.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. click to delete it. under Views (all). click to view it at various angles. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 16 On the View toolbar. Creating a Toposurface | 681 . 14 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). enter 1000mm. (SteeringWheels). modify the level names and elevations. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Modify. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. and double-click South. Before importing the contour data. 15 On the View Control Bar.

and press ENTER. rename the level Base Site Elevation. double-click Site. 25 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Preserve. 30 On the Edit menu. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. under Floor Plans. 28 On the Design Bar.21 Click the Level 2 text. 682 | Chapter 19 Site . 23 Click the Level 1 text. 29 Select the imported topography. click Pin Position. click Training Files. Until it is exploded. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. For Colors. and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. 24 In the Project Browser. click Modify. it is considered an import symbol. rename the level Basement. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. Click Open. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. For Layers. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. and press ENTER. select Specify. Verify that Current view only is not selected. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. and click OK. click Yes. under Views (all). You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import.

33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. When you select the import symbol. click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. and then click OK. 32 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. when the edges highlight. select it. click the Annotation Categories tab. 36 On the Design Bar. and click OK. clear C_INDX. Creating a Toposurface | 683 . click Toposurface. 34 Under Visibility. clear Elevations. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. click Modify. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Notice the elevation symbols are displayed.31 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog.

42 On the View toolbar. Using the first method. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. click (Default 3D View). Using the second method. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Surface. and click Save.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. name the project Site-in progress. click (SteeringWheels). you add property lines using two methods. 43 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Adding Property Lines on page 684. 39 On the Design Bar. Notice that the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. this project file is required in its current state. 684 | Chapter 19 Site . 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. 40 On the View toolbar. Adding Property Lines In this exercise.

Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. and click OK. click Lines. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. under Floor Plans. On the Design Bar. click Lines. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Adding Property Lines | 685 . 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. select Create property lines by sketching. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. 4 On the Design Bar. Select and delete the right vertical line. Click Modify. Site-in progress. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. click Property Line. do so before continuing.

select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. to delete them. 6 On the Design Bar. click 12 On the Design Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. select the lines. add an arc line on the right. click OK.■ Using the 3-point Arc tool. click Finish Sketch. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click OK. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. and click OK. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. click Property Line. select Edit Table. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. on the Standard toolbar. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. A warning dialog is displayed. 8 On the Options Bar. 686 | Chapter 19 Site . when they highlight. 9 In the warning dialog.

If the gap is not closed. This means there is no gap in the property lines. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments. click to place the property lines. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E Notice that after you complete the last line. 15 Starting in Row #1. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu.14 In the Property Lines dialog. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. 16 Click OK. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. Adding Property Lines | 687 . 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. review your data entry and make necessary corrections. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor. 19 In the Tags dialog.

24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. you created two sets of property lines. 27 On the Options Bar. click to place it. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Training Files. you modify site settings and contour line visibility. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. 30 On the View Control Bar. the original DWG file remains visible in the view. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. The tags display more prominently in this view. 688 | Chapter 19 Site . Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. click Tag ➤ By Category. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. and click Drafting. this project file is required in its current state. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line.rfa. In this exercise. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.dwg and click OK. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off.20 Click Load. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. 25 Under Visibility. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. In the final step. 26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 In the Tags dialog. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689. right-click in the Design Bar. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. click the Imported Categories tab. 31 Click File menu ➤ Save. clear Leader. In the next exercise. 23 On the View menu. Before adding property line segment tags. click Visibility/Graphics.

and click OK. enter the name Working Contour. click Site Settings. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. In the Object Styles dialog. click New. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. select Single Value. Under Line Pattern. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. Under Range Type. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 689 . 6 In the Object Styles dialog.Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. 2 On the Settings menu. select a shade of Brown. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. click Object Styles. under Contour Line Display. select Dash dot. select Topography. 10 Under Additional Contours. specify an interval of 1000mm passing through elevation 0. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. select Working Contour. Under Subcategory. 7 Click OK. enter 1000. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography.0mm. for Subcategory.rvt. Under Line Color. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Site-in progress.

Creating Topographic Subregions on page 690. and islands. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. In the next exercise. you create subregions in order to define roads. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 Click File menu ➤ Close. 690 | Chapter 19 Site . and islands. Click Yes when prompted to save changes. The object style subcategory. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. Working Contour. such as material. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. parking areas. you create topographic subregions to define roads. In this exercise. parking areas. The next exercise requires a new training file. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties.11 Click OK. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.

the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. Although the exact dimensions are not important. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner.rvt.Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Site. click Subregion. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 2 On the Design Bar. click Lines. Creating Topographic Subregions | 691 . try to replicate the location and proportion. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below.

and click to open the Materials dialog.NOTE In the Metric training file. click Finish Sketch.Tarmacadam for Name. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click Properties. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. select Site . under Materials and Finishes. enter Parking for Name. 8 On the Design Bar. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. and click OK. 6 In the Materials dialog. 692 | Chapter 19 Site . click the value for Material. 5 In the Element Properties dialog.

Creating Topographic Subregions | 693 . and double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans.Tarmacadam. 14 On the Options Bar. click Edit Boundary. 12 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. expand Schedules/Quantities. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. double-click Site. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site .9 On the View Control Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. they display within this schedule. You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region. As you create new subregions. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser.

under Schedules/Quantities. under Floor Plans. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. click Lines. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete. 16 On the Design Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. double-click Site. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Within each subregion.TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 694 | Chapter 19 Site . click Subregion. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. 18 In the Project Browser. Notice that the project area has increased. click Finish Sketch. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Delete overlapping lines. 20 On the View Control Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. In this training project. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser.

30 In the Project Browser. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. 29 On the View Control Bar. and click to open the Materials dialog. 28 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass for Name. under Materials and Finishes. 25 In the Element Properties dialog.Grass for Name. enter Island . under Identity Data. click Finish Sketch. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. select Site . Creating Topographic Subregions | 695 . click Properties. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information. and click OK.23 In the upper-right parking area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 26 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. under Schedules/Quantities. 24 On the Design Bar. click the value for Material.

You must sketch each region separately. 32 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete Cast-in-Situ . and apply the material Site . click Subregion. 35 On the Design Bar. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. double-click Site. Name the subregion Walkway. Notice that the schedule has been updated. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. click Lines. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. Name each region Island Grass. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. double-click Topography Schedule.Grass. 696 | Chapter 19 Site . Using the techniques learned in previous steps. under Floor Plans.walkway.31 In the Project Browser. 34 On the Design Bar.

click Finish Sketch. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. Notice that the schedule has been updated. there is still only one toposurface. 38 In the Project Browser. Creating Topographic Subregions | 697 . 37 On the Design Bar.WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. under Schedules/Quantities. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface. double-click Topography Schedule. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm.

and click Save.rvt. this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans. Grading the Toposurface on page 698. 698 | Chapter 19 Site . name the project Site tutorial-in progress. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise.39 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 40 Navigate to your preferred folder. When you use the grading tool. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.rvt. double-click Site. 2 Select the toposurface. Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Site tutorial-in progress.

3 On the Options Bar. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. Grading the Toposurface | 699 . A warning dialog is displayed. select Existing for Phase Created. select Copy Internal Points. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. 8 Select the topographic surface. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. Using Phasing on page 761. 7 In the Graded Region dialog. see the tutorial. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface. 6 On the Design Bar. click Graded Region. and click OK. click (Element Properties). and click Select and Edit. under Phasing. click Modify.

Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area.Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. 10 Press DELETE. 700 | Chapter 19 Site .

and new. 12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. demolished. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing. Grading the Toposurface | 701 .

click Point. 702 | Chapter 19 Site . 15 On the Options Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. 19 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. click Finish Surface. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. 18 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click (Default 3D View).13 Press DELETE.

Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. specify New Construction for Phase. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. you create a building pad. you can delete it. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. 23 Select the toposurface. (SteeringWheels).20 On the View toolbar. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. and click OK. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. under Phasing. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. click View Properties. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. Adding a Building Pad | 703 . specify Existing for Phase. Adding a Building Pad on page 703. click to view it at various angles. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. Therefore. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 24 On the View menu. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. Only the graded topography displays. and delete it. under Phasing. When you add a building pad. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. this project file is required in its current state. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. click View Properties. only the original toposurface displays.

click Pad. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE By default. sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. If you have an existing building model. 704 | Chapter 19 Site . the Pick Walls command is active. under Floor Plans. click Finish Sketch. Site tutorial-in progress. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. 6 On the Design Bar. double-click Site. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. click Lines. 2 On the View Control Bar.rvt. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar.

8 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 7 On the View Control Bar. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Adding Site Components on page 706. this project file is required in its current state.TIP You can slope building pads by adding a slope arrow to the sketch. Notice the new building pad. click (Default 3D View). Properties of the slope arrow specify height offsets for the slope of the pad. see Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof on page 572. Adding a Building Pad | 705 . For additional information on using slope arrows to modify geometry. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click (SteeringWheels). 9 On the View toolbar.

6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area.rvt. click Modify. under Floor Plans.90 deg. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Design Bar. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 706 | Chapter 19 Site .Adding Site Components In this exercise. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and select the parking space. double-click Site. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . you add parking and planting components to the site surface. Site tutorial-in progress. click Parking Component.

8 On the View toolbar. click (Default 3D View). Adding Site Components | 707 . TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. 7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space.NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad.

708 | Chapter 19 Site . and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.9 On the View toolbar. click (SteeringWheels). under Floor Plans. 12 In the Type Selector. choose any tree type. click Site Component. double-click Site. Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. Notice the new parking spaces. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. click (SteeringWheels). NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered.13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. click (Default 3D View). 15 On the View toolbar. and use the Orbit tool to spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. 14 On the View toolbar. In the following illustration. Adding Site Components | 709 .

710 | Chapter 19 Site . and click OK. Tagging Site and Parking Components on page 710. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. this project file is required in its current state. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. double-click Site. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. click Tag All Not Tagged. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 5 On the View menu.rvt. You also add spot dimensions to the parking area and the terrain to display the actual elevation at selected points. under Floor Plans. 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed. and click Apply. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. click Hidden Line. click Apply. Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser.

You place spot dimensions on either side of the drive entrance. You also add a spot dimension to the terrain to see how the elevation is reported. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 711 . Click up and to the left. Add spot dimensions 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The exact position of the dimensions is not important. click Spot Dimension ➤ Spot Elevation. 8 On the Options Bar. Click again to the left to position the leader. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. outside of the site. In the following exercise.Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. add 2 more spot dimensions: ■ Add a spot dimension in the lower left corner of the drive entrance. 9 Add a spot dimension to the drive entrance: ■ ■ ■ Click in the upper left corner of the drive entrance. verify that Leader and Shoulder are selected. to position the shoulder of the leader. as shown: 10 Using the same method. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces.

■ Add a spot dimension to the terrain below the drive. 712 | Chapter 19 Site . 13 Modify the display of the spot dimensions by selecting and clearing options on the Options Bar: ■ Clear Shoulder. click Modify. and select the 3 spot dimensions. 11 On the Design Bar. 12 Press and hold CTRL.

You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 14 On the Design Bar. click Modify.■ Clear Leader. you create a parking schedule. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 713 . Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. this project file is required in its current state. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules on page 713. ■ Select Leader and Shoulder.

you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges.rvt. under Views (all). 8 Under Fields. click Tile. click Close Hidden Windows. and click OK. under Space. enter Space. and under Heading. 12 In the Site plan. select Type. 6 Click the Formatting tab. 7 Under Fields. select Parking for Category.Training File Continue to use the training file you used in the previous exercise. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Schedule/Quantities. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Size. and under Heading. The parking schedule is displayed. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. select Type. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. Site tutorial-in progress. select Mark. and click Add. double-click Site. select Mark. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. 5 Under Available fields. number the first three spaces consecutively. click the Fields tab. 11 On the Window menu. 4 Under Available fields. under Floor Plans. 13 In the Parking Schedule. and click Add. 9 On the Window menu. If necessary. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. 714 | Chapter 19 Site .

Creating Parking Space Schedules | 715 . This allows you to know which space you are numbering.Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. under Space. the selected space highlights in the Site plan. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save. 14 In the Parking Schedule.

716 .

If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. After the project is shared. you must first enable Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. and so on. Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you can select which worksets are open or closed. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets 717 . select the desired workset. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. use Element Borrowing. they cannot make changes to it. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can enable Worksharing for any project. All other team members can view this workset. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. To make a workset editable. and click Editable. doors. such as annotations and dimensions. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. however. floors. Using Worksharing. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. Working in a shared project In a shared project.Sharing Projects 20 When working with large building projects. such as walls. When you are working on a shared project. called Worksharing. team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. stairs. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. Elements specific to a view. A workset is a collection of building elements. go to the Worksets dialog. In this tutorial. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2009. you specify an active workset. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project.

You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. for a typical project. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. In a multi-story structure. and View worksets. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. Project size The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. Instead. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly.dialog. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. In the lessons and exercises that follow. Experience has shown that. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. After learning the fundamentals. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. You should have at least one workset for each person. such as a tenant interior. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. When setting up Worksharing. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. 718 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . not including the Project Standards. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. Shared Levels and Grids. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment. In most projects. You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. In the next exercise. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.

Team member roles Typically. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. When creating the new worksets. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. designers work in teams. Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. On this tab. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 719 . the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. As new members create worksets for their own use. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. each team member has control over a portion of the design. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. with each assigned a specific functional task. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility. When you create a new workset. if a workset named Interior was created. For example. Regardless of the default setting. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing.

your changes are saved. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. After saving to the central file. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. When finished or at regular intervals. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. within the local file. however. When you save locally (to your local file). proceeds as usual. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. your changes propagate to the entire team. When you save to the central file.Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. the file is saved as the central file. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. This is called “Selective Open. When you save to the central file. you make that workset editable by you. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Therefore. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. As you work. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. Generally. However. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. you should then save to your local file. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you can select which workset is active. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file. 720 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . On the Options Bar. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. This makes them available to other team members. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available.

In this conceptual exercise. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. if you know who checked out the required workset. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. make any required worksets editable. Alternatively. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 721 . you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. In this situation. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. To do this. In this instance. save to the central file. for instance. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. and make that workset editable. you work no differently then you would in the office. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. reload the latest changes from the central file. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. you should check out the Materials workset. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. and then save the local file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. using VPN. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. In the next exercise. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When working remotely. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely is supported. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible.

Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset names. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 4 Scroll down the list of workset names. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset. The Worksets dialog displays. click Training Files. 3 In the Worksets dialog. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open." Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. When you enable worksharing. click Worksets.rvt. and notice all are editable by you. Your username displays as the present owner. 722 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. and open Common\c_Worksets. you enable Worksharing within an existing project.Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. under Show.

For training purposes. 17 On the Options Bar. clear Families. click . Subdividing the project into worksets 15 In the Project Browser. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. and double-click Level 1. it is better to make them visible by default. clear Visible by default in all views. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. you can rename the default workset. 12 Click Rename. Because the interior walls appear in many views. 9 Click New. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. 16 In the drawing area. Only User-Created worksets should display. Therefore. expand Views (all). type the name Exterior Shell. 10 Enter Furniture Layout. In this simple training project. click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 723 . you should turn off Visible by default in all views. a small number of team members are working on the building model. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. When you initially activate Worksharing. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. and Views. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. 14 In the Worksets dialog. ■ 5 Under Show. 13 In the Rename dialog. click New. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. currently named Workset1. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. For example. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Creating new worksets 6 In the Worksets dialog. and click OK. In this training file. need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. however. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user.■ Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. In this case. another is assigned the interior layout. You do. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. select Workset1. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. Project Standards. imagine four users including yourself. under Identity Data. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. 11 In the Worksets dialog. expand Floor Plans. 8 Click OK. 7 Enter the name Interior Layout.

click the Worksets tab. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. and click OK. stairs. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. click Visibility/Graphics. and click OK. click . Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. 724 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . including the interior doors. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the View menu. click . 23 Select all of the interior elements. under Identity Data. 24 On the Options Bar. 29 Click OK. You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. 21 On the Options Bar. 27 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 28 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. and walls. select Interior Layout for Workset. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner.19 Click OK. under Identity Data. 20 Select one of the interior walls. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select Interior Layout for Workset.

and click OK. click Non Editable. 42 On the right side of the dialog. under Identity Data. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 725 . 34 In the drawing area. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. If any interior elements remain. Create the central file 37 On the File menu. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. under Views (all). and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. 32 Select Interior Layout. 43 Click OK. Now that you have created the central file. under Floor Plans. click the Worksets tab. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets.The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name. click Visibility/Graphics. Checking in the worksets 40 On the File menu. click Close. 44 On the File menu. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. 41 In the Worksets dialog. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. 33 In the Project Browser. 38 In the Save As dialog. 39 Click Save. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. and click OK. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. make sure you remember the location of this central file. click . this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. select Interior Layout for Workset. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. 35 On the Options Bar. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. In this exercise. 30 On the View menu. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. double-click Level 2. select all of the interior elements of the building model. click Worksets. click Save As.

select Interior Layout. you create your local file. select the central file. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. 9 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. expand Floor Plans. click Save As. Checking out worksets 10 On the File menu. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Worksets. and select Specify. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 2 In the Open dialog. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. expand Views (all). 8 In the File Save Options dialog. and click OK. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and click Save. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset. Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. In addition. make modifications to the building model. Before working on the model. 13 On the Window menu. 5 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 12 Click OK. 4 Click Open. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets on page 722.Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise. please do so before continuing. click Options. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. click Open. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. You have created a local file which is for your use only. select all the User-Created worksets. 15 In the Project Browser. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. In this case. If you have not yet completed the exercise. Next. and select Yes for Editable. 7 In the Save As dialog. and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. select Interior Layout for Name. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. check out worksets. and double-click Level 1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. and click OK. 3 Click the arrow next to the Open button. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 11 In the Worksets dialog. 14 On the Worksets toolbar. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. 726 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 6 On the File menu.

If it was owned by another user. click . In the Worksets dialog. however. 22 Click OK. Because this element is not owned by another user. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. 17 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. In this case. 23 On the File menu. 18 On the Options Bar. click Worksets. and click OK. 24 Click OK. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. Verify that it is cleared. click . under Identity Data. notice the Editable Only option. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. On the Options Bar. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. click Modify. 21 On the Options Bar. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset. The upper exterior wall should still be selected.16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 20 Under Constraints. If this is selected. Working Individually with Worksets | 727 . you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. you can still edit this wall.

26 Delete the door. 27 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.Modify the building model 25 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. 28 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. click Door. 34 In the Type Selector. click Wall. The precise location is not important. 728 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 29 In the Type Selector. click Modify. 32 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner.126mm Partition (2-hr). select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. 30 Using the following illustration as a guide. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. 31 On the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Interior . 33 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner.

you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. a tooltip. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. Throughout the process. two users access the central file through a network connection. In this particular case. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 38 Click OK. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. displays the workset as well as the element type. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. click Save to Central. which matches the information in the Status Bar. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. and reload the latest changes. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. The Save to Central dialog displays with the path to the central file automatically filled in. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. please do so before continuing. You modified the building model. save to central. For training purposes. At the end of a work session. Whenever you save. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. make elements editable. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. In addition. leave this file open in its current state. If you click Modify on the Design Bar and then place the cursor over any of the new elements. you should perform regular saves. In this exercise. Borrowed Elements is selected. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 729 . and save locally immediately afterward. Saving your work 36 On the File menu. checked out worksets. add two door openings into the rooms you created.35 Using the following illustration as a guide. you should relinquish all worksets. If you have not yet completed these exercises. When working in your local file. you created your local file. By default. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. each user must check out worksets. it is recommended.

14 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. any referenced workset is opened but hidden.Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. and click OK. 16 Select the Exterior Shell workset. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. click Options. specifically sequenced. 11 On the File menu. and click OK. under Username. and proceed to Creating a local copy. click Options. click Worksets. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. 4 Click the General Tab and. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. For training purposes. select the central file. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. This file is for your use only. 9 Click Open. 13 In the File Save Options dialog. and select Specify. You now have a local copy of the project. 10 In the Opening Worksets dialog. 3 On the Settings menu. 8 Click the arrow next to the Open button. instructions are staggered. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. consider that person to be User 1. This is a system setting. click Open. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. return to the Settings dialog. one user has already created a local file. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. select all the User-Created worksets. 730 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . 15 On the File menu. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 7 In the Open dialog. skip the following section. and select Yes for Editable. and click OK. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 12 In the Save As dialog. User 2: Create a local file. click Save As. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click Save. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. enter User 2. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2.rvt. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. In addition. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. In the following section of this exercise. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2.

” 29 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. 19 On the File menu. 31 Using the following illustration as a guide. 17 Click OK. it becomes the active workset. A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. 28 In the Save to Central dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 731 . 24 In the Project Browser. open it now. 21 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. 26 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. 23 Click OK. expand Floor Plans. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2.You are now the owner of that workset. expand Views (all). and move it upward approximately 2 meters. expand Views (all). 22 Select the Interior Layout workset. and double-click Level 1. and double-click Level 1. 20 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 30 In the Project Browser. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. modify the building model. click Worksets. 25 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. If you only have one workset checked out. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. click Save to Central. 27 On the File menu. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. User 1: Check out worksets. If it is not open. and select Yes for Editable. and publish changes 18 User 1 should still have the local file open. select the lower exterior wall. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall.

The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays.” 39 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. 44 In the Project Browser.” 35 Click OK. 41 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 34 In the Save to Central dialog. 36 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Save to Central. 42 Select Furniture Layout. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. and click Rename. When you save to central. right-click Level 1. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. under Floor Plans. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. and check out additional worksets 40 On the File menu. Click Yes. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. click Reload Latest. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. 32 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. However. select Yes for Editable. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. Before adding any furniture. 43 In the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. you should create a furniture plan view. 732 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. click Save to Central. The changes User 2 made are apparent. 33 On the File menu. click Worksets. User 1: Reload latest worksets. under Views (all). 38 In the Save to Central dialog. 37 On the File menu. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. 46 In the Project Browser.

select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Edit/New. 49 On the Design Bar. such as Wall Types. 57 Right-click the upper exterior wall. 62 On the File menu. 50 On the View menu. choose any desk. 58 In the Element Properties dialog. 53 On the File menu. and click inside any room. 48 In the Type Selector. click Reload Latest. 66 On the File menu. 67 In the Save to Central dialog. 51 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 59 In the Type Properties dialog. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view. 61 Click OK 2 times. 65 Click OK. click the Worksets tab. 54 In the Save to Central dialog. and click OK. You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. 60 In the Rename dialog. click Save to Central. NOTE System families. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. click Modify. click Component. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 68 Click OK. click Save to Central. enter Exterior Wall . are placed under Project Standards. 63 In the Worksets dialog. and click Element Properties. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 56 On the File menu.” 55 Click OK. click Worksets.200mm. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 733 . click Rename. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. click Visibility/Graphics. 64 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. the Visible by default option was not selected. select Project Standards. Therefore. and click OK. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. under Show. 52 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset.47 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. rather than Families.

734 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . and published their changes back to the central file. Save the training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. and click OK. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. 71 In the Save to Central dialog. select Reload Latest.rvt. There are specific instructions for each user. and these problems are rectified. and still have your local files open. At the appropriate point in this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. click Training Files. finished the previous workset exercises. and save 69 On the File menu. click Save As. modified the building model. Only one user needs to open the training file and save the central file to a network location. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. Each user must have network access to the central file. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. you save the training file as a central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the Local File after “Save to Central” In this exercise. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users on page 734. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. Checking out worksets. 70 On the File menu. leave this file open in its current state. In the left pane of the Open dialog. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. User 1: Reload latest. 3 In the Save As dialog. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. In the final exercise of this tutorial. click Options. leave this file open in its current state. select Save to Central. throughout this training. As each of you work. select the following. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial.If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. This exercise requires two users and. Each user checked out worksets. NOTE When you open the training file for this tutorial. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. In subsequent steps. you need to set up your central and local files.

9 In the File Save Options dialog. 5 Click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. 7 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. 15 Click Open. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. click Save As. click Open. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. You have created a local file which is for your use only. return to the Settings dialog. and click OK. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. click Options. In addition. 10 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. select the central file. User 1: Create local file For the sake of simplicity. The central file should still be open. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 6 On the File menu. and click OK. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. and click OK. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 735 . verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 8 In the Save As dialog.4 In the File Save Options dialog. On the Settings menu. 17 On the File menu. and click OK. Next. click Save As. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Make this a Central File after save. and click OK. Set the Username to User 2. click Options. 13 In the Open dialog. This is the local file for User 1. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. 14 Click the arrow next to the Open button. click Options. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. and click Save. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. and reset the Username to your computer login name. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2. 12 On the File menu. User 2: Create local file 11 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. This is a system setting. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. 18 In the Save As dialog. and click Save. and select Specify. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file.

and click Editing Requests. click Worksets. User 1: Check out worksets 21 On the File menu. 32 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. click the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. You are now the owner of that workset. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. and select Yes for Editable. and click Open. if any User-Created worksets are not open. verify that Editable Only is cleared. 24 Under Active Workset. select the Interior Layout workset. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. select Exterior Shell. 23 Select the Exterior Shell workset. select Interior Layout. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. 27 Under Active Workset.Checking out worksets Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. User 2: Check out worksets 25 On the File menu. select the second window from the top. double-click Level 1. under Floor Plans. Afterwards. and select Yes for Editable. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. 31 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. After you submit the request. 22 In the Worksets dialog. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 29 On the Options Bar. 30 On the left exterior wall. and then click OK. select them. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow element 33 When User 2 contacts you and informs you that a borrowing request is pending your authorization. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. and then click OK. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 28 In the Project Browser. 736 | Chapter 20 Sharing Projects . click Worksets. 26 In the Worksets dialog. At this point. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values.

35 Click Grant. 36 Click Close. 40 In the Save to Central dialog. select the following. and click OK.34 In the Editing Requests dialog. and notice the window is in the new location. and close 39 On the File menu. User 1 and 2: Save to Central. click Check Now. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 737 . User 2: Check for editability grant 37 In the Check Editability Grants dialog. click Close. In this case. you learned how to borrow elements from another workset even though that workset was actively being edited by another user. ■ ■ ■ User-created Worksets Borrowed Elements (User 2 only) Save the Local File after “Save to Central” 41 On the File menu. you requested permission to edit the element. and the other user granted it. In this multi-user exercise. to Local. A message informs you that your request has been granted. select Save to Central. 38 Click OK. select the request submitted by User 2.

738 .

Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project You can use design options to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. the task is to develop two roof schemes for an addition to an existing house. you can have multiple sets of design options. After you and the client agree on the final design. and each option set can have multiple schemes. you create multiple design schemes within a single project file. you can study and modify each design option and present the options to the client. The client is interested in a pergola and sunshade for the roof terrace but is not sure of the specific layout or materials. Because all design options coexist in the project with the main model (the main model consists of elements not specifically assigned to a design option). In this particular case. The client has asked you to create various options. At any time in the design process. you learn how to create and manage multiple design sets and options within a single building model. Using design options. In addition. 739 . it is common to explore multiple design schemes as the project develops. In this tutorial. These schemes can be conceptual or can be detailed engineering designs. For example. you can have an option set called roofing with multiple subordinate roofing schemes. you can have an option set for the roof structure with multiple subordinate structural design schemes.Creating Multiple Design Options 21 When working with a building model. you can designate a primary design scheme for each option set.

click Design Options ➤ Design Options. make your final design decision. Any new elements introduced at that time become part of that option. 2 In the Design Options dialog. the only available command is to create a new option set. click Edit Selected. In the left pane of the Open dialog. TIP In this exercise. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. These three exercises are designed to be completed sequentially with the second and third exercises dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. you set up multiple design option sets.In the first exercise in this lesson. In the second exercise. therefore. This option will be the first structural scheme consisting of 75 mm round columns and 50 mm round bars. and delete the unwanted options from the project. Each option set represents a portion of the building model wherein design alternatives are being considered. you set up the design option names and add the modeling elements to the structural design option set. each is constructed for interchangeability. you create a unique in-place family as the structural system. After you create a design option. 740 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Creating the Structural Design Options In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Urban_House. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you design each of the structural options. The first time you open the Design Options dialog within a project. 3 Select Option 1 (primary). Notice Option Set 1 has been created with a design option: Option 1 (primary). under Option Set. Any new elements introduced to the building model are added to this option. and click Close. each with multiple design options. There is no limit to the number of option sets you can create. With the second option. you can edit it. you learn how to manage and organize the design options.rvt. the roof and structure systems must work together. click New. click Training Files. In the final exercise of this lesson. Create first design option 1 On the Tools menu. you create two roof system design options that work with the structural options.

select: ■ ■ ■ . By selecting Multiple. and double-click ROOF TERRACE. 11 On the Edit toolbar. expand Floor Plans. click 12 On the Options Bar. 13 Zoom in around the left column that is embedded in the notch. The first click specifies the reference point on the element to be copied. Constrain Copy Multiple The Copy command is a two-click process. Selecting Constrain limits the movement and helps ensure the post-copy alignment of the columns. expand Views (all). select Round Column: 75mm Diameter. and click the EQ symbol to equalize the segments. 7 In the Type Selector. the midpoint of the lower notch line is selected. make sure you select a point that is easily recognizable. Creating the Structural Design Options | 741 . 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and zoom in on the upper half of the building model. or add a dimension string between the columns. In the following illustration. click Modify. The left column should be centered at the intersection of the notch and the wall. and the second click specifies the point on the building model the reference point is copied to. TIP To center the middle column. the three columns need to be copied three times to create a 3 x 4 grid of 12 columns. In this case. Arrows and the dimension lines have been added for training purposes only. 14 Click at an identifiable part of the notch construction.4 In the Project Browser. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. add three columns. 10 Select the three columns either by dragging a pick box around them or by selecting them individually while holding CTRL. the second column directly across from it at the intersection of the two walls. Because it is important that you select the same location on the notches you copy to. and the third column centered between the two. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 9 On the Design Bar. click Column. 5 On the View menu. you can continue adding new copies without reselecting the reference point (the first click). You should delete the dimension and unconstrain after adding the column. either add a centered reference plane and snap the column to it.

15 Zoom out and move downward to the notch just below this one. they are difficult to see in this view. 18 On the View toolbar. click Modify on the Design Bar to end the copy process. 742 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . using the same technique. and click in the same location as you did for the previous notch. A copy of the three selected columns is added. Because of the size of the columns. 16 Zoom in around the notch construction. add a copy of the columns to the next two notches below this one. 17 Zoom out and. When you are finished.TIP You can zoom in and out easily during this process using the wheel on your wheel mouse. click .

24 Select the Beam you added previously. 23 On the Design Bar. click Beam. select Round Bar : 50mm. Creating the Structural Design Options | 743 . Use the following illustration as a guide. 22 Add the first beam between the upper left and right columns by using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Zoom in on the upper-left column. and click at its center to set the beam start point. 20 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. The second click specifies the end of the beam. under Floor Plans. Zoom in on the upper right column. Next. two callouts with thin lines have been added to clarify the location of the start and end points of the beam.Notice the 12 columns that you added. The beam needs to be added between the remaining columns. In it. you add the beams that span the columns. You can do this manually or use the Copy command. Adding a beam is a two-click process. Zoom out and move the cursor over the upper right column. The first click specifies the beam start point. double-click TOP OF CORE. 21 In the Type Selector. and click on the center to set the beam endpoint. 19 In the Project Browser.

744 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 29 Repeat this step twice more until a beam is added to each set of columns. move down to the next set of columns. and select the center of the column to add a copy. 28 Zoom out.25 On the Edit toolbar. and click the center point. select: ■ ■ ■ . click . 30 On the View toolbar. zoom into the left column. Constrain Copy Multiple 27 Zoom in around the upper left column that is embedded in the notch. click 26 On the Options Bar. This is the reference point for the subsequent copies.

Logically naming the option sets and relative options allows you to more easily manage them. 40 In the Rename dialog.Notice that the beams complete the bracket structure for the proposed roof. and click OK. click Rename. under Option. under Option. 33 Click Finish Editing. and click OK. enter Roofing for New. 45 Under Roofing. enter Beam for New. and click OK. click New. 39 Select Option Set 1 and. 43 In the Rename dialog. 44 Select the option set Roofing and. There should now be two roofing design options. 34 In the Design Options dialog. 38 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. under Option. under Option Set. under Option. 46 Under Option. click New. 36 In the Rename dialog. under Option Set. 41 Under Option Set. 32 In the Design Options dialog. click New. enter Structure for New. 35 Select Option 1 (primary) and. click Rename. Organize design option sets and subordinate options 31 On the Tools menu. 42 Select Option Set 1 and. click Rename. Creating the Structural Design Options | 745 . name the option Louvers. enter Brackets for New. and click OK. NOTE Be sure you are creating a new option. select Option 1 (primary). not a new option set. click Rename. click Rename. notice that you are still editing Option Set 1: Option 1 (primary). 37 Select Option 2 and. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.

notice that Structure: Beam is displayed. under Floor Plans. This allows you to more easily manage the project. it will resemble the following illustration. select Beam. double-click ROOF TERRACE. Under Now Editing. you create the second design option. 746 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . click Rename. 48 Under Option.47 Under Roofing. select Option 2. under Structure. You have completed the initial setup of the design option sets and their subordinate design option names. When finished. Design the second structural design option 49 In this section of the exercise. 52 Click Close. 51 Under Edit. 53 In the Project Browser. select Edit Selected. Notice that the columns added to the Brackets design option do not display. 50 In the Design Options dialog. and click OK. 54 Zoom in toward the top of the roof terrace near the stairs. name the option Sunscreen.

The second click represents the plane that is moved. click Align. 56 In the Type Selector. click Component.55 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 59 Align the roof beam by clicking the lower edge of the adjacent horizontal wall and then clicking the lower edge of the roof beam. Creating the Structural Design Options | 747 . 58 On the Tools menu. Refer to the following illustration. select M_Roof Beam. Using the Align tool requires two clicks. 57 Place a roof beam into the drawing area as shown. The first click sets the plane that the object will be aligned to.

The first click sets the move start point. 61 On the Design Bar. Clear Group and Associate Enter 4 for number Select 2nd for Move To: Select Constrain Using the Array tool requires two clicks. click Modify. 62 Select the beam and. 64 Click the start point at the alignment of the beam and wall as shown.60 After aligning the beam. Click to indicate the end point of the move. on the Edit toolbar. click 63 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ ■ . 65 Move the cursor down to the next intersection of the lower edge of the horizontal wall and the beam. click the padlock that displays to lock the alignment. 748 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . The second click represents the move end point.

which is visible by default.rvt. and click Save. click Save As. That is because the brackets option is set to primary. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. 67 On the Tools menu. Notice that even before you close the dialog. Creating the Structural Design Options | 749 . You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise. the 3D view has reverted back to the brackets rather than the structural beams you just created. m_Urban_House-in progress. 69 Click Close. 68 In the Design Options dialog. 70 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the next exercise. 71 Navigate to your preferred directory. Design option visibility is covered in more detail later in the tutorial. 66 On the View toolbar. you need this file in its current state. Notice the new design option for the structural elements supporting the roof system. name the file. click .Three more roof beams are placed at the same intersection as the first beam. click Finish Editing.

Creating the Roof System Design Options In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans. You should have named it m_Urban_House-in progress. If you have not completed the first exercise in this tutorial. do so now. With the second option. the other for beams. expand Views (all). each with multiple design options to pick from. a Louver system. 5 Click Close. under Roofing.In this exercise. 10 Referring to the following illustration. 750 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 9 Zoom in on the lower half of the building model until you can see the bottom set of columns and the beam traversing the span. Under Now Editing. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Under Edit. select Louvers (primary). you design each of the roofing options. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. Roofing: Louvers (primary) should display. and double-click TOP OF CORE. you create the roof systems that compliment these structural design options. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. The first option. The second roofing system. you created a unique in-place family as the structural system. click Edit Selected. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. delete them after the rafter is in place. place the rafter 900 mm inside the wall shown and overlap the horizontal beam 900 mm. 8 In the Type Selector. you designed each of the structural options: one for brackets. After setting up the design option sets and their subordinate options. you set up multiple design option sets. click Component. click Design Options ➤ Design Options.rvt. The first option is a simple combination of columns and beams. is constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. In the next exercise. 3 In the Design Options dialog. If you need to add dimensions. select Rafter 50mm x 250mm. Sunscreen. The dimensions shown are for training purposes. Create the first roofing design option 1 If you do not have the project file that you saved at the end of the previous exercise open. 2 On the Tools menu. open it now. is a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion.

click Array. The rafter should now span the entire vertical length of the proposed roof system. enter 11750 mm for Length. 16 On the Options Bar. 12 Select the rafter you added previously. Select Constrain. and click OK. under Other. click Modify. click . Select 2nd for Move To. click in the center of the intersection to specify the array start point. 13 On the Options Bar. You are creating an array of five rafters that are 990 mm apart. 17 Zoom in on the intersection of the lower end of the rafter and the intersecting beam. 15 On the Edit menu. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 5 for Number. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 751 . 14 In the Element Properties dialog.11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

when the listening dimension displays.18 Move the cursor horizontally to the right and. 752 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . Zoom out to see that the rafter array is created. and press ENTER. enter 990.

click Modify. click the Edit menu. under Other. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the center of any intersection between the louver and the beam. 21 Place the first horizontal louver in the upper left corner according to the following illustration. 25 With the louver still selected. The louver now spans the horizontal plane of the roof system. 20 In the Type Selector. click Component. enter 5475 mm for Length. Select 2nd for Move To.Add the louvers to the design option 19 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 For the array starting point. Select Constrain. and click Array. 26 On the Options Bar. select Louver 50mm x 150mm. Enter 34 for Number. 23 On the Options Bar. and select the louver you just placed. 22 On the Design Bar. click . and click OK. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 753 . specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.

29 On the View toolbar.28 Move the cursor vertically downward. Zoom out to see that the 34 louvers array 300 mm apart. 754 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . enter 300. when the listening dimension displays. and. and press Enter. click .

36 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the louver roof system no longer displays. click Edit Selected. The roof extrusion reference plane has been added to the training file specifically for this purpose and is hidden in all views. 40 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Design Options dialog. Because an extruded roof has a roof type associated with it. you must create a draped canvas sunscreen. Creating the Roof System Design Options | 755 . 39 On the Design Bar. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. Click OK. The louver roof system still displays in the 3D view because it is the primary option. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. 38 You are prompted to verify the roof level and offset. the sketch should be a series of arcs connected at the ends where they connect to the columns.The louver roof system is complete. In this case. 33 Under Editing. select Reference Plane : Roof Extrusion for Name. under Roofing. expand Elevations. and click OK. and then click Close. 30 On the Tools menu. click Lines. you only need to sketch a single line or a string of lines to define the shape of the extruded roof. click . Therefore. 35 Zoom in on the upper level where the roof design is taking place. click Finish Editing. 34 In the Project Browser. Create sunscreen roof system 32 In the Design Options dialog. and double-click West. select Sunscreen. under Edit. 37 In the Work Plane dialog.

then you can modify it through the dimension. 41 Select the top of the left column. The arcs should connect. Under Constraints. click Trim/Extend. enter 300 mm for Extrusion Start. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Sunscreen Fabric for Type. Select the right arc. You must make sure the arcs are connected where they connect to the columns. 756 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 Repeat the previous step and create two more arcs between the columns. The roof sketch must be a continuous line. and then adjust the dip of the arc until it is 60 degrees. Under Constraints. 49 On the View toolbar. Do not be too concerned if your sketch lines do not exactly connect. enter 5800 mm for Extrusion End. click . and the third point defines the arc. The easiest way to accomplish this is to use the Trim tool. You will fix this in a later step. the top of the next column on the right.This tool allows you to sketch an arc line using three points. click Properties. click Finish Sketch. try to get the angle value as close to 60 degrees as possible. 45 Click OK. The first two points define the ends of the line. then the center arc. 47 Select the left arc and then the center arc. 48 On the Design Bar. NOTE As you sketch the arcs. 43 On the Design Bar. You can adjust the degrees by clicking the blue temporary dimension value immediately after you create the line. 46 On the Tools menu.

make it part of the building model. you designed each of the roofing options. and click OK. you select a design. under 3D Views. was constructed of 50 mm x 250 mm rafters and 50 mm x 150 mm louvers. you must create a named 3D view for the primary. under Views (all). and last options. right-click {3D}. and delete the discarded design options. Create new views for each design option 1 In the Project Browser. was a simple fabric roof created using an extrusion. expand 3D Views. Repeat this step two more times until you have three copies of the view. click Finish Editing. tertiary. Managing Design Options | 757 . under Edit. Because the client wants to see 3D building models of each of the designs. 51 In the Design Options dialog. click Save. 3 In the Rename View dialog. secondary. and click Duplicate. 50 On the Tools menu. you explore how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. All are sequential and dependent on the previous exercise. If you have not completed the previous exercises in this tutorial. Managing Design Options In this exercise.The louver roof system is complete. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. The second roofing system. 4 In the Project Browser. You have completed the sunscreen roof system. Sunscreen. This exercise is designed to work in conjunction with the other exercises in this tutorial. and click Rename. do so now. The first option. 52 On the File menu. NOTE If you intend to continue with the final exercise. and then click Close. 2 In the Project Browser. a Louver system. After exploring the combinations. right-click the 3D View Primary Option. Both of these options are designed to work in conjunction with each of the structural design options. In this exercise. you need this file in its current state. enter Primary Option. under Views (all). You can leave it open and proceed immediately to the next exercise.

and click Rename. 7 On the View menu. 10 In the Project Browser.5 Right-click each of the copies. Notice that both option sets are set to automatic. 13 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 758 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 11 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. click the Design Options tab. and click OK. Rename the three copies as follows: ■ ■ ■ Secondary Option Tertiary Option Last Option 6 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 9 Click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Secondary Option. double-click Primary Option. 8 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. This ensures that the primaries (currently bracket and louver) are visible. 12 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all). under Views (all). click the Design Options tab.

19 On the View menu. double-click Tertiary Option. double-click Last Option. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. 18 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). click the Design Options tab. the beam and the louver roofing should be selected as primary. In your design options. Managing Design Options | 759 . and click OK. 15 On the View menu. In this case. 20 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under 3D Views. 17 Specify Brackets for the Structure design option. click the Design Options tab. all isometric views are ready to be placed on a titleblock or exported and e-mailed to the client. and click OK. At this point. click Visibility/Graphics. specify Sunscreen for the Roofing design option. click Visibility/Graphics. 21 Specify Beam for the Structure design option. 16 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Views (all).14 In the Project Browser. the client has reviewed the design options and has decided that the beam system coupled with the louver roofing system is the preferred design. under 3D Views.

22 On the Tools menu. under Structure. 26 Under Option Set. you selected a design. made it part of the building model. 28 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. click Delete to remove the views that used options. 33 In the Design Options dialog. 25 Select Structure. 27 In the alert dialog. and you get a dialog asking if you want to delete dedicated option views. delete the other design option geometry and any dedicated option views. select Make Primary. 29 Select Roofing. you learned how to present each of the design options by creating multiple views to display the various combinations. but should be accepted as part of the building model. click Design Options ➤ Design Options. since you no longer need them. the beam option becomes part of the model. click Close. 30 Under Option Set. click Accept Primary to take the louvers into the model. the current primaries are no longer options. This was the client choice for structural. click Yes. select Beam. The beam and louver systems are now part of the building model. The set is deleted. click Accept Primary. click Yes. The other options were removed along with any dedicated option views. double-click Primary Option. click Delete. and deleted the discarded design options. asking if you are sure you want to delete all elements of secondary options in this option set and remove the option set. After exploring the combinations. 23 In the Design Options dialog. In this exercise. 32 In the Delete Dedicated Option Views dialog. 34 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 31 In the alert dialog. An alert is displayed. click Save. Because the client has selected the design option. 760 | Chapter 21 Creating Multiple Design Options . 35 On the File menu. 24 Under Option.

you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase and observe the differences in the phase-specific room schedules.Project Phasing 22 In any project. you can create a visual time line of phase-specific 3D views. you work in a simple building model that requires renovation. and then add new building model elements. demolish existing walls and doors. You create new phases. This changes room definition and total building model area. then add new walls and doors in a different location. In the lesson and exercises that follow. You create new phases. demolish existing construction. Using Phasing In the lesson and exercises that follow. Phases represent distinct time periods over the duration of a project. 761 . you apply phase-specific room tags to rooms that vary with each phase. complete with schedules. You can create as many phases as necessary and assign building model elements to specific phases. In the second exercise. you or the client may want to view the model according to phases. In the second exercise. This allows you to create phase-specific project documentation. You can use phase filters to control the flow of building model information into views and schedules. For the client.

3 In the Element Properties dialog. go to the Settings menu. 762 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . and double-click Level 1. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Modify. and None is selected for Phase Demolished. expand Floor Plans. If you wish to do so. In the Element Properties dialog. then new building model elements are assigned to a phase according to those settings. you work in a simple model that requires renovation. you create new phase-specific views in order to visualize the changes that you make to the model. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. notice that New Construction is selected for Phase Created. regardless of phase. they are assigned to the New Construction phase by default. 4 Click Cancel. are visible in this view. two phases exist by default: Existing and New Construction. 6 On the Options Bar.rvt. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. As you add new elements to the building model. expand Views (all). You can control the default phases and view phase setting by changing the settings within a template. you do not need to change the project units to metric. Any new elements that you add to the building model are assigned to the New Construction phase.Phasing Your Model In this exercise. 7 Click Cancel. If you change the view property settings and the phase definitions within a template file. define the units. notice that Show All is selected for Phase Filter and New Construction is selected for Phase. View current phase conditions 1 In the Project Browser. and open Common\c_Phasing. under Phasing. When you create a new project. You create new phases and phase filters and modify graphic overrides. click Training Files. click Project Units. 5 Select any of the exterior walls. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under Phasing. and click OK. This phase assignment is controlled by a setting within the view properties. This means that all building model elements. click (Element Properties). Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. During the demolition and renovation process.

select Existing. click (Filter Selection). Because this is a renovation project.Change the phase of the existing building model elements 9 In the drawing area. 18 In the Project Browser. 14 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 16 In the Rename dialog. and click Rename. TIP If this were a multi-story building. and click OK. After you release the mouse button. Notice that the line style of the walls and doors is displayed as gray rather than black because of the phase and phase filter settings in the view properties. Door tags are not phase-specific and must be filtered from the selection. After you create the views. are highlighted in red. enter Level 1 .Demo. under Floor Plans.Existing. and click Rename. and click OK.Existing. 20 In the Rename dialog. click Modify. 11 In the Filter dialog. Because this is a phase-specific view. 12 On the Options Bar. draw a selection window around the entire building model to select all of the elements in it. you do not want to rename the corresponding views and level. enter Level 1 . You are asked if you want to rename corresponding level and views. and click OK. clear Door Tags. click . under Phasing. 10 On the Options Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. all of the building model elements. right-click Level 1. you may want to select the building model in a 3D view to ensure you capture all of the components. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. you modify their view properties to make each view phase specific. right-click Level 1 .Existing. Phasing Your Model | 763 . This refers to the ceiling plan and the level line visible in any of the elevation views. 17 Click No. under Floor Plans. it requires a plan view for demolition and for new construction. for Phase Created. and click OK. right-click Copy of Level 1 . Create phase-specific views 15 In the Project Browser. including the door tags. 19 In the Project Browser.

under Phasing. double-click Level 1 . select Overridden. you modify these settings. you use phase filters to define which building model elements display in a particular view. Phase status is time-dependent. This new filter uses graphic overrides to set the display of all building model elements: New. under New. and click OK. Graphic Overrides define the appearance of building model elements according to their phase status. There are five default phase filters. a graphic override is used to make “older” elements use the gray line style. 27 Click New. View graphic overrides 30 Click the Graphic Overrides tab. Because of this time relationship. Later in this exercise.Demo. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. You can change the cut and projection line color for a demolished object. 22 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. 29 For Composite Plan. 26 In the Phasing dialog. select Existing. Demolished. You may need to zoom in to see this. 764 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . however. Existing. you need a filter that takes all of the phases into account with a particular graphic override. 28 Under Filter Name. The line style of the walls and doors returns to black. Define phase filters 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. A new phase filter is displayed at the bottom of the Filter Name list.Existing. On a logical time line. double-click Level 1 . Next. and Temporary. enter Composite Plan.You should now have a separate floor plan for the existing building model and the planned demolition. This view uses a different line style because the phase property of this view is set to New Construction. under Floor Plans. to which all the building model elements belong. for Phase. new construction occurs after existing construction. 21 In the Project Browser. click the Phase Filters tab. under Floor Plans. In this case. 24 In the Project Browser. Notice that the line pattern is still gray.

38 For New ➤ Cut ➤ Patterns. 42 In the Project Browser. select a lighter blue. under Floor Plans. click the value for Color. When you demolish the host. Next. You can select it and change its Phase parameter to Demolished. 35 Click OK twice.31 Under Phase Status. double-click Level 1 .Demo.Existing. you demolish all elements hosted by it. There are two ways to demolish an element. Demolish building model elements 40 On the Tools toolbar. 36 Using the same method. This was the display override that was set for demolished objects in the previous steps. its display changes to a red dashed line. 32 In the Demolished row. select red. you begin demolition. under Floor Plans. 41 Referring to the walls that display as dashed lines in the following illustration. 34 In the Color dialog. Notice that the doors display as demolished even though you did not specifically demolish them. This is because the view phase filter is set to Show All. select the line style. Add new construction 43 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1 . select Demolished. As you click each wall. under Cut ➤ Lines. The cursor is displayed as a hammer. Notice that the demolished walls continue to display. or you can use the demolish tool. click (Demolish). Change cut lines and patterns for new objects 37 Change the line style for New ➤ Cut ➤ Lines to blue. select the interior walls one at a time. click OK. That is because doors are wall-hosted elements. Phasing Your Model | 765 . 33 In the Line Graphics dialog. specify red for the Projection/Surface line style for the Demolished phase. 39 In the Phasing dialog.

select Composite Plan for Phase Filter. Notice this view still displays the original walls and doors. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. 52 Open Level 1 . click Door. 46 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 766 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . 53 Open Level 1 .44 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. for Phase Filter. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. under Phasing. select Sgl Flush: 34" x 84". 48 Using the following illustration as a guide. 50 In the Type Selector.Existing. for Phase Filter.Demo. The demolished walls no longer display. 49 On the Design Bar. 47 In the Type Selector. and then add four short vertical walls between it and the upper exterior wall. click Wall. 51 Add a door leading into each room. select Show Previous + New. and click OK. select Basic Wall: Interior . under Phasing. and click OK. Click the control arrows to adjust the opening and face directions. 54 Click View menu ➤ View Properties.4 7/8" Partition (1-hr). add a long horizontal wall.

Demo.The composite plan phase filter uses graphic overrides and shows demolished as red dashed. 59 Open Level 1 . Create a new construction view 56 Change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + Demo. click (Default 3D View). and existing shows as half-tone. 61 On the View Control Bar. spin the building model so you can see the demolished walls. 62 If necessary. because the phase filter is set to Show All. The renovated building model plan is displayed. new is shown in blue. 58 Rename the copy to Level 1 .New. right-click Level 1 .New. All elements are displayed in this view. which are displayed as red. This filter displays all original components that were not demolished (Show Previous) and all new components added to the building model (+ New). Notice that all building model elements display using the composite filter. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Phasing Your Model | 767 . You could create multiple 3D views that display each phase just as you did with the floor plans. regardless of phase. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 57 In the Project Browser. and change the Phase Filter to Show Previous + New. 60 On the View toolbar.

Notice that all the elements are displayed using the material defined by the graphic overrides. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. In this view. sizes. and the information that each room tag reports adjusts accordingly. the rooms change in both definition and size. and double-click Level 1 . Because units of measurement have little bearing on the goals of this tutorial. click Project Units. click Training Files. In this exercise. expand Views (all). Notice that this view is the original building model. and open Common\c_Phase_Specific_Room-tags. 3 Open Level 1 . If you wish to do so. NOTE The units of measurement in this project file are imperial. Floor plans have been created to display each phase of the project: existing conditions. 2 Open Level 1 .Demo. you can do so at this time.rvt. go to the Settings menu. All room boundaries are phase-specific. In this view. In the next exercise. If you wish to save this file. 768 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . demolition. you created a building model with three distinct phases and created views with appropriate phase filters to display each phase. and locations change depending on the phase of the project. They are the same walls that display as red in the 3D view. define the units.New. therefore. and new construction. you learn how to use phase-specific room tags. and click OK. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags In this exercise. you add room tags to a building model that has multiple phases. In the left pane of the Open dialog. As the renovation process continues.Existing. You can also see that the room quantities. Add room tags 1 In the Project Browser. the walls marked for demolition display using a dashed line style. The three level 1 floor plan views show the progression of the renovation. 63 Close the file. room tags report information based on the phase of the view in which the rooms were added. you do not need to change the project units to metric. you can see the new walls added to the building model.

click in each room as you move to the right. notice that there are two phases defined in this project. 10 Open Level 1 . click Room. 14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 8 Using the following illustration as a guide. Phase 0 is for existing conditions and Phase 1 is for demolition and new construction. click Room Tag. 11 On the Design Bar. Use the following illustration as a guide. 13 Open Level 1 . 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify.Existing. and maximize the view. click in each room to create a room and place a room tag. 6 Open Level 1 . 12 Starting in the room in the upper left corner. click Room. 5 Click OK.Demo.4 Click Settings menu ➤ Phases. 7 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Notice that the two rooms in the lower corners are identical to both the existing phase and the new phase.New. In the Phasing dialog. Using Phase-Specific Room Tags | 769 . yet they have different room numbers.

16 In the Project Browser. The two schedule views tile. In addition. View phase-specific room schedules. expand Schedules/Quantities. The room tag command allows you to tag existing rooms. 18 Open Room Schedule .New Construction. 20 Close the file. click Tile. room information differs based upon the phase of the view the tags are in. 17 On the Window menu. You also opened two schedules to observe how the room information is reported by phase.Existing. This is because the additional interior walls in the new construction occupy more space than the original. 770 | Chapter 22 Project Phasing . Notice the room tags in this view get the same room tag numbers as the tags in the view displaying new construction. notice the new construction has 25 less total square feet than the original building model. In this exercise. 19 On the Window menu. and double-click Room Schedule . add a room tag to the three rooms adjacent to the lower exterior wall. That is because the same phase is assigned to both views. both views are assigned the same phase yet have different phase filters. In this case. Notice that in each phase-specific schedule. click Close Hidden Windows.15 Using the following illustration as a guide. you added room tags to various floor plans that are assigned different phases.

you share the coordinates so that the linked files remember their location within the host project. modify their visibility.Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates 23 Many projects consist of disparate buildings in an overall campus. You position the building models on the site plan. you can use model linking and shared coordinates to create the campus within one project file while allowing work to proceed on the individual building models in other project files. In these situations. or of a group of related but semi-independent sub-projects. In this tutorial. you link several building models within a single project file in which only a site plan has been developed. and manage the links throughout the project. This maximizes efficiency. 771 . Comparison of alternatives on a site. and productivity by working in a smaller project file while retaining the ability to place that building model into a larger context. performance. A residential development in which a few different prototypes are configured differently in an area. Specific examples when you may want to use model linking and shared coordinates: ■ ■ ■ A campus plan that contains links to several structures. In the final lesson.

modify their visibility.Linking Building Models In this lesson. Automatic placement options: ■ Auto . You position the building models on the site. and manage their locations in coordination with their originating project files. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files In this exercise. NOTE You must complete the exercises in this lesson in sequence. and the other is a townhouse. 772 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . you work within a project in which only the site components have been developed. Placement options when linking building models When you link a building model in a project. You link multiple instances of one building model and a single instance of another. you open a project in which only site components have been developed. One building model is a condominium. NOTE The center of a Revit Architecture model is the center of the model geometry. This center changes as the footprint of your model changes.Center to Center: Revit Architecture places the center of the imported geometry at the center of the model. You link two building models to the project. you have the option to manually place the linked building model or allow Revit Architecture 2009 to automatically place it.

click Close. click Training Files. you need to copy the three training files to a different directory and make them writable. Click Open. with write permission.Origin: The origin of the linked document is centered on the cursor. click Open. c_Condo_Complex. Save training files to different folder 1 Create a new folder on your hard drive called Model Linking. click Open. and save the file there. and open Common\c_Site. Otherwise. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 773 . Link condo complex into site project 9 On the File menu.By Shared Coordinates: When using Model Linking in conjunction with Shared Coordinates. select the three files. and click Properties. This tutorial requires write permission to all the training files used. This option is grayed out. you can do so.rvt. ■ ■ Manual . 8 Clear Read-only. Auto . All three files now reside. RELATED See the lesson. 4 On the File menu.Base Point: Not applicable for linked Revit Architecture Files. this system is not exposed to the user. this option will place the link at a predefined location.■ Auto . NOTE You may need to scroll down in the left pane to see the Training Files folder. and click OK. 6 Repeat the previous five steps for the following files: ■ ■ c_Townhouse c_Condo_Complex 7 Open the Model Linking folder. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models on page 789. ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. The required files can be found in the Common folder of the Training files: c_Site. however. Manual . c_Townhouse. in the Model Linking folder that you created. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first step. click Save As.Origin to Origin: The origin of the imported geometry is placed at the invisible origin of the Revit Architecture model. Select c_Site. use the following steps to copy the training files to a new location. NOTE Revit Architecture projects have an internal coordinate system. ■ Manual placement options: ■ Manual . 5 On the File menu. right-click. 2 On the File menu. If you are comfortable doing this using Windows Explorer. Because training files are used in multiple tutorials and are normally installed as read-only.Center: The geometric center of the linked document is at the cursor location.

expand Floor Plans. These represent the footprint outlines of the three building model sites. 10 In the Project Browser. you do not need to change the project units to metric. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. For Positioning. expand Views (all). 11 On the File menu. 12 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder and select c_Condo_Complex. select Auto .NOTE The three project files used in this lesson use imperial units of measurement. 774 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the blue detail lines. and double-click Level 1. you can go to the Settings menu. and make your changes. If you wish to do so. Because model linking and sharing coordinates are not dependent on project units. 13 Click Open.Origin to Origin. click Project Units.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 775 . 15 On the Edit toolbar. The Move command requires two clicks. After you select it. The second click specifies the move endpoint. Standard move commands work with linked building models. click the upper-left corner of the matching blue detail lines above it. The linked model moves as one object. The first click specifies the move start point. Move the condo complex building model 14 Select the linked building model. 17 For the move endpoint. Linked Revit Model: c_Condo_Complex. click (Move). click the upper-left corner of the linked condo complex building model.The condo complex building model is placed approximately at the center of the site model. similar to the behavior of imported DWG objects.rvt displays in the Type Selector. 16 For the move start point.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit. the linked file displays within the confines of the blue detail lines. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. 20 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder. 776 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . select Auto .Origin to Origin. and select c_Townhouse. For Positioning. Link the townhouse building model 19 On the File menu.After you specify the location to move to. 21 Click Open. 18 On the View menu.

Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 777 . Rotate the townhouse 22 Zoom in around the townhouse model and select it. 24 Place the cursor just north of the townhouse and. the townhouse must be rotated 90 degrees clockwise. click (Rotate). you first specify the rotation start point.The townhouse building model displays above the site model. To rotate an object. and then click to specify the end of the rotation. 23 On the Edit toolbar. and click to specify the end of the rotation. when the vertical line displays. 25 Move the cursor 90 degrees clockwise. click to specify the rotation start point. In this case.

28 Select the lower-left corner of the lower-left set of blue detail lines as the move endpoint. 27 Click the lower-left corner of the townhouse building model as the move start point.The rotated townhouse should resemble the following illustration. click (Move). 778 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Move the townhouse 26 On the Edit toolbar. Do not be concerned if the detail lines do not match the exact footprint of the townhouse. This townhouse building model needs to be moved inside the blue detail lines in the lower-left corner of the site model.

30 For the starting point. Linking Building Models from Different Project Files | 779 . Copy the townhouse 29 On the Edit toolbar. The first click specifies the start point.The townhouse is located within its required footprint. 31 Select the upper-right corner of the blue detail lines on the right to specify the copy-to point. The Copy command works much like the Move command. and the second click specifies the copy-to point. select the upper-right corner of the townhouse. click (Copy).

780 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . NOTE After you rotate the townhouse. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. and rotate the townhouse 180 degrees. if it does not fit reasonably well within the detail lines. and click OK. click .A copy of the townhouse displays on the right side of the site project. 32 On the Edit menu. for Name. click (Default 3D View). 33 Click the first instance of the townhouse on the left. enter Townhouse A. under Identity data. 34 On the Options Bar. 36 Use the same technique to name the instance of the Townhouse on the right to Townhouse B. click Rotate. 37 On the View toolbar. use the Move command to make any adjustments.

38 On the File menu. you linked two separate Revit Architecture 2009 models into a site model. click Try Me for the Full Nav Large Wheel. click (SteeringWheels). Modify the vertical position of the townhouses 1 On the View toolbar. 2 On the SteeringWheels. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. click Save. you modify their vertical position so that the townhouses sit correctly on the site. you rotated and moved the building models to fit them into their designated positions within the site development. do so before continuing. you reposition the townhouses in respect to their elevation. After linking the files. In this exercise. In the next exercise. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. click and hold Orbit. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you need this project file open and in this view. In this exercise. you modify the elevation of the townhouses. Repositioning Linked Building Models In this exercise. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 781 . they were placed too low within the site topography. When you originally linked the files. NOTE If this is the first time you are using the SteeringWheels.

TIP Place the cursor over the Level 1 line of the Site project. This process ensures that you are aligning to the level marker in the site project and not to the linked condo complex project. 6 Zoom in closer on the lower half of the townhouse and notice the ground floor level of the townhouse is 11 feet below Level 1 of the site project. Click the Revit Links tab. expand Elevations. and double-click South. under Views (all). you first select the plane you want to align to. 782 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . In the steps that follow. you align the Ground Floor level to Level 1 of the site plan. press TAB until Level 1 : Reference displays in the status bar. 7 On the Tools toolbar. you use the Align command to reposition the linked model within this project. move the cursor over the Ground Floor level of the Townhouse project. When using the Align command. the status bar displays the name of the linked file. and click OK. This is apparent because there is a planter below ground level that was designed to sit on top of the site surface. and then select the plane that you want to align. To do this. and click to select the line. 3 In the Project Browser. Remember to turn on visibility of the Condo Complex after you have completed this task. you may want to hide the Condo Complex from the view. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. In this case. click (Align). and click to select it. 4 Zoom in around the townhouse on the left.rvt.Notice that the townhouse is not at the proper elevation in relationship to the site toposurface. 5 Place the cursor over the townhouse and notice that. when it highlights. clear Visibility for the c_Condo_Complex. 8 Select the Level 1 line of the Site project. If you experience difficulty finding the Level1 : Reference.

12 On the View toolbar. align the Ground Floor level of the remaining townhouse to Level 1 of the Site project. click 13 On the View toolbar. under Elevations. 15 On the File menu. 11 Return to the South elevation view. Do not lock the alignment of the linked file. click and hold Orbit. and then spin the model until it resembles the following illustration. double-click North. 9 In the Project Browser. This would over-constrain the model. click (Default 3D View).Notice that the townhouse is now at the proper height within this project. click Save. Also notice the option displays for you to lock the alignment. (SteeringWheels). 10 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. 14 On the SteeringWheels. Both townhouses should be at the proper level. Repositioning Linked Building Models | 783 .

do so before continuing. In the next exercise. click Visibility/Graphics. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility In this exercise. expand c_Townhouse. 9 Under Visibility. If you have not completed the previous exercise. display settings. By host view matches the display to the settings of the current active project view. 8 For Annotation Categories. click By Host View. scroll down and clear Levels. NOTE Changes to Visibility/Graphics are per view only. In this exercise. you modify how the linked files display within the host project. As you can see. 7 Click the Annotations Categories tab. click Custom. detail level. By linked view. each linked file can have a separate set of levels and relative heights and you can accommodate those differences within the host project. you modify the visibility settings of the linked files within the site project. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project file within another project. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. then the other pages on the RVT Link Display Settings dialog may be set to By host View. 784 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Notice the Level lines for both townhouses no longer display. select <Custom>. under Elevations. NOTE You have three options for controlling visibility settings of a linked file. 5 Under Display Settings for c_Townhouse.rvt. you need this project file open and in this view.NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. you changed the elevation of the townhouses relative to the host project. If the Basics page is set to Custom. and the halftone settings for each linked project. By linked view matches the display to the settings of the linked project view. the defaults are set to By host view for all options. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. Notice that you can change visibility settings of an entire linked file or selected instances of a linked file. click OK. 4 Under Visibility.rvt. 11 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Revit Links tab. 10 Click OK. or Custom. double-click South. When you link a file. The townhouse level lines still display in the remaining elevation views. Modify visibility settings 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. Custom allows you to override specific visibility settings for a linked project or an instance of the linked project. 6 On the Basics tab of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. you can independently control the visibility settings.

Notice both townhouses display in halftone.12 Using the same technique learned in the previous steps. By selecting custom under Model Categories. Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility | 785 . Detail levels of a linked file 18 On the View menu.rvt. medium. you can apply halftone to the entire linked project or individual instances of the model. Halftone displays objects with half their normal darkness. This means that the detail level of the linked file is matched to the detail level of the current active project view. 24 Click OK. In this case. You can click the value for Detail Level. 22 Click the Model Categories tab. you can also apply halftone to individual categories. double-click Level 1. click By Host View. With linked files. Notice the option to halftone individual instances of the townhouse model. under Floor Plans. under Display Settings. no detail level changes are required. 19 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Custom. click the Revit Links tab. click the Revit Links tab. 16 Under Visibility.rvt. select <Custom>. you can independently set the detail level for each model category for each link on a per view basis. Using the Custom option. clear the Levels display for c_Condo_Complex. 21 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. 20 For c_Townhouse. the detail level for the linked townhouse project is set to By Host View. Apply halftone 13 In the Project Browser. on the Basics tab. 15 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and then set the detail level to coarse. By default. and click OK. 17 Select Halftone for the Townhouse project. click Visibility/Graphics. click Visibility/Graphics. or fine. 23 In the Model categories list. 14 On the View menu. expand c_Townhouse.rvt.

In the next exercise. Notice the Phase and Phase filter specified are By host view. All other components are grayed out. click OK. click Custom for the Townhouse link. where you need to specify a different view range so that all the building model plan views cut at the same height. you modified the visibility settings of the townhouse link by turning off the visibility of the level lines and applying halftone in a plan view. select Floor Plan: Ground Floor for Linked view. 25 On the Revit Links tab. In this case. After you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project.rvt. Managing Linked Building Models In this exercise.Modify display settings of linked files You can use display settings to control the view range. and temporary components in that particular phase (New Construction) are displayed. on a sloped site for instance. In this exercise. 31 On the File menu. under Visibility. with Show All as the phase filter applied to the link. those modifications are reloaded into the host project when it is reopened. 28 Select By linked view for View range. you manage the links within the host project by unloading and reloading the linked projects. the townhouse view range now uses the same view range defined within the Floor Plan: Ground Floor of the original linked file. phase. 30 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. the view range of a linked project uses the current view of the host project to define its view range. a connection to the linked project continues to exist. select c_Townhouse. This means that the phase named New Construction for the linked building model is displayed. there are situations. click Save. all new. this is preferable. existing. By default. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this tutorial. 27 In the RVT Link Display Settings dialog. You also changed the view range of the townhouse so it would cut through the building model at the same height as the other linked building model. you need this project file open and in this view. and phase filter of a specific link. Notice that the Custom button displays under Display Settings. 786 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . With the Show All filter applied. 26 Under Display Settings. the host view specifies New Construction for the Phase and Show All for the phase filter. demolished. 29 Click OK. In most cases. However. In this case. If the host file is closed and one of the linked files is modified. you manage the linked files.

4 Under Linked File. If you use a relative path and move the project and linked file together to a new directory. the link is broken because the host project continues to look for the link in the absolute path specified.rvt. Unload and reload links 1 On the File menu. click the Revit tab. 3 Under Path Type. you should use a relative path rather than an absolute. The Loaded option for that linked file is now clear. You learn more about this in the next lesson. The default path type is Relative. the link is maintained. 2 In the Manage Links dialog. The most common scenario for using Absolute is when the linked file is on a network where multiple users need access to it. They supply information regarding the links. As links are moved to new locations in the host project. notice that you have a choice between Relative and Absolute. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models.NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises in this tutorial and the resulting project files. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Locations Not Saved. The buttons at the bottom of the dialog are now active. Notice that the condo complex link no longer displays in the host project. Managing Linked Building Models | 787 . 5 Click Unload. NOTE The Locations Not Saved field is only relevant for links with shared coordinates. 7 Click OK. In a shared coordinate environment. do so before continuing. In general. 6 At the confirmation prompt. click Manage Links. you can use the Save Locations command to save the new locations to the linked project. select c_Condo_Complex. NOTE Unloading linked projects may increase performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. and Saved Path fields are read only. If you use an absolute path and move the project and linked file to a new location. click Yes. Notice the Loaded. any changes made to the locations of a linked file are saved within the linked file rather than the host project.

you should consider the following: ■ Selective open of worksets: When linking a Worksharing-enabled building model. However. both the link symbol and the link instance are placed in the active workset. NOTE Some of the more frequently-used commands from the Manage Links dialog can be accessed by right-clicking the link in the Project Browser. you may decide that you need to see additional worksets of one of those linked files. you can specify which worksets to open after the link is made. the specific worksets opened in each host project must be identical. When you initially place the link.rvt. In general. it is possible to specify which links are loaded when the host file opens. you can also remove a link completely or reload the link from a different location. you must keep in mind which workset the link is placed in. Linking building models with Worksharing enabled In some cases. Notice the condo complex building model has been reloaded into its previous location. To do this. and click Reload. You can then specify the additional worksets you need opened. In the Import/Link RVT dialog. In these cases. Linking a building model into multiple host projects: Although the same Worksharing-enabled building model can be linked within multiple host projects. click the arrow next to the Open button. The user who creates the first link determines the status for all other linked files. click Save As. Changing the linked worksets: While working in a host file with Worksharing-enabled linked files.TIP In the Manage Links dialog. expand Revit Links. 788 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 9 On the File menu. link instances can be reassigned to different worksets. 8 In the Project Browser. you should try to keep all instances of a link on the same workset. ■ ■ ■ TIP When opening a Worksharing-enabled host file. the link is not loaded. you may need to link projects that have Worksharing enabled. Host files with Worksharing enabled: When the host file has Worksharing activated. Links consist of two parts: the link symbol and the link instance. go to the Manage Links dialog and use the Reload From command. If you choose not to open that workset. and select Specify. right-click c_Condo_Complex. This enhances performance by reducing the quantity of components that must be opened and drawn. A link is only loaded if the workset that the link instance is assigned to opens.

do so before continuing. If you intend to complete the next lesson now. This lesson requires the completion of the lesson Linking Building Models on page 772. leave the project file open in its current view. you are deciding which coordinate system will be used by the two files. When you link a Revit Architecture 2009 project into another project (the host project). TIP You can also use shared coordinates with linked DWG files. you learn how to share the coordinates between the host and linked projects. you are establishing a shared origin point. Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates In this exercise. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models In this lesson. navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise. project or shared coordinates can be specified in the Export Options dialog. and save it as an RVT file. If you have not completed the previous lesson. In this exercise. In most cases where the host project consists primarily of site components and the linked projects contain the building models. you can choose to use the coordinates of either the host project or the linked project.10 In the Save As dialog. name the file Site_Project. it is important that this file exist in the same directory as the condo complex and townhouse projects. In the next lesson. When used in conjunction with model linking. the host project Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models | 789 . you managed the linked files by unloading and reloading the townhouse project. Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models. The host file consists primarily of site components. NOTE If you intend to complete the next lesson. When Revit project views are exported to DWG. In essence. you can keep track of the multiple locations in which a linked building model may reside. and the resulting project files. you publish the coordinates from a host project file to two different buildings that are linked to that project. you learn how to share coordinates between project files so that you can correctly locate building models with respect to each other. When you share coordinates between projects.

click the Condo Complex. the host file acquires the coordinates of a specified linked file. do so before continuing. Publish coordinates 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. As indicated in the Status Bar. You can also acquire coordinates when working in the host project. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous lesson. When you are working in the host project.rvt and click Open. If you have closed the project. This ensures all the linked building models define their position with respect to the site data. 790 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . Linking Building Models on page 772. open it before continuing. In this case. This sends the coordinate information to the linked project so that its internal coordinate system matches the host project.coordinates are used. 2 On the Tools menu. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. you can publish the coordinates of the linked files. You may want to do this in a case when the link refers to a DWG that has an established coordinate system that you want the host project to adopt. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. If you have not completed the lesson. 3 In the drawing area. click Open. and the resulting project files. Select Site_Project. It is the building model in the upper center of the host project. you must now select a linked project to publish coordinates to. click Shared Coordinates ➤ Publish Coordinates.

Specify a townhouse location 1 In the drawing area of the floor plan Level 1. Both projects now share a coordinate system and can be linked to one another using this common coordinate system. An example of a linked file with many locations is a prototype model of a house that is placed on 3 different lots. but can have multiple additional locations. then the location becomes saved in the linked file. However. when the edges highlight. Lot B. select Location 1. You have published the coordinates of the host project to the linked project. it is placed at a specific location. This location is defined as being a specified location with respect to the origin of the Host. and click OK. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 791 . NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise within this lesson and the resulting project files. click to select it. Linked files using shared coordinates must have at least one defined location. 5 On the Design Bar. Each of these lots is simply a different position for the same house design. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates When a Revit Architecture 2009 model is linked into a host project. do so before continuing. if coordinates are published from the host to the linked project. On the Status Bar. This makes it possible to use the same building file to represent identical buildings on a site.4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. Each of the locations can then be saved within the linked file for reference. click Modify to end the Publish Coordinates process. You also relocate the shared origin of the project. this location is not saved outside of the host project. you specify and save the two townhouse locations. move the cursor over the left townhouse and. In this exercise. you need this project file open and in this view. notice you are still in Publish Coordinates mode and Revit Architecture is waiting for you to select another link. Until coordinates are shared between the link and the host. and Lot C. These three locations can be named Lot A. If you have not completed the exercise. even though both models originate from one linked file. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson.

8 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click . a dialog displays telling you to reconcile the coordinates. This means that you need to choose which coordinate system will be shared by both files. and click OK. click Reconcile. After a link instance is assigned a shared location. 4 Under Value. 14 In the Choose Location dialog. 7 In the Rename dialog. Constrain a link to a specific location 11 Select the townhouse building model on the right side of the host project. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. you have only two choices: ■ ■ Move the instance to an existing location that is not already in use. In the Choose Location dialog. . Because this is the first time you are setting up the shared coordinates between the host and the linked models. under Instance Parameters. enter Lot A for New. Under Record selected instance as being positioned at location. changing the position of that instance can affect the definition of the location that is saved with the linked file. click Rename. 6 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. This is a one-time operation. Record the current position as a location. click Change. notice the Shared Location value is Not Shared. 5 In the Share Coordinates dialog: ■ ■ Select Publish the shared coordinate system. select Move instance to. This is because the coordinates for this linked file have already been shared. 12 On the Options Bar. click Not Shared for Shared Location. When constraining a link to a location. notice that you do not have an option to acquire or publish coordinates. and click OK. click Not Shared for Shared Location. click OK. click 13 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 In the Select Location dialog. It is only necessary to reconcile coordinates once. under Instance Parameters.2 On the Options Bar. 792 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . notice the Shared Location value is now Lot A. 10 In the Element Properties dialog.

Record current position as. You can relocate an entire project with respect to all the linked files that are shared with it. and click OK. click Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. you essentially move the origin of the shared coordinates. This is because you cannot choose a location where an instance link already exists. 27 Select the townhouse on the right in Lot B and drag it a short distance in any direction. When you release the mouse button. This is a two-click process. The second click specifies the move endpoint. 25 In the Manage Links dialog.Notice the OK button is not active. 30 On the Tools menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 24 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. a warning displays. you are prompted to save the locations to the linked files. You now have two different locations for the townhouse building model: Lot A and Lot B. click OK. click OK. NOTE If you attempt to close a host file without saving location changes made to linked files. You are given the opportunity to save the new location. and click OK. Because Lot A is currently in use. it is not automatically saved within the linked file. select the second option. Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates | 793 . click the Revit tab. The first click specifies the move start point. Save locations 21 On the File menu. To explicitly save a location. Notice the OK button is still not active. 28 Click Cancel to return the townhouse to Lot B. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. you must go to the Manage Links dialog and save the locations there. or cancel the action. 23 Click Save Locations. and the left townhouse resides at that location. make sure Lot B is selected. 16 Click Change. although it may appear that the linked files are moving. ignore the warning. 31 Click just north of the site topography and just below the North elevation symbol. 26 Click OK. you cannot redefine its location. You created the Lot A location in previous steps. 22 In the Manage Links dialog. Relocate a project 29 On the View menu. 17 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and then select the townhouse project. You are informed that you have attempted to move a linked file that has been saved to a specific location. 19 In the Select Location dialog. the active location position is moved. By relocating a project. click Manage Links. click Duplicate. select Save. When you relocate a project. and click OK. enter Lot B for Name. 18 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. notice the Locations Not Saved option for the townhouse project is no longer selected. 15 In the Choose Location dialog. When you create a location.

35 In the Save Modified Linked Model dialog. 794 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . and the linked projects are offset the distance that you moved the origin. you work in one of the linked projects. NOTE In the following exercise. you created and saved the locations of each townhouse. and click OK. You cannot work on a host file and one of its linked files simultaneously in the same session of Revit Architecture. click Undo to return the origin to its original position. 36 On the File menu. Notice the site topography and the linked building models no longer line up. 34 On the File menu. In this exercise.32 Move the cursor horizontally to the left approximately 40' and click to relocate the shared origin. click Close. You have also learned how to relocate the host project with respect to the linked projects. 33 On the Edit menu. click Save. select Save.

rvt file. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. 2 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. Because this building model only has one named location.Working with a Linked Building Model After a file has been linked into a host and its coordinates are shared. do so before continuing. Select c_Townhouse and click Open. Also. The condo complex is positioned relative to the active location of the townhouse building model. click Import/Link ➤ Revit. it is placed automatically within the host project.rvt file. 4 Zoom out to see the condo complex building model. you can select which of the defined locations is the active location that you would like to work on. If you have not completed the exercises. This project is currently linked to the Site_Project. if other models were linked into the same host.By Shared Coordinates. click Open. When opening the linked file. the linked file contains information about its location with respect to the host. The current active location is Lot A. It is located in Lot A and Lot B within that project file. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. double-click 1st Floor. Link a project 1 In the Project Browser. For Positioning. 3 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. you could link them in and have them retain their correct position. the condo complex is linked within the Site_Project. Working with a Linked Building Model | 795 . In addition. Select c_Condo_Complex. you work on the townhouse building model and modify its location. In this exercise. Click Open. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. select Auto .

and click Make Current. 6 Select Lot B. click OK. you need this project file open and in this view. enter Lot C. 3 In the Name dialog. Notice that the condo complex link has repositioned itself as though the townhouse was on Lot B. In this exercise.Change the active location 5 On the Settings menu. Manage locations 1 On the Settings menu. do so before continuing. 4 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and click OK. In this exercise. 796 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . 6 In the Element Properties dialog. In the host file. 2 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. click Manage Place and Locations. If you have not completed the exercises. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. In the next exercise. Lot C now exists as a location although it has not been specified as an instance. under Graphics. click Duplicate. Orient a view to true north 5 On the View menu. you worked within a project that is linked within another project. Managing Shared Locations The Manage Place and Locations command allows you to quickly create new location names or rename existing ones. you manage the shared locations. you can select Lot C if necessary. and use the Report Shared Coordinates tool. orient a view to true north. These new locations can be assigned later within a host file. select True North for Orientation. and click OK. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise of this lesson. You loaded a linked file into the townhouse project and then changed the active location to see how the project reacts to the changes. click Manage Place and Locations. you create a new location. Notice that Lot A is the current active location. click View Properties. 7 Click OK.

click Shared Coordinates ➤ Report Shared Coordinates.7 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. On the Options Bar. notice the coordinates display in regards to the direction and distance to the origin.rvt and click Open. click Open. Select Site_Project. Navigate to the Model Linking folder you created in the first exercise of this tutorial. Scheduling Components of Linked Files In this exercise. You rotated a view to true north and used the Report Shared Coordinates tool to locate components in regards to the origin. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercises within this lesson and the resulting project files. Report shared coordinates 8 On the Tools menu. In this exercise. You can save the file if you wish. you created a new location using the Manage Place and Locations tool. This command allows you to determine the location of elements and points in the model with respect to the shared coordinate origin. Training File ■ ■ ■ On the File menu. do so before continuing. click Close. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 797 . Create a door schedule 1 Verify that the floor plan Level 1 is the active view. If you have not completed the exercise. you schedule components of the host file and of all linked files. 10 On the File menu. 9 Click any component or in any location on the drawing area. Notice that the orientation of the model resembles the site project.

and click OK. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. under Category. click the Fields tab. and click Add. 798 | Chapter 23 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . click Schedule/Quantities. 6 Add the remaining fields in the following order: ■ ■ ■ Family and Type Comments Cost 7 Select Include elements in linked files. Select the fields to display in the door schedule 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 5 Under Available fields.2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Count. select Doors.

click Close. Because you did not itemize every instance of each door type. under Other. Sort schedule data 9 In the Project Browser. You have completed this tutorial. Scheduling Components of Linked Files | 799 . select Family and Type for Sort by. and then click OK twice. click Edit for Sorting/Grouping. and click Properties. 13 On the File menu. expand Schedules/Quantities. the schedule lists the total count for each door type. You also sorted the schedule data to produce a consolidated listing of the components. 14 On the File menu. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Door Schedule. 12 Select Grand totals.8 Click OK. click Save. 11 In the Schedule Properties dialog. In order to see a concise listing of all the doors in the campus project. In this exercise. and a grand total for the number of doors in the project buildings. you can sort the schedule data and display a single table entry per door type. clear Itemize every instance. you created a schedule of doors in the host file and all linked files of a project.

800 .

Customizing Project Settings and Templates 801 .

802 .

and set it as your default template. 8 In the New Project dialog. Modifying General System Options In this exercise. which is independent of the project settings. notification preferences. In the second lesson. These settings control the graphics. under Template file. click Browse. 803 . and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects. 7 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog.Modifying Project and System Settings 24 In this tutorial. they are not saved to project files or template files. 4 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. you modify project settings to control the appearance of components and subcomponents within that project. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. Modifying System Settings In this lesson. you learn how to control the system settings for Revit Architecture.rte. select Invert background color. selection default options. you create an office template. In the first lesson. you learn how to modify your Revit Architecture 2009 working environment. Finally. Notice that the drawing area is black. and your username when using worksets. journal cleanup options. click OK. 3 In the Options dialog. 6 In the New Project dialog. 10 In the Options dialog. click the value for Selection color. you modify the system environment. Set graphics settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Close to close all open projects. you modify the settings that control your local Revit Architecture working environment. 11 Under Colors. click the Graphics tab. click Training Files. and click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project.

click No. the elements causing the error display using this color. select red. click Modify. 25 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 15 Click OK. 18 On the Design Bar. Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. For Selection color. 14 Under Notifications. and select the wall. click the Graphics tab. 19 On the Design Bar. select One hour. and make the following changes: ■ ■ Under Colors. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed.rvt. 17 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. and open Metric\m_Settings. 24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 22 When prompted to save changes.12 In the Color dialog. However. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. click Training Files. and click OK. select None. click Wall. When an error occurs. clear Invert background color. For Tooltip assistance. 26 In the Options dialog. select yellow. the status bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Click File menu ➤ Close. Notice that the system settings apply to this project. click Modify. 23 Click File menu ➤ Open. 804 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 13 Click the General tab. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. specify the following options: ■ ■ For Save reminder interval. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color.

there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path. family template files. architectural firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. Notice that the drawing area background colors are no longer inverted and that tooltips display when you place the cursor over any building component. Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. You can modify the existing Specifying File Locations | 805 . 10 In the Places dialog. select values for When number of journals exceeds and Delete journals older than (days). These settings control locations of important Revit Architecture files. click Browse. 30 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. select your preferred Save reminder interval. such as in a large. This path is set automatically during the installation process. 6 In the Browse For Folder dialog. 7 In the Options dialog. Your login name displays by default. Specifying File Locations on page 805. select Normal.27 Click the General tab. ■ ■ 28 Click OK. 2 In the Options dialog. Journals can be run to detect a problem or recreate lost steps or files. centralized. and click Open. and click Browse to select a template. Each library path points Revit Architecture to a folder of families or training files. Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template. click the File Locations tab. you can start a new project with that template. Under Journal File Cleanup. select the folder to save your files to by default. Under Username. enter the name you want to use during worksharing. They are saved at the termination of each Revit Architecture session. including your default project template. under Default path for family template files. These files are used in the software support process. and make the following changes: ■ Under Notifications. notice the list of library names. However. TIP To view a template. Journal files are text documents that record each step during your Revit Architecture sessions. 29 Click File menu ➤ Close. click Browse. 4 Click Cancel. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. click Browse. Journal files are deleted automatically after their number exceeds the value you specify. Set file locations 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. click Places. and family libraries. you specify default file locations. do not save the changes. Specifying File Locations In this exercise. 3 Under Default template file. 5 Under Default path for user files. 8 Click Cancel. If prompted. For Tooltip assistance.

or families. 11 In the Places dialog. Load. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. saving. and you can create new libraries.library names and path. or loading a Revit Architecture file. Save. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. and select it as the library path. When you are opening. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. and Import dialogs. click (Add Value). you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. and click the icon side of the field. notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog. that displays on the right 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit Architecture projects. In the following illustration. and change the name to My Library. under Libraries. TIP You may want to create a new folder first. 806 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . and click Open. templates.

Specify rendering settings 26 Click the Rendering tab. select Ignore words in UPPERCASE. click Edit. Load. Save. and click OK twice. 16 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list. click the My Library icon. 23 Select My Library. 5 In the text editor. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. scroll down the list of building industry terms. 17 Click File menu ➤ Open. and Import dialogs. enter sheetmtl-Cu. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library.The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit Architecture Open. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. custom color files. (Remove Value) to delete the library. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. click Edit. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. 21 Click the File Locations tab. 15 Under Library Name. view the current path. Specifying Spelling Options | 807 . you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. 2 In the Options dialog. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit Architecture. If you work in a large office. The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. click the Spelling tab. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. 22 Click Places. click My Library. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. such as bump maps. 3 Under Settings. 9 In the text editor. If you want to relocate this path. Specifying Spelling Options on page 807. 19 Click Cancel. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 20 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. specify the new location here. This path is determined during installation. 28 Click OK. and decal image files. Modify spelling settings 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. 24 Click 25 Click OK. 27 Under Render Appearance Library Location. Notice that Revit Architecture navigates directly to the library path.

You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. click default template. 4 In the New Project dialog. click OK. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. As you zoom in and out within a view. click File menu ➤ Save. 14 Click in the drawing area. 808 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. under Template file. click OK. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. and then click File menu ➤ Exit. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Options.11 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings on page 808. 2 In the New Project dialog. 12 On the Standard toolbar. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. click OK. click Training Files. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. Modify snap increments 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit Architecture project. 20 Under Personal dictionary. click Modify. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU. click Restore Defaults. In this exercise. click Text. 21 In the text editor. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 18 In the Options dialog. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 23 In the Options dialog. work with snapping turned off. you modify snap settings. Revit Architecture uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Edit. and open Metric\Templates\m_Tutorial_Default. (New) to open a new Revit Architecture project using the 13 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click the Spelling tab. you modify snap increments. do not save the changes. click Browse. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 16 Click Tools menu ➤ Spelling. 5 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. If prompted. 22 In the text editor. or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 19 Under Settings. You can turn snap settings on and off. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. delete sheetmtl-CU.rte.

9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.6 Under Dimension Snaps. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. use the wheel button on your mouse. snapping reverts to the system default settings. 10 On the Options Bar. Modifying Snap Settings | 809 . TIP To zoom while sketching. and move the cursor to the right. For example.. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 1000 mm increments. click Wall. 8 In the Snaps dialog. While sketching. such as ZO to zoom out. click OK. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. zoom out until it does so. clear Chain. and enter 500 . 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 1000 . notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 7 Under Object Snaps. enter SM. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. If it does not.

and delete the value 500 . 20 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. 810 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 23 Under Dimension Snaps. 19 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. 14 Click to set the wall endpoint. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely.12 While sketching a generic straight wall. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 500 mm. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. and do not save the file. 26 Proceed to the next lesson. 17 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously.. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 22 Click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. This is the increment that you added previously. Do not set the wall end point. If you move the cursor along the wall. and click Wall. and specify the wall endpoint. Use snapping shortcut keys 16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. When you use shortcut keys to control snapping. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. 18 Enter SM. 25 Click File menu ➤ Close. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. 24 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings on page 811. 21 Move the cursor downward. it will snap to the endpoints. Notice that snapping is once again active. and the wall edges. the midpoint. and move the cursor to the right. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall.

save the project file with a unique name. and open Metric\m_Settings. you create a new material and apply it to a model element. In the steps that follow.rvt. you modify the way the Project Browser organizes the project. After you create a new fieldstone material and apply it to the exterior wall face. lines. fill patterns. Finally. Create a new material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. click Training Files. annotations. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you render a region to observe the changes.Modifying Project Settings In this lesson. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. This building model has a generic roof and generic floor. you modify the appearance of components and subcomponents in a project. When you apply a material to an element. Creating and Applying Materials In this exercise. Well designed materials provide the foundation for photorealistic renderings. you learn how to control the project environment by using the options available on the Settings menu. The exercises in this lesson should be done sequentially using the same project file. and object styles. Modifying Project Settings | 811 . You create and modify materials. you begin with a simple building model consisting of brick on CMU exterior walls. Using these options. and use it to complete the remaining exercises. If you cannot complete the exercises in their entirety. it defines the appearance of that element in shaded and rendered views.

Apply the new material 12 In the Project Browser. Notice that the material settings have not changed from the material that you duplicated. The Render Appearance Library is a local. scale.Fieldstone. 4 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. the Render Appearance tab updates to display properties for the selected stone. 812 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . read-only library for render appearances. You have created a new material that can be applied to any model element in this project. The properties describe the color. These details will display in rendered images. 3 Click (Duplicate). you modify the material so that it displays correctly in a shaded or rendered view. and double-click 02 Entry Level. 6 Click Replace. for Class. all materials that are part of that family are also loaded into the project. In the Materials dialog. This command creates a new material using the selected material settings as the starting point. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to the Masonry . 2 Scroll down the materials list. the modified render appearance is stored as part of the project file. 9 Click Apply. select Stone. It is not stored in the read-only Render Appearance Library. In the next exercise. Notice that no surface pattern is defined for this material.Stone. and click (Element Properties). 10 Click the Graphics tab. and click OK. This list includes all materials available for use on model elements. and select Masonry . The list displays only render appearances that belong to the stone class. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans.Fieldstone. When a model element is loaded into a project.Fieldstone material. In the steps that follow.Notice the materials listed on the left side of the dialog. 13 Select the lower exterior wall. Notice that the surface pattern is still blank. 11 Click OK. 8 Select Riverstone Blue. and texture of the material. When you change properties of a render appearance. However. Masonry . 7 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. this material provides a starting point for the new material. and click OK. enter Masonry . Change the render appearance 5 Click the Render Appearance tab.

click (Default 3D View). and click OK. 21 Click OK three times. 18 For Finish 1.Brick. When you render a 3D view that includes the lower wall. 25 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 16 Enter the new wall name. 19 On the right side of the Material field. select the rear exterior wall.Fieldstone. the wall will display the render appearance specified for Masonry . select Basic Wall: Fieldstone on CMU. 24 In the Type Selector. 15 Click Duplicate. select Masonry .Fieldstone. 22 Select the left exterior wall.14 In the Element Properties dialog. click Model Graphics Style. . 17 For Structure. 26 On the View Control Bar. Fieldstone on CMU. and verify that Shading with Edges is selected. 23 While pressing CTRL. All of the exterior walls of this project are now Fieldstone on CMU. click in the Material field. Layer #1 is the exterior finish of the wall. 20 In the Materials dialog. click Edit/New. Creating and Applying Materials | 813 . click This is the material that you created. click Edit. It is currently assigned the material Masonry .

under Quality. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. for Setting. 814 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . select the render region (a red rectangle). This is because a surface pattern was not selected when the fieldstone material was defined. Higher quality renderings require more time to generate. and click Rendering. 32 In the Rendering dialog. and drag its blue grips to adjust the render region around the building. 27 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. When finished. TIP If the Rendering tab is not available on the Design Bar.Notice that the exterior walls are no longer brick. the rendered image displays fieldstone walls. you create a fieldstone pattern and apply it to this material. select Low or Medium. In the following exercise. click Rendering Dialog. 28 In the Rendering dialog. right-click the Design Bar. 31 In the Rendering dialog. click Render. 29 In the 3D view. select Region. The rendering process begins. 30 Zoom in on the render region so you can see the building more clearly in the drawing area. and there is no stone pattern applied in this view.

you create a new pattern called Fieldstone and apply it to the material you created in the previous exercise. 6 In the Add Surface Pattern dialog. 3 Under Pattern Type. Drafting pattern density is fixed. Notice that no model surface pattern displays on the fieldstone wall. and clear Region. 33 In the Rendering dialog. such as steel. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise.rvt. such as brick coursing or ceramic tile on a wall. 4 Scroll down the list of patterns. Create a new fill pattern 1 In the Project Browser. choose Model. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns In this exercise. expand Elevations. 36 Navigate to a folder of your preference. click Import. Zoom into the model. 37 Proceed to the next exercise. Both pattern types are created and applied in a similar way. Then click Render again. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns on page 815. and save the file as m_Settings-in progress.TIP If you want to see the material in greater detail. Creating and Applying Fill Patterns | 815 . Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. There are 2 types of fill patterns: model and drafting. and double-click West. Notice that a fieldstone pattern is not available. Drafting patterns represent material in symbolic form. 5 Click New. in the Rendering dialog. and adjust the boundaries of the render region to describe a smaller area.rvt. which consists of a double-diagonal hatching pattern. 7 Under Custom. select Custom. 35 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 34 Close the Rendering dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. click Show the model. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. Model patterns are fixed and scale with the model. click Show the model. m_Settings-in progress.

23 On the Design Bar. click to select a fill pattern.Fieldstone material. In the Materials dialog. 17 On the right side of the Materials field. and open Common\Fieldstone_Model. It is currently assigned the material Masonry . 13 On the Options Bar. and click OK.Fieldstone. 10 For Name. 18 Under Surface Pattern. click Edit. Finish 1 is the exterior finish of the wall. under Pattern Type. 16 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click Modify. Apply the fieldstone pattern 12 Select the west exterior wall with windows. and for Import scale. 21 In the Materials dialog. select fldstn. click in the Material field. 14 In the Element Properties dialog.56. and click OK. select Model. The west wall of the building displays as solid fill. click Edit/New. click 15 For Structure. 11 Click OK. The new model pattern is available in the Fill Patterns dialog. 22 Click OK three times. 20 Select the Fieldstone model pattern. 9 Under Custom. 19 In the Fill Patterns dialog.8 In the left pane of the Import Fill Pattern dialog. enter .pat. click OK. click . (Element Properties). 24 Zoom into the model until the fill pattern appears. 816 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . notice that no surface pattern is applied to the Masonry . enter Fieldstone. click Training Files. for Finish 1.

adjust your zoom settings as needed. and drag a rectangle around the 3 windows facing you. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and double-click 3 Windows. The client may not be certain of the exact window frame color to use and may want to see renderings of various options. m_Settings-in progress. click (Default 3D View). Apply object styles by category 1 In the Project Browser. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. TIP If the pattern does not display. Rather than continually modify the type properties of each window type. you can set the window frame material to By Category. For example. Object styles allow you to control the appearance of multiple component types. Object styles are applied in every view and can be overridden in a particular view by modifying the Visibility/Graphics settings. Controlling Object Styles on page 817. You can then change the material in the Object Styles dialog and apply it to all window types. Controlling Object Styles | 817 . Controlling Object Styles You can use object styles to control the appearance of components and subcomponents. use the shortcut keys ZR (Zoom in Region). expand 3D Views. there are often multiple window types within a project. 2 On the keyboard. 27 Proceed to the next exercise.25 On the View toolbar.rvt. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save.

click Edit/New. 10 Select the arched window. 4 Select one of the rectangular windows. 9 Click OK twice. click in the Value column. click (Element Properties). click Modify.3 On the View Control Bar. click Edit/New. . click (Element Properties). This means that the material is assigned by the Object Styles setting. and click . for Trim Exterior Material. 818 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . under Materials and Finishes. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. click in the Value column. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 On the Design Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 8 In the Materials dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. click By Category. for Trim Exterior Material. 14 In the Materials dialog. and click 15 Click OK twice. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice the exterior frames of all the windows are now gray. 5 On the Options Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click By Category (located under the materials list).

or keywords include the word red. and click 20 In the Materials dialog. Controlling Object Styles | 819 . and select Trim. select Use Render Appearance for Shading. for Class. 23 Click Replace. click in the Material column. Revit Architecture determines the average color for the render appearance. and click 22 Click the Render Appearance tab.Change the render appearance 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 19 For Trim. Notice that the red paint trim material is applied to all windows regardless of their type. and click OK. descriptions.red paint. 25 In the search field. and click OK. Change the color in shaded views 27 Click the Graphics tab. It uses this color to represent the material in 2D and 3D views whose model graphics style is Shading or Shading with Edges. select Trim. . type red. for Name. The list displays render appearances that belong to the Paint class and whose names. 21 In the Duplicate Revit Material dialog. select Paint. 30 In the Object Styles dialog. expand Windows. 24 In the Render Appearance Library dialog. When you render a 3D view. click OK. 28 Under Shading. 18 On the Model Objects tab. 26 Select Paint Dark Red Glossy. (Duplicate). click OK. enter Trim . the rendered image will show dark red paint for the window trim. 29 In the Materials dialog.

click 32 Click File menu ➤ Save. 7 On the View Control Bar. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. select Roofs. (Default 3D view).31 On the View toolbar. Use object styles to apply the change to all views. m_Settings-in progress. you create a new line pattern and apply it to the fascia of the roof. 3 In the Line Patterns dialog. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise.rvt. for Name. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles on page 820. under Category. you can apply it using either of the following methods: ■ ■ Use Visibility/Graphics settings to modify the roof appearance in a specific view. 4 In the Line Pattern Properties dialog. enter Roof Line. click New. 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Create a new line pattern 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise. You then create a new line style to mark the zoning setback from the property line.rvt. 820 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . is open with the 3D view active. select Roof Line. 5 Enter the Types and Values shown in the following illustration: 6 Click OK twice. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Now that you have created a line pattern. 10 For Line Color. 11 For Line Pattern. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. m_Settings-in progress. 9 In the Object Styles dialog. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles In this exercise. select Red.

under 3D Views. and verify that Hidden Line is selected. click Model Graphics Style. Notice that the line color displays in this view. The line style is applied to the roof in the view. 14 On the View Control Bar.12 Click OK. Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 821 . but not the line pattern. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click to Building.

select Roof Line. The pattern is not applied in a perspective or camera view where you expect to see a solid line. select Roofs. and orthogonal 3D views show line color and pattern. under Floor Plans. 23 For Projection/Surface Lines. sections. 22 On the Model Categories tab. This setting overrides the appearance of the roof only in the current view. For Pattern. select Black. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. select Roofs. 21 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 18 For Line Color. 19 For Line Pattern. click Override. for Visibility. For Color. 15 In the Project Browser. select Blue. double-click 03 Roof. 16 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. Plans. 17 In the Object Styles dialog. specify the following options: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. select Solid. 20 Click OK. under Category. select 5.NOTE The line pattern is most appropriate in plan views. 822 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . elevations.

click Lines. under Floor Plans. (Line). specify the following: ■ For Plane. 27 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. 33 In the Type Selector. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ For Line Weight Projection. 34 On the Options Bar. select Red. For Line Pattern. 30 For the Zoning Setback category. click New. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 31 Click OK. ■ ■ 35 Draw lines for the setback approximately as shown: Modifying Line Patterns and Styles | 823 . 28 In the Line Styles dialog. Notice the site topography and the property lines. select Zoning Setback. This places the line above the topography. Click Click (Draw). double-click Site. select Double dash.25 Click OK twice. under Modify Subcategories. and click OK. Create a new line style 26 In the Project Browser. enter Zoning Setback. 29 For Name. select 2. For Line Color. select Level: 02 Entry Level.

Notice that the Zoning Setback lines display in this view. Modifying Annotations on page 825. 38 On the Model Categories tab. Expand Site. select it. 36 On the View toolbar. 37 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click (Default 3D View). use the Detail Lines command on the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and clear Property Lines. 39 Click OK. 41 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. expand Lines. NOTE If Site is not selected. and clear Zoning Setback. Detail lines only show in the view where they are created. 46 Proceed to the next exercise. click 45 Click File menu ➤ Save.NOTE If you only want the setback to display on the site view. under Floor Plans. 824 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . This turns off the visibility of the Zoning Setback lines only in this view. 43 Click OK. as if they are placed on an overlay of the view. 44 On the View toolbar. 42 On the Model Categories tab: ■ ■ Expand Lines. 40 In the Project Browser. double-click 02 Entry Level. and clear Zoning Setback. (Default 3D View). and then clear Property Lines.

Imperial. click Modify. 9 In the Type Selector. m_Settings-in progress.Modifying Annotations In this exercise. 6 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 10 On the Standard toolbar. 13 Select a tagged window in the west wall. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. click one wall. 11 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 Under Text. you create a new dimension style using units of measurement that differ from the project settings. under Floor Plans. for Units Format. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select Linear . m_Settings-in progress. double-click 02 Entry Level. You have created a new dimension style.rvt.Imperial and click OK. To place a dimension. click Load a new window tag 12 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. and that the tags display the window type rather than the window instance number. 7 Click OK twice. (Undo). Modifying Annotations | 825 . Notice that the windows on the west wall are tagged. 4 Enter the name Linear . click another wall. select Feet and fractional inches. is open with the 02 Entry Level floor plan active. and then click outside the second wall. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. For Units.rvt. click Duplicate. and place a dimension on the floor plan. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click Dimension. You also load a new window annotation symbol and apply it to show the window instance number rather than the window type. click the default value. Create a new dimension style 1 Verify that the project from the previous exercise.

under Category. 26 On the Options Bar. 27 On the west wall. 18 In the Tags dialog. you load a new window tag that displays the window instance mark. click Training Files. clear Leader.Number as the assigned tag. In the steps that follow. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag . notice the Mark value differs from the window tag value.Number. In the preview image. 22 Under Loaded Tags. notice that the label displays 1i. 24 While pressing CTRL. 23 Click OK. 28 On the Design Bar. click M_Window Tag . 15 In the Element Properties dialog. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the drop-down arrow that displays. 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. This indicates this tag is designed to display the window instance value rather than the type value. 826 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Then press Delete. A window instance tag displays on the selected window. select the 3 window tags.14 On the Options Bar.Number is now the assigned tag.Number. 21 In the Tags dialog. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. The window tag used in this project is designed to display the type. click the bottom window. scroll to Windows and notice that M_Window Tag .rfa. Leave M_Window Tag . scroll down to Windows. This tag is used when tagging windows By Category. click Tag All Not Tagged. click Tag ➤ By Category. Notice that you can choose between the two window tag types loaded into this project. Notice that there is a window tag loaded and applied to windows. 16 Click Cancel. 19 Click Load. click (Element Properties).

and Detail Level Options In this exercise. 3 In the Format dialog. For Unit symbol. 9 Under Doors and Windows. Set units of measurement 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. Modifications to area rounding are displayed in schedules and area tags.Temporary Dimensions. 5 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Rounding. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. Specify temporary dimension properties 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. click Modify. select Faces. TIP Using the techniques learned in the previous steps. 8 Under Walls. verify that Create is clear. you modify 3 settings that have a broad impact on the project.Temporary Dimensions. click the default value. Specifying Units of Measurement. M_Window Tag . 30 Under Leader. dimensions use these project settings. 29 Select the Window Tag category with the loaded tag. The remaining untagged windows are tagged by instance value. select meters squared. 2 In the Project Units dialog. (Default 3D View). Both window tag types can coexist within the same view. and click OK. Specifying Units of Measurement. for Area. select 0 decimal places. for Rounding. click 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. Temporary Dimensions. select Openings. you modify the detail level assignments. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. Specifying Units of Measurement. In the first section. Unless overridden.Under Category. you can have multiple views: one displaying window type tags and the other displaying window instance values. 31 On the Design Bar. notice Window Tags appears twice. the other displays the instance value. dimension values display using this setting.Number. for Length. Use the project file that you saved at the end of that exercise. click the default value. Unless overridden. 6 Click OK. 4 In the Project Units dialog. In the second section. m_Settings-in progress. and click OK. and Detail Level Options on page 827. you specify the project units of measurements. Each Window Tag category has a different loaded tag: one displays the type value.rvt. 32 On the View toolbar. select To the nearest 100. and Detail Level Options | 827 . you modify the temporary dimension settings. In the final section. Click OK. and click OK.

These drawings and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. The location of temporary witness lines can be changed by clicking their controls. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify how the Project Browser groups and sorts. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. Modifying Project Browser Organization In a typical project. Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. expand Floor Plans. You do not select a view scale to move it. The view scale moves either from the bottom or the top of the column based on the direction. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. you use the arrows between the columns to move view scales from one detail level to another. the detail level is specified automatically according to the arrangement in the table. temporary dimensions now snap to the wall faces and to the door and window openings. 12 Click OK. and open Common\c_Project_Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Any new view created using this scale is automatically assigned the detail level Medium. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. TIP You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties dialog or the Detail Level icon on the View Control Bar. and expand 3D Views. When you create a new view and specify its view scale.rvt. 828 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Organize the Project Browser by views 1 In the Project Browser. Notice the 1 : 50 view scale moved to the Medium column. Specify detail levels 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. click . 14 Click File menu ➤ Close. Training File ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 Between the columns Coarse and Medium. click Training Files. you modify the Project Browser organization and create new methods of grouping and sorting the views and sheets.In this project. In this table. In this exercise. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all).

Phase 1-Structure East Wing . notice that views are grouped by phase.Notice that the views are listed alphabetically. and click OK. 10 In the Project Browser. expand both the Architectural and Structural views. 6 In the Project Browser. 7 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and notice the progression of each view: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Main Bldg . and click OK. 4 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 8 Select Phase. and notice that each is grouped by discipline. and click Apply. 3 Open each of the 3D views in the following order.Phase 3-Structure Completed Project-Structure Completed Structure w/ Roof&Floors Completed Project Each of the 3D views varies by phase and discipline. In the Project Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all).Phase 2-Structure West Wing . select Type/Discipline. In the Project Browser. 5 On the Views tab. notice that Views are divided into Architectural and Structural disciplines. Notice that the sheets are listed alphanumerically based on the sheet number. expand each view type. 9 In the Browser Organization dialog. select Discipline. Modifying Project Browser Organization | 829 .

12 Click the Sheets tab. 17 Enter Phase/Type/Discipline. and click OK. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Group by: Phase Then by: Family and Type Then by: Discipline 19 Click OK. click the Folders tab. Create a new browser organization name 15 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. and click OK.Organize Project Browser by sheets 11 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. 830 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . expand each sheet set. 16 Click the Views tab. under Sheets. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Select Sheet Prefix. 18 In the Browser Organization Properties dialog. and click New.

Notice that the Project Browser has reorganized all the views within this project according to Phase. you maintain consistent standards and reduce the amount of repetitive work. 21 In the Project Browser. Choosing the Base Template In this exercise. you modified various project settings that affect project appearance and organization. and Discipline. In the lesson that follows. All the settings that you changed in this lesson are saved with the project. If you want to save this file. navigate to your preferred directory. under Views. you may decide to modify one or more of these templates to the specific needs of your company. a group of settings is used to specify the project environment.20 In the Browser Organization dialog. When you create a new template based on an existing template. you can select an existing template or begin the project with no template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. and click OK. and click Open. For example. Review existing templates 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. select Phase/Type/Discipline as the current browser organization. and view names. View Type (Family and Type). click Training Files. You can save Project Browser organization schemes and named print settings in a template. By saving these settings as a template and using it throughout the office. You should choose the option that will help you develop the best template with the least amount of work. Creating an Office Template | 831 . The lesson begins with choosing the correct base template and progresses through many of the most common modifications that you should consider to make a template unique to your situation. You can also save these settings in a template file. and open Metric\Templates. expand Complete. Creating an Office Template on page 831. 2 Under Template file. In that case. When you create new projects.rte template. 4 Select the Construction-DefaultMetric. A well designed template will ensure that office standards are maintained and will reduce repetitive work. the same rules apply. you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to other templates. and expand both Architectural and Structural. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. 22 Click File menu ➤ Close. levels. the project template is used to provide the initial project settings such as materials. you create an office template. when you create a new project. you select the starting point for your office template. In this lesson. and click OK. click Browse. You can choose from several templates. You can use an existing template as the baseline or use no template at all. expand 3D Views. dimensions styles. certain baseline settings are still assigned to the new project. you create a Revit Architecture template file and specify it as your default template. Creating an Office Template In this lesson. enter a unique file name. Although Revit Architecture provides many templates to choose from. Proceed to the next lesson. Whenever you create a new project or template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point. Even if you choose not to base that project on a template. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it.

you modify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Materials Fill patterns Object styles Line styles. navigate throughout the various views and schedules. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. In this exercise. Other templates are simple in respect to the predefined views and schedules. The specifics regarding each of these are addressed at the end of this exercise. Modifying Project Settings In this exercise. drag a zoom region around the level heads.5 In the New Project dialog. These settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. for Create new. If you have additional projects open. 7 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Project Browser. Notice that there are more predefined levels than you normally see in the default template. When you create the material. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations. click Browse. you can select it now. 10 Click File menu ➤ Close. and patterns Annotations Project units Temporary dimensions Detail levels Project Browser organization In addition to the list above. Modifying Project Settings on page 832. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 832 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 12 Under Template File. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. 13 Select the default template. select Project. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. and double-click North. you modify the project settings for your new template. 6 Click OK. and click OK. weights. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 11 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. If you want to use a template other than the default. Notice that the construction template is more complex than the default template. in the drawing area. For example. there are additional commands under the Settings menu that allow modifications that can be saved in a template. 15 Under Create new. but the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. 14 Click Open. close them. select Project template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region and. you can create the materials commonly used in most projects.

9 Click OK when finished. the changes are saved as part of the project template. rotate. Modifying Project Settings | 833 . and change render appearance properties. see Specifying File Locations on page 805. Create and modify materials 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Materials. For more details on modifying these settings. You are merely pointed to each area where you can adapt the template to your needs. transparency. If you change render appearance properties. line colors. Create and modify fill patterns 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Fill Patterns. it adopts the material assigned to its object styles category.During this exercise. and move model patterns. You do this by defining the render appearance. 2 Scroll down the materials list. create and modify them as needed. 3 Click the Render Appearance tab. You can assign a different render appearance to a material. and similar attributes. Model patterns represent actual element appearance on a building. texture. If certain materials are commonly used in your office or industry. and materials for model objects. You can also dimension to model pattern lines. Specify object styles 10 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 Scroll through the list of model patterns and drafting patterns. see Modifying Project Settings on page 811. or refer to the online help. see a preview of the rendered material. line patterns. and scroll through the list of categories. In the Object Styles dialog. 5 Click OK twice to close the Render Appearance Library and Materials dialogs. specific modifications are not dictated. TIP For more information about creating new materials. You can align. including color. Observe the materials that are already defined. 12 Modify the properties of any existing categories as needed. see the previous lesson. annotation objects. For more information. 4 Click Replace. 11 Click the Model Objects tab. TIP When the material of an object is set to by category. When you create or modify a material. 14 Click the Annotation Objects tab. and imported objects. you can set line weights. You may want to rename or modify some of the existing materials. or modify existing patterns. or refer to the online help. 8 Create new fill patterns as needed. not in the read-only Render Appearance Library. Modifying System Settings on page 803. create new subcategories. See Modifying Project Settings on page 811 for more information on creating new fill patterns. 13 If necessary. Drafting patterns represent materials in symbolic form. you can specify its appearance in rendered images. Any related files (such as image files or bump maps) should be stored in a location that is accessible to all users of the template.

The widths are dependent on the scale of the design. The arrowheads configured within this dialog can be applied to text notes. and notice the list of existing arrowhead styles. 39 If you need to create a new arrowhead style. The Perspective Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements in perspective views. Modify line styles 17 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Styles. line color. and create new subcategories as needed. 33 Add and delete line patterns as needed. 38 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing arrowhead. or line pattern as needed. 29 Click OK. Modify line patterns 30 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Patterns. and dimensions. 23 Modify existing line weights as needed. You can define the widths of 16 different pens for 6 different drawing scales. 26 Modify existing line weights as needed. 16 Click OK to close the Object Styles dialog. Modify line weights 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Line Weights. 19 If necessary.15 Modify categories. name the style. 20 Click OK. 25 Click the Perspective Line Weights tab. and click Edit. 34 Click OK. 834 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 18 For existing line categories. You can add and delete view scales. such as section lines and dimension lines. select it from this list. ■ ■ 22 Click the Model Line Weights tab. Annotation line widths are independent of the view scale. 32 To modify a line pattern. 24 Add and delete view scales as needed. 31 Scroll through the list of line patterns. The Line Weights command controls the display of line widths for each scale of a view. The Annotation Line Weights tab controls the line width of annotation symbols. tags. click Duplicate. select it. and specify the properties. 37 Modify the properties of existing arrowhead styles if necessary. 28 Modify existing line weights as needed. 27 Click the Annotation Line Weights tab. modify the line weight. Modify arrowheads 35 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Arrowheads. To see the details of a particular style. The dialog has 3 tabs: ■ The Model Line Weights tab controls the line width of model elements (such as walls and windows) in orthographic views. 36 Select the Type drop-down list. create new line subcategories.

55 Click OK. click Load. Specify temporary dimensions 59 Click Settings menu ➤ Temporary Dimensions. and Angle settings. 46 Click OK. Modifying Project Settings | 835 . 54 Modify the unit settings if necessary. TIP In the drawing area. and radial dimensions are modified separately. Notice many categories do not have loaded tags. Modify dimension styles 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Linear. select it from this list. Linear. you can override the assignment by selecting a different tag from the drop-down list. In the Tags dialog. For example. angular. and specify the properties. 44 Click Rename if you want to rename an existing style. Volume. You can have multiple tags loaded for any category. You can override tag assignment using the Type Selector. and click OK. when you add a door with the tag option selected. click Format. 43 Modify the properties of existing linear dimension styles if necessary. click Duplicate. Modify loaded tags 48 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. the door is tagged using the tag assigned to the Doors category in this dialog. 51 After you have loaded the necessary tags. The tag assignments in this dialog dictate the default tag for each category. Specify project units 52 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Units. the last loaded tag becomes the default tag. specify the default location for temporary dimensions. 57 Specify the Slope option. and notice the list of existing linear dimension styles. 42 Select the Type drop-down list. 49 Scroll through the list of loaded tags. 45 If you need to create a new linear dimension style. 56 Repeat the previous two steps for the Area. 53 For Length.40 Click OK. When more than one tag has been loaded for a category. 62 Click OK. 58 Click OK. To see the details of a particular style. make sure each category is assigned the desired tag. 50 To load new annotation tags. Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Radial. 61 Under Doors and Windows. 60 Under Walls. 47 Repeat the previous 5 steps for angular and radial dimensions. ■ ■ Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Dimensions ➤ Angular. specify where you want the temporary dimensions to measure from by default. and choose a decimal symbol. you can modify the location of temporary dimension witness lines. name the style.

In a typical project. In such a case. or edit existing organization types. However. rename.Specify detail levels 63 Click Settings menu ➤ Detail Level. you must decide if the time investment is offset later by the reduction in repetitive work. or Fine. or edit existing organization types. Modify project browser organization 66 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. If you routinely create the same documentation sets. Using the arrows between the columns. This could be useful 836 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can move view scales from one detail level to another. click the arrows between columns. You can find additional information in Help. See Setting up If necessary. The detail level is based on view scale. you often produce multiple packages of related drawings. To organize the views and sheets into sets of deliverables. Use the table below as a checklist. The view scales move from the lower-left to the upper-right and vice-versa. Each of these areas is covered later in this lesson or in other tutorials. View scales are organized under the detail level headings Coarse. create new browser organization types. the detail level of that view is automatically assigned using this table. When you create a new view. Settings Menu Command Project Parameters Associated Tutorial Considerations This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can add project (and shared) parameters to a template. 65 Click OK. RELATED For more information on modifying browser organization. rename. you may only want to add generic settings that would be applicable to most projects. 72 If necessary. 71 Delete. click the Views tab. you may want to modify the browser organization settings within the template. and make modifications in each area as necessary. Medium. You can override the detail level at any time by specifying the Detail Level parameter in the View Properties command. For example. NOTE You cannot select specific scales in this dialog. you should consider each carefully before applying changes to a template. you can save phases or named print settings in a template. 70 Click the Sheets tab. see Modifying Project Browser Organization on page 828. 67 In the Browser Organization dialog. create new browser organization types. These views and sheets can become so numerous that navigating a lengthy Project Browser list can be cumbersome. 69 If necessary. and move view scales as needed. Each command is available on the Settings menu. Additional project settings 74 The Settings menu offers several additional commands that control the project environment. Links to associated tutorials are provided. 68 Delete. you can use the Project Browser settings to instantly modify the grouping and sorting within the Project Browser. To move the view scales. 73 Click OK. Although these settings can be saved within a template. 64 Review the table.

Loading and Modifying Families and Groups on page 837. If necessary. Area and Volume Computations Area Analysis on page 593 View Templates This command is covered in an exercise later in this lesson. you can move onto the next component type. and in the Basics tab of the Design Bar. notice the list of doors already loaded. This would be cumbersome and counterproductive. If you have not completed the previous exercise. Create and modify the view templates to control the appearance of default views and rendered images. click Door. phase filters. title blocks. you load and modify families or groups into the template started in the previous exercise. Load and modify families 1 Use the project started in the previous exercise. You should not load every conceivable family into a template file. or use the Project Browser. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings on page 689 Site Settings If necessary. If this selection is satisfactory. you may want to delete. Although this is possible. or electrical fixtures. if you load every available window type. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups In this exercise. In the steps that follow. You can also specify how room volumes are computed. do so before starting this exercise. you can set the default contour line interval. you can set up the phases. For example. Loading and Modifying Families and Groups | 837 . each component loaded will add to the length of the relative Type Selector list. you must scroll through a lengthy list of windows every time you change a window in a project. 2 In the Type Selector. you could load detail components. Although the options are endless. You should think very carefully about what families or groups to load and modify within a template. Depending on the intended use of this template. You can create area schemes if default settings apply to most projects. the section cut material. You should only load components that tend to be used in every project and are not likely to change. In addition. However. and the poche depth. You can load any family or group into a template. You may want to modify wall types to add a more diverse selection within the template. or add to this selection. and electrical fixtures. See Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. modify. furniture. Phases Project Phasing on page 761 for things such as hardware.Settings Menu Command Associated Tutorial Considerations Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. and graphic overrides applicable to most projects. You can do this in several ways: select a component type and click Properties. it is not recommended because it would increase the file size significantly before the first component was added to the project. 75 Proceed to the next exercise. you do both. you may want to load families into the template to save time later or ensure consistency throughout the office. For example. there are some important thoughts to consider.

Modify door type Create new door type 4 Click OK.3 To modify. Use the Project Browser to modify families 8 In the Project Browser. Modify type properties. click Edit/New. Navigate to the directory containing the door type. click Bar. You may want to open other Design Bar tabs and make modifications to components not available on this tab. Loading from the library is the quickest when you know exactly what families you want to load. 838 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Make modifications. You can also load families and groups from the File menu. 5 Repeat the process for any component type that you want to modify. expand Families. or modify a door. and click OK. Select it. click Edit/New. Notice that you have the option to Load Family or Load File as Group. and click OK. Goal: Load new door type Steps: In the Element Properties dialog. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library. Enter a name. click Load. and click Open. In the Element Properties dialog. create. and click OK. 7 Press ESC twice to return to the template. Notice that each family category is listed. Click Duplicate. You can use the Project Browser to modify family types. In the Element Properties dialog. create. or load a new door type. (Element Properties) on the Options Use the instructions in the table below to load.

Modifying Views and View Templates on page 839. In addition. or modify any component families or groups as necessary. you create and apply the underlying view templates that control their initial appearance. View Range. To do so. Notice it has Autodesk Revit in the upper-right corner. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. You may want to load a title block applicable to your office and then delete this title block. click 12 Click Preview. In addition. and the visibility Modifying Views and View Templates | 839 . The view inherits view properties such as View Scale. In this exercise. load. Notice that a title block symbol is loaded. Modifying Views and View Templates At the beginning of this lesson. This title block is currently part of the template. 11 On the Options Bar. (The title block name may vary depending on the template you started with. and click Delete.) 10 Expand the title block. You can use the Project Browser to delete a component from the project or template. Detail Level. and select the title block type. (Element Properties). create. and you noticed that each template had a unique set of predefined views. View templates help standardize the look of all views by providing the initial settings for a view. 13 Click OK. Discipline. you create the views required for your template. 14 Using any of the techniques learned in previous steps. right-click the component. click Load. you can apply a template to an existing view at any time using the Apply View Template command. To load a title block.9 Expand Annotation Symbols. you created new projects using different templates.

6 Click OK. select Architectural Plan. 2 Under Names.settings of categories and subcategories. and apply the appropriate template. you reduce rework and increase consistency across projects. open the view from the Project Browser. 14 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click Site. there is no limit to the number of view templates that you can apply. 15 In the Project Browser. click Apply. At any time. Create and modify view templates 1 Click Settings menu ➤ View Templates. 10 Select Apply automatically to new views of same type. 11 Click Apply. In addition. and double-click Level 1. select Site Plan. and then click OK. click Apply. double-click Level 2. These values represent the starting point for each plan view. 18 If you modified any other view templates. By modifying the view templates according to your specific needs. and click OK. 840 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . Subsequent modifications to the view template do not affect any current views unless you reapply the view template. Keep in mind that these settings are the default settings for this view type. Create and modify views 19 In the Project Browser. the view is not linked to the template in any way. In this exercise. expand Views ➤ Floor Plans. After applying the template. 8 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 17 If you made modifications to the Site Plan template. 4 If necessary. NOTE Do not select Apply automatically to new views of same type. and click OK. Apply view templates 7 In the Project Browser. The view properties of the target view are instantly reset to match those of the template. There is no limit to the number of times you can apply a view template to a view. 5 Repeat the steps above for each of the view templates in the list. Applying a view template to a view is a one-time action. and then create new views that will automatically use those templates. under Floor Plans. rename or duplicate the view template and make modifications. This would result in the Site Plan view template becoming the default template for all new plan views. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. you can apply a view template to any view. you will first modify view templates. it will use this view template to set the initial view properties. 16 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. These settings are applied when you create a new plan view by adding a new level. 9 Select the Architectural Plan template. double-click South. 3 Specify each value according to your needs. 12 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. under Elevations. Every time a new plan view is created.

expand 3D Views. in the Project Browser. right-click the view name. 30 In the Project Browser. the ViewCube displays in the upper right corner of the drawing area for 3D views. click 29 In the Project Browser. click Level. right-click Level 1. right-click the ViewCube. 25 Add the new level within the elevation view. and elevations. right-click the ViewCube. on the Basics tab of the Design Bar. or an edge of the ViewCube. right-click {3D}. 23 To add more levels to the template. notice that you have the option to rename. 26 Rename and reposition the level as needed. To orient the 3D view to a direction. right-click the ViewCube. 22 In the Project Browser. The view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (all) ➤ 3D Views. Blue level heads have associated plan views. click Orient to a Direction. If prompted. and click Rename. The associated floor plan will use the Architectural Plan view template to set its initial view properties. and click Save View. and select the desired view. duplicate. and select the desired direction. or delete this view. click Window menu ➤ ViewCube. in the shortcut menu. 31 Rename the 3D View. select Make Plan View. 21 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. Create and modify schedules 34 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. If you want to modify view properties. click Schedule/Quantities. To orient the 3D view to another view. You can change the view orientation in many ways: ■ ■ Click a corner. enter a view name. Create 3D views 28 To add 3D views to the template. duplicate. 32 (Optional) To change the orientation of the 3D view. a face. ceiling plans. under 3D Views.Notice the level names. ■ 33 To save the re-oriented view. under Floor Plans. on the View toolbar. Black level heads have no associated views. and click Properties. Make sure you are still in the South elevation view. Rename. review the existing floor plans. By default. Modifying Views and View Templates | 841 . (Default 3D View). 20 In the Project Browser. click Orient to View. If it does not display. use the ViewCube. review the floor plans. 27 Create additional levels as needed. or delete them as needed. and.

Right-click the sheet name. The layer names are stored in a text file (exportlayers. modify settings as needed. You then set the import line weights for DWG/DXF. select the title block and delete it. select and order required fields. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. make the following modifications as needed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Modify export layers for DWG and DXF 1 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DWG/DXF. on the View tab of the Design Bar. 842 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings .You can add schedules to a template. Select a view. You are prompted to select a title block. On the Formatting tab. modify settings as needed. 42 Create new sheets as needed. Revit Architecture presets the layer names to American Institute of Architects (AIA) industry standards. Subsequent sheets are numbered consecutively based on the previous sheet. TIP You can also drag and drop views directly from the Project Browser onto the sheet. select the category type. modify settings as needed. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. To do so. TIP You can add sheets to the template and delete the title block. 43 Proceed to the next exercise. 36 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 37 Click OK. You can still add views to the sheet. and click OK. and click Rename. After the sheet is created. click View menu ➤ New ➤ Place Titleblock. click Sheet. click Add View. and click OK. assign filters. You may want to consider adding the schedules that you use most often. and modify their properties accordingly. and then are exported along with your project into the appropriate CAD program. Modifying Import/Export Settings on page 842. 38 Repeat the steps above for each schedule type you add to the template. Add sheets to the template 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Modifying Import/Export Settings In this exercise.txt for AutoCAD. On the Appearance tab. select the default title block. The Export Layers command maps Revit Architecture categories and subcategories to specific layer names that are available after exporting to other CAD programs.txt for MicroStation). 35 If you want to add schedules to your template. 41 To rename or renumber the sheet. On the Filter tab. you modify the export layer settings for DWG/DXF and DGN files. If you have already loaded your office title blocks into the template. 40 To add views to the sheet. and click OK. select one. and click Add View to Sheet. When you import a DWG or DXF file. This can save significant time and ensure that office standards are maintained. in the Project Browser. To later add a title block to a sheet. or exportlayersdgn. expand Sheets (all). The layer mapping files reside in the Data folder of the Revit Architecture program installation directory.

Color ID corresponds to an AutoCAD or MicroStation color ID. name the file. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters on page 843. you do not need to worry about where the text file is saved. 5 For each category. you can use shared parameters to add specific parameters to an existing family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not initially present by default. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Layer name and Color ID Cut Layer name and Color ID 3 If you modified the settings in this dialog. and so on. Their values may also be aggregated and reported using multi-category schedules. name the file. for example. 8 In the dialog. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. you can define additional parameters that are not included in the pre-defined instance and type parameters within family components or within the project template. windows. it lists components regardless of category by using an external parameter as a filter. You can save these mappings to a text file. You can add these shared parameters to any family regardless of category. Pen Number 2 to Line Weight Number 2. 9 Click Save As. Layer name corresponds to level name for MicroStation. When scheduling. you continue the refinement of the template by setting up shared parameters. Modify export layers for DGN 4 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Export Layers DGN. select Save As. These settings are retained within the project template. Using shared parameters. and so on. and they cannot be used to tag objects (as with shared parameters). and click Save. project parameters. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters | 843 . 2 For each category. doors.TIP In the Export Layers dialog. When you import a DWG or DXF file. Set as many pen-line weight mappings as desired. Modify import line weights 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Export Settings ➤ Import Line Weights DWG/DXF. Pen Number 1 to Line Weight Number 1. Their definitions are stored in an external file ensuring consistency across families and projects. When you create a multi-category schedule. You can import pen numbers from a DWG or DXF file and map them to a Revit Architecture line weight. therefore. Project parameters are parameters (either instance or type) that are used within a single project for the purposes of scheduling information specific to that project. each layer in the file is assigned a line weight based on the pen number/line weight settings you created. Setting up Shared and Project Parameters In this exercise. Multi-category tags use shared parameters to permit tagging of any family component regardless of category. and click Save. They cannot be shared with other projects. and they become the set mappings for the project. and related multi-category tags and schedules. and click Save. For example. match the pen (DWG/DXF Color Number) to the appropriate line weight. you normally schedule a single category: rooms. specify the following: ■ ■ Projection Level Number and Color ID Cut Level Number and Color ID 6 If you modified the settings in this dialog. click Save As. name the file.

click New. 24 To add a shared project parameter. click Add. 844 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . you can browse to that file and modify it as needed. project parameters. Set up project parameters 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. select a parameter value type. because each office has a unique set of needs. 2 Click Create. see Scheduling Shared Parameters on page 249 or Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule on page 226. 8 Under Parameters. enter a parameter name. 9 Name the parameter. Set up shared parameters 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. and the creation of multi-category tags and schedules. If you are unfamiliar with shared parameters. 11 For each parameter group. 22 Click OK. 17 Under Discipline. 3 Name and save the file. Create parameter groups 4 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the group you want the parameter to be listed with in the Element Properties dialog. If this template will be used by multiple team members. NOTE This procedure is for creating a new shared parameter file. 5 Enter the group name. 26 Click OK. 6 Create as many groups as needed. and click OK. select the element categories to which this parameter applies. 14 Click Add. add required parameters. select Project parameter. and select Shared Parameter. select a group to add parameters to. 21 Under Categories. If you do not need to make changes to shared or project parameters. 18 Under Type of Parameter. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog.This exercise does not provide detailed instructions. 16 Under Parameter Data. you can create a list of parameters. 19 Under Group parameter under. and choose a shared parameter. select a parameter discipline type. you can skip this exercise and move onto the last exercise of this lesson. Create shared parameters 7 Under Parameter group. 12 Click OK when you have finished creating shared parameters. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. click New. under Groups. and specify its discipline and type. For each parameter group. If a file already exists. 20 Choose whether the parameter is stored by instance or type. 10 Click OK. you may want to save the file to a network location. 25 Click Select. for Name. 23 Add project parameters as needed.

In this exercise. and click Open. and assign the categories to which this parameter applies. 37 When you have completed the schedule. For each printer. select the tag. click Schedule/Quantities. The tag is now part of the template. Notice that the shared parameters created in previous steps are available within the list of available fields. Click OK. you can select the printer for each set of named settings in the Print Setup dialog. 2 Under Printer. Creating Named Print Settings on page 845. and print. Create and load multi-category tags 30 Create required multi-category tags in the Family Editor. save the file as a template. You can also create named settings for printing to DWF and to a PDF writer. 5 Click Save As. you can set options such as sheet sizes. select Multi-Category. Create multi-category schedules 33 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 38 Create additional multi-category schedules as needed. enter a name for the print setting and click OK. select a printer for which you want to create named settings. 3 Under Settings. you create named print settings. 29 Add shared project parameters as needed. Creating Named Print Settings Depending on your office environment. and make it your default template file. enter a name for the schedule. 4 Modify the printer settings. 35 For Name. see the tutorial referenced in the introduction of this exercise. 36 Create the schedule as you did in the previous exercise. indicate the group to which the parameter belongs. click OK. 28 Click OK. Create named print settings 1 Click File menu ➤ Print. click Setup. Creating Named Print Settings | 845 .27 Choose whether you want the shared parameter to be an instance parameter or a type parameter. By creating named settings within the template. and the percent of actual size. After you have created the multi-category tags in the Family Editor. 32 Navigate to the directory. you need only select a setting. For information on creating multi-category tags. and click OK. paper placement. 39 Proceed to the final exercise. 6 In the New dialog. 34 For Category. This is especially true if you have numerous printers in a large networked office. or refer to the online help. make minor modifications if necessary. 31 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. you can load them into the template. for Name. you may find it beneficial to add named print settings to the template. By going first to the Print command.

16 Click File menu ➤ Close. 846 | Chapter 24 Modifying Project and System Settings . 24 Navigate to the template location. modify the printer settings. 15 Name the template. you modified settings. Save the template 12 Click File menu ➤ Save.7 If you want to have multiple settings for this printer. click Setup. 10 Repeat these steps as needed. The only remaining task is to save it.rte). The changes you made to the template are now the starting point for this project. Create additional settings as needed. 13 Navigate to the directory where you want to save the template. enter a new name for the printer. select a different printer. and navigate to the location where you saved the template. select it. In this lesson. Set the template as your default template file 21 Click Settings menu ➤ Options. If you have a project. and click Open. you can delete the model geometry and save the empty project as a template file. 18 Click Browse. and click Save. 14 Under Save as type. TIP You can also create named settings for your DWF and PDF writer. and saved them to a template. 8 Click OK when you have finished creating named settings for this printer. If you need to share this file with others. 19 Select the template. In addition. you significantly reduce the amount of repetitive work that would be done by each employee for each project. loaded components. select Template Files (*. save it in a network location. and click Open. you ensure that office standards are maintained. 23 For Default template file. 22 Click the File Locations tab. 11 Click Close when finished. 25 Click OK. You can also set this template as your default template. This can provide a good starting point for a template. By investing the time to individualize your template. you can use the Transfer Project Standards tool to move standards from one project to another. 9 In the Print dialog. 20 Click OK. Use the template 17 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. Your template is complete. and click OK. and create new settings for this printer. click Browse. TIP There are other ways you can create a template. click Save as. In addition.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful